Upload
dinhnhan
View
223
Download
2
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
Clause as Message Theme Topic and Information Flow inMark 21ndash12 and Jude
James D Dvorak and Ryder Dale WaltonOklahoma Christian University
Too often study of the biblical text degenerates into rudimentaryword studies leaving aside larger syntactic and logical connectionsThis paper proposes that careful study should include considerationsof genre register prime subsequent theme rheme topic andcomment To demonstrate this it applies a Systemic Functionalapproach to Mark 21ndash12 and the book of Jude
Keywords Exegesis Systemic Functional Linguistics Prime Subsequent Theme Rheme Topic Comment Process Chains Semantic Shift Cohesion Coherence Linearity Genre Register
1 Introduction
Exegesis is commonly defined as the process of ldquobringing outthe meaningrdquo of a biblical text No matter which guide a studentfollows the exegetical process inevitably includes studying thetext in its original language and rightly so1 In the past evenminimal linguistic studies of biblical text consisted of meticulousexaminations of grammar syntax and lexical semantics Presentexegetes now enjoy much greater access to high quality digitalresources including high-resolution facsimiles of ancientmanuscripts Moreover linguistic theory and modeling inbiblical studies have taken major strides forward Yetunfortunately it seems that careful linguistic study has devolved
1 Cf Porter ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo 99ndash130
[BAGL 3 (2014) 31-85]
into little more than rudimentary word studiesmdashand often theseare quite meager because they consist simply of citations of thestandard lexica2 Certainly there is value in studying theindividual parts of a text (ie words and phrases) but even incases where high quality researches of these parts are achievedexegetes must always bear in mind that a textrsquos meaning isgreater than the sum of its constituent parts3
For this reason we argue that more extensive linguisticanalyses are required if exegetes are to arrive at a fuller moreprincipled understanding of ldquowhat a text is aboutrdquo For examplemethodology deriving from Systemic Functional Linguistics(SFL)4 the underlying paradigm of the approach we modelbelow generally deploys interpretive models that seek themeaning(s) of a text along three basic functional-semanticcategories Halliday the father of SFL calls these ideationalinterpersonal and textual metafunctions5 Briefly the ideationalmetafunction refers to meanings people make with language6 as ameans of representing their experience of life as it unfoldsmapping ldquowhatrsquos going on including whorsquos doing what towhom where when why and how and the logical relation ofone going-on to anotherrdquo7 The interpersonal metafunction refersto meanings made with language that enact social relationshipsand interactions among the participants of a givencommunicative context8 Generally these relationships are
2 For a caution against this kind of practice see Yallop ldquoWords andMeaningrdquo 24ndash27
3 Halliday makes this point is a discussion of coherence and cohesionin ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo 223
4 Foundational resources include Halliday Language as SocialSemiotic Halliday ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo Halliday ldquoLanguageand Social Manrdquo
5 Halliday An Introduction to Functional Grammar 33ndash366 Ie natural human adult verbal language Cf Halliday and
Matthiessen Introduction to Functional Grammar 207 Martin and White The Language of Evaluation 7 Lemke (Textual
Politics 41) calls this ldquopresentationalrdquo meaning8 James D Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo 16 Lemke (Textual
32 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
enacted by making assertions asking questions givingcommands evaluating what one thinks or feels about peoplethings or events and by indicating onersquos relative commitment toany given proposition or proposal9 The textual metafunctionrefers to meanings made as people organize structure andintertwine ideational and interpersonal meanings into a cohesiveand coherent flow of information that is connected and relevantto the context of situation10 The features at work in thismetafunction are what allow hearers andor readers to distinguishbetween text and ldquonon-textrdquo that is between sensical discourseand nonsensical ldquoblatherrdquo11 As Martin puts it the job of thetextual metafunction is ldquoto package ideational and interpersonalmeaning as waves of information in one rhythm or anotherdepending on contextrdquo12
In this article we fix our gaze upon a set of interrelatedfeatures that operate within the textual metafunction namelyprime and subsequent theme and rheme and topic and commentFollowing Porter and OrsquoDonnell13 we suggest that prime andsubsequent function at the clause level and are specified by wordgroup order that theme and rheme function across any numberof clauses and are delimited by spans of actor and process
Politics 41) calls this ldquoorientationalrdquo meaning9 Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo 1610 James D Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo
17ndash37 (here 17) Cf Halliday ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo175ndash76 Halliday ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo 92 Lemke (TextualPolitics 41) calls this ldquoorganizationalrdquo meaning
11 Cf Halliday ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo 44ndash4512 Martin ldquoMourningrdquo 32313 As mentioned our model is anchored in Halladayan SFL yet our
perspective on theme topic and information flow has been shaped by Porterand OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 85ndash118 (as of the writing of this articlethis book has not yet gone to press all page numbers refer to a pre-publicationcopy that we obtained from the authors and use it with their permission) Seealso Porter ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo 45ndash74 Dvorak ldquoThematizationTopic and Information Flowrdquo 17ndash37
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 33
chains and that topic and comment functions at paragraph14 leveland beyond and are marked by semantic shifts15 We show howthese features are crucial with regard to the flow of informationin a text and thus its cohesion and coherence We present aseries of frameworks for analyzing each of these features andwe validate both the utility and usefulness of these models byputting them to work in analyses of both narrative and non-narrative texts namely Mark 21ndash12 and the letter of Juderespectively16
2 Discourse Structure and Information Flow
21 LinearityLanguage users cannot communicate all at once the wholecontent of meaning they wish to share with others As a result asis often said they must ldquoorganize their thoughtsrdquo so that whenthey create text the meanings they wish to make unfold linearlyin a manner that increases the probability of understanding onthe part of a reader or hearer This constraint is commonlycharacterized as a ldquoproblemrdquo that is somehow inherent to thelinguistic system17 However it is really not an issue with thelinguistic system per se it is rather simply a matter of the use oflanguage reflecting how humans experience the goings on of life
Humans experience life as a series of social processes thatunfold in a culture as countless situations18 As a result when
14 We recognize that ldquoparagraphrdquo is notoriously challenging to defineIn this article we follow Porter ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo 175ndash95
15 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 8516 We use examples from our analyses of these two texts throughout
See the appendix for full analyses17 Cf Brown and Yule Discourse Analysis 125ff Dvorak
ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 18ndash19 Porter and OrsquoDonnellDiscourse Analysis 86
18 Martin and Rose Working with Discourse 1ndash2
34 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
language users construe and reconstrue these social processes19
they encode them into texts that unfold as sequences of wordsword groups clauses clause complexes and paragraphs20 Awell-chosen starting point for each clausemdashldquoprimerdquo as we referto it belowmdashis crucial for a poorly chosen point of departuremay result in misunderstanding on the part of the text reader orhearer possibly resulting in more work for the communicatorrequiring her or him to ldquotravel hither thither and yonrdquo in aneffort to arrive at the intended meaning In this way the so-calledldquoproblemrdquo of linearity constrains a textrsquos flow of information
Yet as Porter and OrsquoDonnell point out texts are more thanldquoan ordered list of concepts realized in a string of wordsrdquo21 Theyalso have a hierarchical structure consisting of ldquochunksrdquo of textthat are organized around thematically related material22 Thearrangement of these chunks is also not unconstrained but isgoverned by two different but related levels of context contextof culture which we call genre and context of situation whichwe call register23
22 GenreFollowing Martin24 we use the term genre to refer to ldquoa stagedgoal-oriented social processrdquo25 or more technically ldquoa recurrent
19 Ie creating meaning that is constrained by context while at the sametime contributing to and reifying that context
20 Martin and Rose Working with Discourse 2 The language ofldquounfoldingrdquo highlights the linear nature of language in use Cf Brown andYule Discourse Analysis 125ndash26 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis86 Cf Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 18
21 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 8622 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 86ndash8823 Discourse structure is also constrained by ideology in that meaning
potential is not evenly distributed across participants in a culture (MartinEnglish Text 575)
24 Martin English Text 493ndash588 (esp 546ndash73) Cf Martin and RoseGenre Relations Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of Discourserdquo230ndash56
25 Martin and Rose Working with Discourse 8
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 35
configuration of meanings that enact the social practices of agiven culturerdquo26 Our view is informed by Bakhtinrsquos theory ofspeech genres which he defined as habitualized relatively stablepatterns of meaning that are made with relatively predictabletypes of interactive utterances27 From this point of view genreincludes not only literary genres but ldquoeverydayrdquo genres bothspoken and written such as service encounters political debatesgossip jokes sermons stories and so on28
The established genres of a culture provide an economy ofmeaning-making by which members of that culture are able toaccomplish the manifold social processes required of everydaylife without having to define each social process anew each timeit needs to be repeated29 This is why as Bakhtin puts it
We learn to cast our speech in generic forms and when hearingothersrsquo speech we guess its genre from the very first words predict acertain length and a certain compositional structure we foreseethe end that is from the very beginning we have a sense of thespeech whole which is only later differentiated during the speechprocess30
Bakhtinrsquos point as Eggins and Martin rightly highlight is thatstructures of discourses vary in typically familiar ways becausethe staging of the social processes they are intended toaccomplish varies on the basis of typically familiar culturalnorms31
26 Martin and Rose Genre Relations 6 Clearly our definition differsfrom that of traditional literary studies where the term tends to refer to varioustypes of literary productions that are differentiated on the basis of form andorstylistic convention (cf Tate ldquoGenrerdquo 149)
27 Cf Bakhtin ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo 60ndash102 here 60 CfDvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo 35 Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres andRegistersrdquo 236 For an excellent portrayal of Bakhtin and his thought seeHolquist Dialogism
28 Cf Eggins Introduction 5629 Berger and Luckmann Social Construction of Reality 5330 Bakhtin ldquoProblem of Speech Genresrdquo 7931 Cf Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres and Registersrdquo 236
36 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Consider for example Mark 21ndash12 This stretch of text isone of many stories that comprise the biographical history (bios)that Mark writes about Jesus32 As such this text feeds into thegreater social goal of the gospel to articulate and to defend thesignificance of Jesus and perhaps more importantly tolegitimate the value system he embodies33 The particular kind ofstory Mark employs here is narrative34 Narratives are storiesthat aim at resolving some sort of complication Typically theyconsist of an orientation one or more complication one or moreevaluation and one or more resolution35 The discourse structureof Mark 21ndash12 follows this pattern (see appendix) Orientation(vv 1ndash2) ^ Complication1 (vv 3ndash4a) ^ Evaluation1 (v 4b) ^Resolution1 (temporary) (v 5) ^ Complication2 (vv 6ndash7) ^Evaluation2 (vv 8ndash9) ^ Resolution2 (final) (vv 10ndash12)36
The text of Jude is a letter so the structure of the text is inpart constrained by the conventions of letter writing of his daygreeting (vv 1ndash2) body (vv 3ndash23) and closing (vv 24ndash25)37
Jude identifies the social purpose of his letter as anadmonishment to struggle intensely for the faith (παρακαλῶνἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ πίστει [v 3]) Here are the basic stages Judeemploys in an effort to accomplish his task offer theencouragement proper (v 3) introduce participants to be
32 Cf deSilva Introduction to the New Testament 145ndash48 StantonGospel for a New People 69ndash70 Aune New Testament in Its LiteraryEnvironment 35 ldquoThe unconscious functions of Greco-Roman biographyinvolve the historical legitimation (or discrediting) of a social beliefvaluesystem personified in the subject of the biographyrdquo (italics added)
33 Cf deSilva Introduction 14734 Other story genres include recounts anecdotes exempla and
observations Cf Martin and Rose Genre Relations 44ff35 Martin and Rose Genre Relations 52 These are the basic
components that comprise a narrative Of course the number of thesecomponents and their order may vary depending on situational variables
36 The caret (^) in this sequence means ldquofollowed byrdquo On the basicstructure of different kinds of stories cf Martin and Rose Genre Relations49ndash98 (on narratives specifically see 67ndash74)
37 Cf Gabriel ldquoLettersrdquo 193ndash94
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 37
portrayed negatively (v 4) give a series of intertextualreferences to negative exempla (vv 5ndash16) give a series ofdirectives with additional negative evaluations of the antagonistsas foils for the positive commands (vv 17ndash23)
As these brief examples demonstrate discourse structure isnot merely the result of an authorrsquos stylistic flourishes thoughindeed an author may as a matter of style intentionallymanipulate or even flout structural norms Discourse structure ishowever largely governed by the strictures of a given cultureLanguage use becomes habitualized and is used to accomplishcertain social processes in certain ways that are deemedacceptable by those who are part of the culture
23 RegisterAs mentioned above the structure of a text is also constrained bythe register or more specific context of situation in which the textwas uttered The theory of register first developed by Halliday38
and further developed by Martin (whom we follow here)39 bothmodels context of situation and explains its relationship tolanguage
First register theory stratifies context and organizes it aroundthree contextual variables or features called field tenor andmode Briefly field refers to the sequences of activities that aregoing on in a situation as well as the people things placesqualities and circumstances that are associated with thoseactivities40 Tenor refers to the kind of social relations that areenacted and negotiated among the participants in a given
38 Cf Halliday Social Semiotic 110ndash11339 Cf Martin English Text 497ndash502 also Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres
and Registers of Discourserdquo 230ndash5640 Martin and Rose Genre Relations 14 Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal
Metafunctionrdquo 27ndash28
38 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
situation41 particularly the social relations of statuspower42 andsolidaritycontact43 Mode
is concerned with symbolic realitymdashwith texture Since symbolicreality (ie textprocess) has the function of constructing socialreality mode is oriented to both interpersonal and experientialmeaning It thus mediates the role played by language along twodimensions Interpersonally mode mediates the semiotic spacebetween monologue and dialogue Experientially mode mediatesthe semiotic space between action and reflection Putting this ingeneral terms mode mediates negotiation44
Second register theory describes the relationship betweenfield tenor and mode and discourse semantics It is described asa relationship of realization (also referred to as expression orcoding) in which in Hjelmslevian terms register is the contentplane for which discourse semantics is the expression plane45 Inthis regard field is realized as ideational meaning text as therepresentation of experience Here the goings-on participantsand circumstances of field are encoded into language primarilyas verbal groups nominal groups and adverbial or participialgroups respectively Tenor is realized as interpersonal meaningtext as interaction or exchange The enactments and negotiationsof the social relations in the situation are encoded into languageprimarily through the system of verbal attitude (ie assertive[indicative] projective [subjunctive] directive [imperative]expective [future]) Tenor is also realized through the system ofappraisal (ie attitude [affect judgment appreciation] andengagement [heterogloss monogloss]) Mode is realized astextual meaning text as a series of organized messages46 Here
41 Martin English Text 523ndash26 Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo28
42 Ie the relative position of the participants in the culturersquos socialhierarchy
43 Ie the degree of institutional involvement between participants inthe situation
44 Martin English Text 50945 Martin English Text 501ndash50246 Cf Halliday ldquoFunctions of Languagerdquo 24ndash26
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 39
the elements of ideational meaning and interpersonal meaningare ldquopackagedrdquo as it were into clauses in which some portion ofeach clause has special ldquothematicrdquo status and the remainder ofthe clause develops the theme and completes the message47
Looking again at Mark 2 generic constraints of narrative maycall for the story to open with an orientation (vv 1ndash2) butregister constrains the content of the orientation IdeationallyMark construes a world (a reality an experience) in this portionof the narrative in which the goings-on consist of the followingprocesses48
bull material processes gathering together (συνήχθησαν [v 2]) separating (χωρεῖν [v 2])49
bull a mental process hearing (ἠκούσθη [v 1])bull an existential process is (ἐστίν [v 1]) bull a verbal process speaking (ἐλάλει [v 2])
The following participants are portrayed
bull ldquoherdquo (presumably Jesus) as the one who is ldquoenteringrdquo Capernaum who ldquoisrdquo in the house and who ldquowas speakingrdquo the messagebull an assumed agent (the crowd) as the one by whom it ldquowas heardrdquo that he is in the housebull ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί) (also ldquothemrdquo [αὐτοῖς]) who had ldquogatheredrdquo and couldno longer ldquoseparaterdquo and to whom ldquoherdquo was speaking the messagebull Capernaum (Καφαρναούmicro)bull a house (οἴκῳ)bull the door of the house (θύραν)bull the message or word (λόγον)
Interpersonally the storyrsquos orientation is monoglossic beingdominated by assertive verbal attitude which is grammaticalizedby indicative verbal mood This enacts a relationship betweenMark and his presumed readers in which as storyteller Mark hashigher status than the readers because he is the one who
47 Cf Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 3748 On process types see Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar
108ff Cf also Tan ldquoTransitivityrdquo np49 The participle εἰσελθών technically constitutes the circumstance for
hearing (ἠκούσθη) and is thus not a main process Circumstances too are partof ideational meaning
40 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
apparently knows everything about the situation he describesThe readers on the other hand are situated as potentialacknowledgers of what Mark asserts Moreover that Mark hasopted to include this particular narrative in his gospel indicatesan appraisal from his perspective the readers need to be toldthis story Even just within the narrativersquos orientation phase (ieat the level of the narrative50) appraisal is evident For examplethe two clauses καὶ συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲτὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν (v 2) betoken a positive evaluation of Jesusrsquogrowing honor among the masses51
In terms of the textual strand of meaning the function inwhich we are most interested here the text unfolds in a series ofclauses and each of these clauses has a ldquoleaping off pointrdquo andtypically though not always some further development of thatpoint The major concern here is with how the author chooses toorder the components of the clause Yet even this choice isconstrained by the situation and the social purpose of both thetext as a whole and the stretch of text constituting the clause Forexample as noted Mark 21ndash2 make up the orientation portion ofthe narrative Mark has chosen to tell The first clause in theorientation is Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶνἠκούσθη Not surprisingly Markrsquos point of departure in thisclause is the adjunct52 ldquoAnd entering again into Capernaum rdquo
50 Cf ldquoThe Rhetorical Effects of Attituderdquo in Dvorak ldquoInterpersonalMetafunctionrdquo 54
51 That so many people were filling the house that there was not evenspace to get into or out of the house is a token of positive judgment with regardto social esteem (t +judgment esteem normality) Further the use of the termποltοί (many) coupled with the statement that there was no room in front of thedoor (microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν) increases the force of the judgment(both graduation force quantification mass and graduation forcequantification extent distribution) Cf Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo102 also Martin and White Language of Evaluation 150ndash51
52 Ie adverbialcircumstantial participial clause Adjunct refers to aword group or groups that modify the predicator (verb) in a clause to providecircumstances associated with the process (cf ldquoOpenTextorg AnnotationModelrdquo np)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 41
This demonstrates the ldquoenablingrdquo or ldquorelevancerdquo role of thetextual metafunction namely to ldquopackagerdquo ideational andinterpersonal meanings into clauses in a way that is both relevantto and communicatively effective in light of its purpose That ishere it orients the readers to the context of the narrative Thus itis how text is being used in a given context (ie mode) thatgoverns the textual meanings that are made (ie textualmetafunction) which in turn govern the arrangements of theclause components in the realization of each clause (informationflow)
24 SummaryWe demonstrated thus far that both discourse structure andinformation flow are not merely the result of stylistic choicesmade by language users Rather structure and flow are largelygoverned by two different levels of context namely genre andregister With regard to discourse structure people deploylanguage in ways that are staged and oriented to various socialgoals The ways in which these social goals may beaccomplished with language are governed by the language userrsquosculture the staging or structure of the discourse reflects thesecultural constraints Information flow is constrained to someextent by variations in genre and to a greater extent by registervariablesmdashand of these mostly by mode The textualmetafunction arranges ideational and interpersonal meanings inways that from the language userrsquos perspective are relevant toand most effective in reaching the communicative goal of theclause in relation to the larger purpose of the text
3 Prime and Subsequent Analysis
We argued above that the role of the textual metafunction was toorganize ideational and interpersonal content into clauses in away that is relevant and consistent with register and that createsa coherent message Here we provide a framework for modelingclauses as messages and a method for interpreting thosemessages
42 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
The message of a clause consists of two parts ldquothe elementwhich serves as the point of departure of the messagerdquo and ldquotheremainder of the messagerdquo53 Although Halliday referred to theseparts as theme and rheme respectively we follow Porter andOrsquoDonnell and use the terms prime and subsequent reservingtheme and rheme for the discussion of thematic elements at thelevel of clause complex (sentence) and multi-clause complexlevel (see ldquoTheme and Rheme Analysisrdquo below)54 In the modelwe present here prime refers to ldquowho or what the clause isfocused upon realized by the first [word] group element in theclause The subsequent is defined as the development of theprime and is realized in the remaining group elements in theclauserdquo55 The prime functions to orient the reader to the messageof the clause and the subsequent provides the news about theprime that the writer wants the readers to know to experience orto remember56
Every clause has a prime element and most also have asubsequent though it is possible for a clause to consist only of aprime57 The word group element (ie subject predicatorcomplement or adjunct)58 comprising the prime may be assimple as a single word (conjunctions are excluded) or it may bea complex nominal or verbal group or even an embeddedclause59 Subsequent consists of all other word group elementsfollowing the prime For example the initial clause in Mark 21ndash12 is analyzed for prime and subsequent as follows (see theappendix for a full prime and subsequent analysis of this unit)
53 Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 37 Cf Porter andOrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 90
54 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9155 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 91 (italics theirs)56 Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2057 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 92 Dvorak
ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2058 Cf OrsquoDonnell Porter Reed Picirilli Smith and Tan ldquoClause Level
Annotation Specificationrdquo n p59 Cf Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 20
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 43
Prime SubsequentA [[P εἰσελθὼν |A πάλιν |A εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro |A δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ]] P ἠκούσθη
Markrsquos point of departure in this clause is an adjunct consistingof an embedded participial clause that realizes a temporalcontext for interpreting or understanding the subsequent whichconsists of the predicator (main verb)
The following clause from Mark 23 raises a crucial pointnamely that prime and subsequent analysis must be performedon the Greek text and not on a translation
Prime SubsequentP ἔρχονται A [[P φέροντες |A πρὸς αὐτὸν |C παραλυτικὸν [[P αἰρόmicroενον |A ὑπὸ
τεσσάρων ]] ]]
The prime of this clause is the predicator or verbal group InGreek finite verbs are monolectic which means theygrammaticalize person as part of their form through the use ofpersonal endings60 Thus it is not necessary for users of Greek tospecify explicitly a subject in a clause In fact the defaultunmarked option in biblical Greek is not to specify a subject61
However in many other languages like English for example thedefault unmarked option is to specify a subject This means ifprime and subsequent analysis is performed on an Englishtranslation it would label prime incorrectly In this particularinstance based on the English gloss ldquoThey comeare comingbringing to him a paralytic being carried by fourrdquo the primewould be ldquotheyrdquo However the actual prime is the processldquocomeare comingrdquo Thus Mark chose to begin with the material
60 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 71 Porter and OrsquoDonnell (DiscourseAnalysis 93) note that this gives the writer of Greek the flexibility to ldquo(1) notspecify a specific subject (2) specify the subject but not place it inprimary position or (3) specify the subject and place it in primary positionin the clause rdquo
61 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 93 n 148
44 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
process and to further develop it with circumstantial informationprovided by an embedded participial clause
It is often assumed that items in prime position are prominentsimply because they occupy prime position in the clause but thisis not the de facto case Determining prominence requiresconsideration of other factors including analyses of clauserealization patterns across the corpus of text written by the sameauthor (eg the Pauline epistles)62 as well as the entire NewTestament corpus and other factors such as literary genre Also tobe accounted for are features of markedness grounding andsalience63 Further research in this area is needed but it may befor example that because predicators fill prime position themajority of times across the New Testament saying that apredicator is prominent simply because it occupies primeposition in the clause would be to say too much64 That said theorder of word groups within a clause is indeed a factor indetermining prominence65
4 Theme and Rheme Analysis
Porter and OrsquoDonnell reserve the terms theme and rheme foridentifying and discussing the ldquothematic elements at the sentenceand multi-sentence levelrdquo66 This means the focus of our textualanalysis now shifts to the level above the clause When exploringtheme and rheme analysis it is important to define the terms
62 Cf Tan ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo 95ndash11063 Cf Westfall ldquoAnalysis of Prominence in Hellenistic Greekrdquo 75ndash9464 Dvorakrsquos analysis of the entire New Testament revealed that across
the entire New Testament predicators were prime 7227 times adjuncts 5767times subjects 5354 times and complements 2634 times Cf DvorakldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 25ndash26 Cf also Porter(ldquoProminencerdquo 71) who discusses patterns of order of first and second clausecomponents
65 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 67ndash6966 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 45
clearly to delineate the steps in analysis and to stress a numberof the important advantages to such an analysis
To begin one must have an understanding of the term processchain A process is any verbal action implied or inscribedwithin a clause a process chain refers to a string of verbalprocesses that form a series across a stretch of text67 This chainof processes is ascribed to a particular actor(s) who is said to bethe thematic actor Of course other participants and their actionsmay be interspersed in the same stretch of text but these do notnecessarily break the process chain associated with the thematicactor An easy example in English is as follows
Bobby went to the store There he was greeted by a clerk and thensearched for a loaf of bread When he found it however he decidedthat it was too expensive so he put it back on the shelf However anolder woman standing nearby decided she would take it Bobby thenleft the store and travelled to the Shop-For-Less down the road wherehe purchased the bread for a less expensive price
All of the verbs in this anecdote form a process chain andBobby is the primary participant Bobby went searched founddecided put left travelled and purchased Notice as well thatthe additional processes performed by the clerk and the olderwoman do not break the chain as it follows Bobby for theiractions are clearly secondary information and reactionarythroughout Bobbyrsquos story
This story provides an excellent segue to the notion of themeTheme in narrative is best seen through the transition and changeof a participant as a primary actor in a process chainmdashwhat isusually called the thematic actor68 In other words a theme is thetransition from one thematic actor to another or a change inparticipant involvement that breaks a process chain That beingsaid the thematic actor must be an explicit subject meaning thatthe actor cannot merely be implied from a verb This does notmean however that the thematic actor must be prime or evenarticulated Indeed the thematic actor can be anarthrous or
67 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9868 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
46 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
articulated prime or subsequent Provided the thematic actor isarticulated this actor can be said to be more emphatic Moreemphatic still is when the thematic actor also occupies the primeposition in the clause69 Such a theme is said to be marked andshould be noted as a potential boundary marker for a shift indiscourse topic which will be discussed more thoroughly below
Interestingly enough the thematic actor can actually bepassive which suggests that more refined language is needed infuture formulations of theme and rheme analyses The followingbrief narrative concerning a shirt demonstrates the shortcomingsof ldquoactorrdquo language
Cindyrsquos shirt was stained by an ice cream cone The shirt then had tobe tossed into the washing machine which soaked it for twentyminutes The shirt then was brought out of the wash and was placedinto the dryer for a sixty-minute tumble Finally the shirt wasremoved by Cindy and hung on the drying rack
Clearly the narrative is about the shirt It is the theme of the taleeven though it is not truly an actor in any instance Perhaps thelanguage of ldquoprimary participantrdquo could be more helpful and lessmisleading
Moving onto clausal considerations the thematic participantmust be in a primary clause or on clause level α in the OpenText model70 Any participant found in a secondary clause hasbeen rank-shifted down to level β and therefore plays asubordinate role to the circumstances of the primary clauseObviously then a subordinated participant cannot serve as theprimary participant
Lastly one must consider the concept of rhememdashtheadditional information regarding the current thematicparticipant71 which is also understood as the extensivecircumstantial information involved in a process chain Considerthe story of a young elf
69 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98-9970 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10371 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 47
Sissy was out late one night at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that shewould not be able to return to the hovel before the werewolves cameout for the night she decided to employ her cunning Acting quicklyshe pulled leaves and twigs off of a few nearby oaks and began toconstruct a glider She then climbed atop the tallest tree at her friendsrsquoden and sets sail for home landing safely at her hovel just as sheheard the first howl of the dark night She was safe safe indeed
In the preceding story all of the details concerning her activitiesthe building gliding landing and so on all serve as rhematicmaterial to fill out the picture of the text It is clear that thissection of text is about Sissy since she is the primary participantThe rheme is what allows the reader to know that the story istruly about not only Sissy but also her quick wit and her returnvoyage home
Briefly it is worth noting that following the application ofboth prime and subsequent analysis and theme and rhemeanalysis the two analyses may be cross examined for additionaland enlightening findings For example should a prime in aclause also be a theme then the theme is considered markedmeaning that the author chose to launch his clause with thetheme change72 This reflects the nature of language in that thespeaker has to make a choice regarding how to start a clauseSince language is necessarily syntagmatic and paradigmaticmdashlinear and oppositionalmdashonly one thing can be said at a timeTherefore the first chosen words that come out of the mouthmust be considered significant especially in the language ofGreek where word order is significantly more malleable than inEnglish although it is important to note that a linguistic choice isnot always conscious
To grasp how the idea of prime and theme work together hereis a small reiteration of Sissyrsquos story ldquoSissy was out late onenight at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that she would not be ableto return to the hovel before the werewolves came out for thenight she decided to employ her cunningrdquo Notice how the firstclause begins with ldquoSissyrdquo as both the prime and the thematic
72 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 100-101
48 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
participant There is no question as to whom the story pertainsHowever the prime in the following sentence is actually aparticiple adjunct material which sets the stage for the problemin the text Thus the kernel of truth from these first twosentences is that Sissy realizes she has a problem Without thecoupling of prime and theme such a realization could very wellbe missed by a casual reader or interpreter leading to amisunderstanding of character prominence73 The true beauty ofthese analyses therefore can be seen in the fact that they causethe analyst to slow down and appreciate the rhetoric within thetext itself
The importance of theme and rheme analysis cannot beunderstated for it is key in determining exactly what the authoris trying to communicate in a given pericope The thematic actorin a given process chain is the governing character in a multi-sentence portion of the text All of the information that iscircumstantial to the theme is the rheme and should be treated asadding additional information to the theme If one were toconfuse this then one would be in danger of putting words in theauthorrsquos mouth and mirror reading into the text Thereforetheme and rheme analysis is critical to providing the clearestpossible picture of a textrsquos message the bits of the text that theauthor considers most important which leads to the best possibleapplications for daily living
There are only two thematic units in Mark 21ndash12 (cf theappendix for a full theme-rheme analysis) The first thematic unitconsists of verses 1ndash5 In this unit the only explicit subject of aprocess chain that occurs in a primary clause is ποltοί (v 2)Mark has not chosen the most heavily marked theme optionsince ποltοί does not also occupy prime position in the clauseAlthough ὁ παραλυτικός occurs in the subject slot of clause 16 (v4) it occurs in a dependent clause thus it does not constitute athematic shift Ὁ Ἰησοῦς occurs in v 5 but it is part of asecondary embedded participial clause that serves as an adjunctin the primary clause and is therefore not a thematic shift The
73 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 104-105
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 49
only remaining possibility is αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι in clause 19 (v 5)however although it is subject in a primary clause it belongs toa stretch of reported speech and is thus not a thematic shift Thenext thematic unit begins at clause 20 (v 6) with τινες τῶνγραmicromicroατέων (not marked) and extends all the way through to theend of the unit (v 12) Again a number of other subjects occur inthe subsequent clauses but as in the first unit none of themqualifies as a thematic shift because either they occur as part ofreported speech or secondary clauses (embedded or standalone)
There are only a couple thematic units in Jude A few of thesewill be examined below to demonstrate what has been writtenabove The first of these examples comes from clause twelve
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸκρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειανκαὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
Here we have an example of an unmarked theme for thetheme is not prime in the clause Τινες ἄνθρωποι is the primaryparticipant of this clause The rest of the material is rhematic inthat it is giving additional information about these ldquocertainpeoplerdquo The most significant of the rhematic material here is theprocess associated with the subject on the primary clause levelThis process is παρεισέδυσαν essentially meaning that thesepeople have snuck in among them There are other processeshowever involved that are related back to the theme here whichform a process chain when taken together Some of thesepredicators are participles which associate variouscircumstantial bits with the theme provided Other verbs found inclauses 29ndash32 are also on the primary level which at leastinclude microιαίνουσιν ἀθετοῦσιν and βλασφηmicroοῦσιν Each of theseverbs is intensely negative in nature which supports theassertion that the author genuinely does not approve of theseindividuals at all
Now one might assert that these verbs should be rhematic forother subjects since there are indeed other subjects that theseverbs predicate However there is no explicit subject on theprimary clause level that signals a change in theme after τινες
50 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
ἄνθρωποι until Μιχαὴλ74 Since this is the case it cannot be saidthat any of these intermediate participants is thematic Thesecondary clauses embedded or otherwise cannot carry enoughweight to be thematic since they are additional information usedto support the primary material they follow
The second example comes from clause 40 Οὗτοι δὲ ὅσα microὲνοὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν In this example the theme is markedmeaning that the primary participant is also in the primeposition Since the author chose to present this theme as markedit likely has extra weight In this instance the marked theme isactually a reference back to the theme in clause twelve whichserves as the topic of the entire discourse Thus it is likely thatthe theme is marked as the author tries to reorient his audiencetoward himself as opposed to his adversaries
The final example comes from clause 67 καὶ τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶνλαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν In thisexample the subject is articulated and prime which makes thisan especially marked theme When the subject comes at thebeginning of the clause the subject is the leaping off point of theclause the first bit of information that flows out of the speakerOn top of all of this the author took the time to articulate thetheme which is not necessarily required in Greek All of theseelements work together to draw attention to the subject in subtleyet important ways It is possible that this theme is so marked asthe author wants to draw attention to the wicked speech thatspills forth from the mouths of τινες ἄνθρωποιmdashspeech to whichthe author clearly does not want his audience listening
5 Topic and Comment Analysis
Topic and comment analysis functions at the highest level ofdiscourse This level includes the clause complex paragraph and
74 The demonstrative pronoun οὗτοι in clause 29 does not signal a themechange because it is a reference back to the current theme τινες ἄνθρωποι Thiswould be similar to the use of a personal pronoun like ldquoherdquo He is a referentback to a governing term that has been established in most cases as is οὗτοι
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 51
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
into little more than rudimentary word studiesmdashand often theseare quite meager because they consist simply of citations of thestandard lexica2 Certainly there is value in studying theindividual parts of a text (ie words and phrases) but even incases where high quality researches of these parts are achievedexegetes must always bear in mind that a textrsquos meaning isgreater than the sum of its constituent parts3
For this reason we argue that more extensive linguisticanalyses are required if exegetes are to arrive at a fuller moreprincipled understanding of ldquowhat a text is aboutrdquo For examplemethodology deriving from Systemic Functional Linguistics(SFL)4 the underlying paradigm of the approach we modelbelow generally deploys interpretive models that seek themeaning(s) of a text along three basic functional-semanticcategories Halliday the father of SFL calls these ideationalinterpersonal and textual metafunctions5 Briefly the ideationalmetafunction refers to meanings people make with language6 as ameans of representing their experience of life as it unfoldsmapping ldquowhatrsquos going on including whorsquos doing what towhom where when why and how and the logical relation ofone going-on to anotherrdquo7 The interpersonal metafunction refersto meanings made with language that enact social relationshipsand interactions among the participants of a givencommunicative context8 Generally these relationships are
2 For a caution against this kind of practice see Yallop ldquoWords andMeaningrdquo 24ndash27
3 Halliday makes this point is a discussion of coherence and cohesionin ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo 223
4 Foundational resources include Halliday Language as SocialSemiotic Halliday ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo Halliday ldquoLanguageand Social Manrdquo
5 Halliday An Introduction to Functional Grammar 33ndash366 Ie natural human adult verbal language Cf Halliday and
Matthiessen Introduction to Functional Grammar 207 Martin and White The Language of Evaluation 7 Lemke (Textual
Politics 41) calls this ldquopresentationalrdquo meaning8 James D Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo 16 Lemke (Textual
32 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
enacted by making assertions asking questions givingcommands evaluating what one thinks or feels about peoplethings or events and by indicating onersquos relative commitment toany given proposition or proposal9 The textual metafunctionrefers to meanings made as people organize structure andintertwine ideational and interpersonal meanings into a cohesiveand coherent flow of information that is connected and relevantto the context of situation10 The features at work in thismetafunction are what allow hearers andor readers to distinguishbetween text and ldquonon-textrdquo that is between sensical discourseand nonsensical ldquoblatherrdquo11 As Martin puts it the job of thetextual metafunction is ldquoto package ideational and interpersonalmeaning as waves of information in one rhythm or anotherdepending on contextrdquo12
In this article we fix our gaze upon a set of interrelatedfeatures that operate within the textual metafunction namelyprime and subsequent theme and rheme and topic and commentFollowing Porter and OrsquoDonnell13 we suggest that prime andsubsequent function at the clause level and are specified by wordgroup order that theme and rheme function across any numberof clauses and are delimited by spans of actor and process
Politics 41) calls this ldquoorientationalrdquo meaning9 Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo 1610 James D Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo
17ndash37 (here 17) Cf Halliday ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo175ndash76 Halliday ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo 92 Lemke (TextualPolitics 41) calls this ldquoorganizationalrdquo meaning
11 Cf Halliday ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo 44ndash4512 Martin ldquoMourningrdquo 32313 As mentioned our model is anchored in Halladayan SFL yet our
perspective on theme topic and information flow has been shaped by Porterand OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 85ndash118 (as of the writing of this articlethis book has not yet gone to press all page numbers refer to a pre-publicationcopy that we obtained from the authors and use it with their permission) Seealso Porter ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo 45ndash74 Dvorak ldquoThematizationTopic and Information Flowrdquo 17ndash37
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 33
chains and that topic and comment functions at paragraph14 leveland beyond and are marked by semantic shifts15 We show howthese features are crucial with regard to the flow of informationin a text and thus its cohesion and coherence We present aseries of frameworks for analyzing each of these features andwe validate both the utility and usefulness of these models byputting them to work in analyses of both narrative and non-narrative texts namely Mark 21ndash12 and the letter of Juderespectively16
2 Discourse Structure and Information Flow
21 LinearityLanguage users cannot communicate all at once the wholecontent of meaning they wish to share with others As a result asis often said they must ldquoorganize their thoughtsrdquo so that whenthey create text the meanings they wish to make unfold linearlyin a manner that increases the probability of understanding onthe part of a reader or hearer This constraint is commonlycharacterized as a ldquoproblemrdquo that is somehow inherent to thelinguistic system17 However it is really not an issue with thelinguistic system per se it is rather simply a matter of the use oflanguage reflecting how humans experience the goings on of life
Humans experience life as a series of social processes thatunfold in a culture as countless situations18 As a result when
14 We recognize that ldquoparagraphrdquo is notoriously challenging to defineIn this article we follow Porter ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo 175ndash95
15 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 8516 We use examples from our analyses of these two texts throughout
See the appendix for full analyses17 Cf Brown and Yule Discourse Analysis 125ff Dvorak
ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 18ndash19 Porter and OrsquoDonnellDiscourse Analysis 86
18 Martin and Rose Working with Discourse 1ndash2
34 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
language users construe and reconstrue these social processes19
they encode them into texts that unfold as sequences of wordsword groups clauses clause complexes and paragraphs20 Awell-chosen starting point for each clausemdashldquoprimerdquo as we referto it belowmdashis crucial for a poorly chosen point of departuremay result in misunderstanding on the part of the text reader orhearer possibly resulting in more work for the communicatorrequiring her or him to ldquotravel hither thither and yonrdquo in aneffort to arrive at the intended meaning In this way the so-calledldquoproblemrdquo of linearity constrains a textrsquos flow of information
Yet as Porter and OrsquoDonnell point out texts are more thanldquoan ordered list of concepts realized in a string of wordsrdquo21 Theyalso have a hierarchical structure consisting of ldquochunksrdquo of textthat are organized around thematically related material22 Thearrangement of these chunks is also not unconstrained but isgoverned by two different but related levels of context contextof culture which we call genre and context of situation whichwe call register23
22 GenreFollowing Martin24 we use the term genre to refer to ldquoa stagedgoal-oriented social processrdquo25 or more technically ldquoa recurrent
19 Ie creating meaning that is constrained by context while at the sametime contributing to and reifying that context
20 Martin and Rose Working with Discourse 2 The language ofldquounfoldingrdquo highlights the linear nature of language in use Cf Brown andYule Discourse Analysis 125ndash26 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis86 Cf Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 18
21 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 8622 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 86ndash8823 Discourse structure is also constrained by ideology in that meaning
potential is not evenly distributed across participants in a culture (MartinEnglish Text 575)
24 Martin English Text 493ndash588 (esp 546ndash73) Cf Martin and RoseGenre Relations Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of Discourserdquo230ndash56
25 Martin and Rose Working with Discourse 8
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 35
configuration of meanings that enact the social practices of agiven culturerdquo26 Our view is informed by Bakhtinrsquos theory ofspeech genres which he defined as habitualized relatively stablepatterns of meaning that are made with relatively predictabletypes of interactive utterances27 From this point of view genreincludes not only literary genres but ldquoeverydayrdquo genres bothspoken and written such as service encounters political debatesgossip jokes sermons stories and so on28
The established genres of a culture provide an economy ofmeaning-making by which members of that culture are able toaccomplish the manifold social processes required of everydaylife without having to define each social process anew each timeit needs to be repeated29 This is why as Bakhtin puts it
We learn to cast our speech in generic forms and when hearingothersrsquo speech we guess its genre from the very first words predict acertain length and a certain compositional structure we foreseethe end that is from the very beginning we have a sense of thespeech whole which is only later differentiated during the speechprocess30
Bakhtinrsquos point as Eggins and Martin rightly highlight is thatstructures of discourses vary in typically familiar ways becausethe staging of the social processes they are intended toaccomplish varies on the basis of typically familiar culturalnorms31
26 Martin and Rose Genre Relations 6 Clearly our definition differsfrom that of traditional literary studies where the term tends to refer to varioustypes of literary productions that are differentiated on the basis of form andorstylistic convention (cf Tate ldquoGenrerdquo 149)
27 Cf Bakhtin ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo 60ndash102 here 60 CfDvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo 35 Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres andRegistersrdquo 236 For an excellent portrayal of Bakhtin and his thought seeHolquist Dialogism
28 Cf Eggins Introduction 5629 Berger and Luckmann Social Construction of Reality 5330 Bakhtin ldquoProblem of Speech Genresrdquo 7931 Cf Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres and Registersrdquo 236
36 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Consider for example Mark 21ndash12 This stretch of text isone of many stories that comprise the biographical history (bios)that Mark writes about Jesus32 As such this text feeds into thegreater social goal of the gospel to articulate and to defend thesignificance of Jesus and perhaps more importantly tolegitimate the value system he embodies33 The particular kind ofstory Mark employs here is narrative34 Narratives are storiesthat aim at resolving some sort of complication Typically theyconsist of an orientation one or more complication one or moreevaluation and one or more resolution35 The discourse structureof Mark 21ndash12 follows this pattern (see appendix) Orientation(vv 1ndash2) ^ Complication1 (vv 3ndash4a) ^ Evaluation1 (v 4b) ^Resolution1 (temporary) (v 5) ^ Complication2 (vv 6ndash7) ^Evaluation2 (vv 8ndash9) ^ Resolution2 (final) (vv 10ndash12)36
The text of Jude is a letter so the structure of the text is inpart constrained by the conventions of letter writing of his daygreeting (vv 1ndash2) body (vv 3ndash23) and closing (vv 24ndash25)37
Jude identifies the social purpose of his letter as anadmonishment to struggle intensely for the faith (παρακαλῶνἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ πίστει [v 3]) Here are the basic stages Judeemploys in an effort to accomplish his task offer theencouragement proper (v 3) introduce participants to be
32 Cf deSilva Introduction to the New Testament 145ndash48 StantonGospel for a New People 69ndash70 Aune New Testament in Its LiteraryEnvironment 35 ldquoThe unconscious functions of Greco-Roman biographyinvolve the historical legitimation (or discrediting) of a social beliefvaluesystem personified in the subject of the biographyrdquo (italics added)
33 Cf deSilva Introduction 14734 Other story genres include recounts anecdotes exempla and
observations Cf Martin and Rose Genre Relations 44ff35 Martin and Rose Genre Relations 52 These are the basic
components that comprise a narrative Of course the number of thesecomponents and their order may vary depending on situational variables
36 The caret (^) in this sequence means ldquofollowed byrdquo On the basicstructure of different kinds of stories cf Martin and Rose Genre Relations49ndash98 (on narratives specifically see 67ndash74)
37 Cf Gabriel ldquoLettersrdquo 193ndash94
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 37
portrayed negatively (v 4) give a series of intertextualreferences to negative exempla (vv 5ndash16) give a series ofdirectives with additional negative evaluations of the antagonistsas foils for the positive commands (vv 17ndash23)
As these brief examples demonstrate discourse structure isnot merely the result of an authorrsquos stylistic flourishes thoughindeed an author may as a matter of style intentionallymanipulate or even flout structural norms Discourse structure ishowever largely governed by the strictures of a given cultureLanguage use becomes habitualized and is used to accomplishcertain social processes in certain ways that are deemedacceptable by those who are part of the culture
23 RegisterAs mentioned above the structure of a text is also constrained bythe register or more specific context of situation in which the textwas uttered The theory of register first developed by Halliday38
and further developed by Martin (whom we follow here)39 bothmodels context of situation and explains its relationship tolanguage
First register theory stratifies context and organizes it aroundthree contextual variables or features called field tenor andmode Briefly field refers to the sequences of activities that aregoing on in a situation as well as the people things placesqualities and circumstances that are associated with thoseactivities40 Tenor refers to the kind of social relations that areenacted and negotiated among the participants in a given
38 Cf Halliday Social Semiotic 110ndash11339 Cf Martin English Text 497ndash502 also Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres
and Registers of Discourserdquo 230ndash5640 Martin and Rose Genre Relations 14 Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal
Metafunctionrdquo 27ndash28
38 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
situation41 particularly the social relations of statuspower42 andsolidaritycontact43 Mode
is concerned with symbolic realitymdashwith texture Since symbolicreality (ie textprocess) has the function of constructing socialreality mode is oriented to both interpersonal and experientialmeaning It thus mediates the role played by language along twodimensions Interpersonally mode mediates the semiotic spacebetween monologue and dialogue Experientially mode mediatesthe semiotic space between action and reflection Putting this ingeneral terms mode mediates negotiation44
Second register theory describes the relationship betweenfield tenor and mode and discourse semantics It is described asa relationship of realization (also referred to as expression orcoding) in which in Hjelmslevian terms register is the contentplane for which discourse semantics is the expression plane45 Inthis regard field is realized as ideational meaning text as therepresentation of experience Here the goings-on participantsand circumstances of field are encoded into language primarilyas verbal groups nominal groups and adverbial or participialgroups respectively Tenor is realized as interpersonal meaningtext as interaction or exchange The enactments and negotiationsof the social relations in the situation are encoded into languageprimarily through the system of verbal attitude (ie assertive[indicative] projective [subjunctive] directive [imperative]expective [future]) Tenor is also realized through the system ofappraisal (ie attitude [affect judgment appreciation] andengagement [heterogloss monogloss]) Mode is realized astextual meaning text as a series of organized messages46 Here
41 Martin English Text 523ndash26 Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo28
42 Ie the relative position of the participants in the culturersquos socialhierarchy
43 Ie the degree of institutional involvement between participants inthe situation
44 Martin English Text 50945 Martin English Text 501ndash50246 Cf Halliday ldquoFunctions of Languagerdquo 24ndash26
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 39
the elements of ideational meaning and interpersonal meaningare ldquopackagedrdquo as it were into clauses in which some portion ofeach clause has special ldquothematicrdquo status and the remainder ofthe clause develops the theme and completes the message47
Looking again at Mark 2 generic constraints of narrative maycall for the story to open with an orientation (vv 1ndash2) butregister constrains the content of the orientation IdeationallyMark construes a world (a reality an experience) in this portionof the narrative in which the goings-on consist of the followingprocesses48
bull material processes gathering together (συνήχθησαν [v 2]) separating (χωρεῖν [v 2])49
bull a mental process hearing (ἠκούσθη [v 1])bull an existential process is (ἐστίν [v 1]) bull a verbal process speaking (ἐλάλει [v 2])
The following participants are portrayed
bull ldquoherdquo (presumably Jesus) as the one who is ldquoenteringrdquo Capernaum who ldquoisrdquo in the house and who ldquowas speakingrdquo the messagebull an assumed agent (the crowd) as the one by whom it ldquowas heardrdquo that he is in the housebull ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί) (also ldquothemrdquo [αὐτοῖς]) who had ldquogatheredrdquo and couldno longer ldquoseparaterdquo and to whom ldquoherdquo was speaking the messagebull Capernaum (Καφαρναούmicro)bull a house (οἴκῳ)bull the door of the house (θύραν)bull the message or word (λόγον)
Interpersonally the storyrsquos orientation is monoglossic beingdominated by assertive verbal attitude which is grammaticalizedby indicative verbal mood This enacts a relationship betweenMark and his presumed readers in which as storyteller Mark hashigher status than the readers because he is the one who
47 Cf Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 3748 On process types see Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar
108ff Cf also Tan ldquoTransitivityrdquo np49 The participle εἰσελθών technically constitutes the circumstance for
hearing (ἠκούσθη) and is thus not a main process Circumstances too are partof ideational meaning
40 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
apparently knows everything about the situation he describesThe readers on the other hand are situated as potentialacknowledgers of what Mark asserts Moreover that Mark hasopted to include this particular narrative in his gospel indicatesan appraisal from his perspective the readers need to be toldthis story Even just within the narrativersquos orientation phase (ieat the level of the narrative50) appraisal is evident For examplethe two clauses καὶ συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲτὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν (v 2) betoken a positive evaluation of Jesusrsquogrowing honor among the masses51
In terms of the textual strand of meaning the function inwhich we are most interested here the text unfolds in a series ofclauses and each of these clauses has a ldquoleaping off pointrdquo andtypically though not always some further development of thatpoint The major concern here is with how the author chooses toorder the components of the clause Yet even this choice isconstrained by the situation and the social purpose of both thetext as a whole and the stretch of text constituting the clause Forexample as noted Mark 21ndash2 make up the orientation portion ofthe narrative Mark has chosen to tell The first clause in theorientation is Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶνἠκούσθη Not surprisingly Markrsquos point of departure in thisclause is the adjunct52 ldquoAnd entering again into Capernaum rdquo
50 Cf ldquoThe Rhetorical Effects of Attituderdquo in Dvorak ldquoInterpersonalMetafunctionrdquo 54
51 That so many people were filling the house that there was not evenspace to get into or out of the house is a token of positive judgment with regardto social esteem (t +judgment esteem normality) Further the use of the termποltοί (many) coupled with the statement that there was no room in front of thedoor (microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν) increases the force of the judgment(both graduation force quantification mass and graduation forcequantification extent distribution) Cf Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo102 also Martin and White Language of Evaluation 150ndash51
52 Ie adverbialcircumstantial participial clause Adjunct refers to aword group or groups that modify the predicator (verb) in a clause to providecircumstances associated with the process (cf ldquoOpenTextorg AnnotationModelrdquo np)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 41
This demonstrates the ldquoenablingrdquo or ldquorelevancerdquo role of thetextual metafunction namely to ldquopackagerdquo ideational andinterpersonal meanings into clauses in a way that is both relevantto and communicatively effective in light of its purpose That ishere it orients the readers to the context of the narrative Thus itis how text is being used in a given context (ie mode) thatgoverns the textual meanings that are made (ie textualmetafunction) which in turn govern the arrangements of theclause components in the realization of each clause (informationflow)
24 SummaryWe demonstrated thus far that both discourse structure andinformation flow are not merely the result of stylistic choicesmade by language users Rather structure and flow are largelygoverned by two different levels of context namely genre andregister With regard to discourse structure people deploylanguage in ways that are staged and oriented to various socialgoals The ways in which these social goals may beaccomplished with language are governed by the language userrsquosculture the staging or structure of the discourse reflects thesecultural constraints Information flow is constrained to someextent by variations in genre and to a greater extent by registervariablesmdashand of these mostly by mode The textualmetafunction arranges ideational and interpersonal meanings inways that from the language userrsquos perspective are relevant toand most effective in reaching the communicative goal of theclause in relation to the larger purpose of the text
3 Prime and Subsequent Analysis
We argued above that the role of the textual metafunction was toorganize ideational and interpersonal content into clauses in away that is relevant and consistent with register and that createsa coherent message Here we provide a framework for modelingclauses as messages and a method for interpreting thosemessages
42 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
The message of a clause consists of two parts ldquothe elementwhich serves as the point of departure of the messagerdquo and ldquotheremainder of the messagerdquo53 Although Halliday referred to theseparts as theme and rheme respectively we follow Porter andOrsquoDonnell and use the terms prime and subsequent reservingtheme and rheme for the discussion of thematic elements at thelevel of clause complex (sentence) and multi-clause complexlevel (see ldquoTheme and Rheme Analysisrdquo below)54 In the modelwe present here prime refers to ldquowho or what the clause isfocused upon realized by the first [word] group element in theclause The subsequent is defined as the development of theprime and is realized in the remaining group elements in theclauserdquo55 The prime functions to orient the reader to the messageof the clause and the subsequent provides the news about theprime that the writer wants the readers to know to experience orto remember56
Every clause has a prime element and most also have asubsequent though it is possible for a clause to consist only of aprime57 The word group element (ie subject predicatorcomplement or adjunct)58 comprising the prime may be assimple as a single word (conjunctions are excluded) or it may bea complex nominal or verbal group or even an embeddedclause59 Subsequent consists of all other word group elementsfollowing the prime For example the initial clause in Mark 21ndash12 is analyzed for prime and subsequent as follows (see theappendix for a full prime and subsequent analysis of this unit)
53 Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 37 Cf Porter andOrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 90
54 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9155 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 91 (italics theirs)56 Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2057 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 92 Dvorak
ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2058 Cf OrsquoDonnell Porter Reed Picirilli Smith and Tan ldquoClause Level
Annotation Specificationrdquo n p59 Cf Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 20
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 43
Prime SubsequentA [[P εἰσελθὼν |A πάλιν |A εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro |A δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ]] P ἠκούσθη
Markrsquos point of departure in this clause is an adjunct consistingof an embedded participial clause that realizes a temporalcontext for interpreting or understanding the subsequent whichconsists of the predicator (main verb)
The following clause from Mark 23 raises a crucial pointnamely that prime and subsequent analysis must be performedon the Greek text and not on a translation
Prime SubsequentP ἔρχονται A [[P φέροντες |A πρὸς αὐτὸν |C παραλυτικὸν [[P αἰρόmicroενον |A ὑπὸ
τεσσάρων ]] ]]
The prime of this clause is the predicator or verbal group InGreek finite verbs are monolectic which means theygrammaticalize person as part of their form through the use ofpersonal endings60 Thus it is not necessary for users of Greek tospecify explicitly a subject in a clause In fact the defaultunmarked option in biblical Greek is not to specify a subject61
However in many other languages like English for example thedefault unmarked option is to specify a subject This means ifprime and subsequent analysis is performed on an Englishtranslation it would label prime incorrectly In this particularinstance based on the English gloss ldquoThey comeare comingbringing to him a paralytic being carried by fourrdquo the primewould be ldquotheyrdquo However the actual prime is the processldquocomeare comingrdquo Thus Mark chose to begin with the material
60 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 71 Porter and OrsquoDonnell (DiscourseAnalysis 93) note that this gives the writer of Greek the flexibility to ldquo(1) notspecify a specific subject (2) specify the subject but not place it inprimary position or (3) specify the subject and place it in primary positionin the clause rdquo
61 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 93 n 148
44 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
process and to further develop it with circumstantial informationprovided by an embedded participial clause
It is often assumed that items in prime position are prominentsimply because they occupy prime position in the clause but thisis not the de facto case Determining prominence requiresconsideration of other factors including analyses of clauserealization patterns across the corpus of text written by the sameauthor (eg the Pauline epistles)62 as well as the entire NewTestament corpus and other factors such as literary genre Also tobe accounted for are features of markedness grounding andsalience63 Further research in this area is needed but it may befor example that because predicators fill prime position themajority of times across the New Testament saying that apredicator is prominent simply because it occupies primeposition in the clause would be to say too much64 That said theorder of word groups within a clause is indeed a factor indetermining prominence65
4 Theme and Rheme Analysis
Porter and OrsquoDonnell reserve the terms theme and rheme foridentifying and discussing the ldquothematic elements at the sentenceand multi-sentence levelrdquo66 This means the focus of our textualanalysis now shifts to the level above the clause When exploringtheme and rheme analysis it is important to define the terms
62 Cf Tan ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo 95ndash11063 Cf Westfall ldquoAnalysis of Prominence in Hellenistic Greekrdquo 75ndash9464 Dvorakrsquos analysis of the entire New Testament revealed that across
the entire New Testament predicators were prime 7227 times adjuncts 5767times subjects 5354 times and complements 2634 times Cf DvorakldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 25ndash26 Cf also Porter(ldquoProminencerdquo 71) who discusses patterns of order of first and second clausecomponents
65 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 67ndash6966 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 45
clearly to delineate the steps in analysis and to stress a numberof the important advantages to such an analysis
To begin one must have an understanding of the term processchain A process is any verbal action implied or inscribedwithin a clause a process chain refers to a string of verbalprocesses that form a series across a stretch of text67 This chainof processes is ascribed to a particular actor(s) who is said to bethe thematic actor Of course other participants and their actionsmay be interspersed in the same stretch of text but these do notnecessarily break the process chain associated with the thematicactor An easy example in English is as follows
Bobby went to the store There he was greeted by a clerk and thensearched for a loaf of bread When he found it however he decidedthat it was too expensive so he put it back on the shelf However anolder woman standing nearby decided she would take it Bobby thenleft the store and travelled to the Shop-For-Less down the road wherehe purchased the bread for a less expensive price
All of the verbs in this anecdote form a process chain andBobby is the primary participant Bobby went searched founddecided put left travelled and purchased Notice as well thatthe additional processes performed by the clerk and the olderwoman do not break the chain as it follows Bobby for theiractions are clearly secondary information and reactionarythroughout Bobbyrsquos story
This story provides an excellent segue to the notion of themeTheme in narrative is best seen through the transition and changeof a participant as a primary actor in a process chainmdashwhat isusually called the thematic actor68 In other words a theme is thetransition from one thematic actor to another or a change inparticipant involvement that breaks a process chain That beingsaid the thematic actor must be an explicit subject meaning thatthe actor cannot merely be implied from a verb This does notmean however that the thematic actor must be prime or evenarticulated Indeed the thematic actor can be anarthrous or
67 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9868 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
46 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
articulated prime or subsequent Provided the thematic actor isarticulated this actor can be said to be more emphatic Moreemphatic still is when the thematic actor also occupies the primeposition in the clause69 Such a theme is said to be marked andshould be noted as a potential boundary marker for a shift indiscourse topic which will be discussed more thoroughly below
Interestingly enough the thematic actor can actually bepassive which suggests that more refined language is needed infuture formulations of theme and rheme analyses The followingbrief narrative concerning a shirt demonstrates the shortcomingsof ldquoactorrdquo language
Cindyrsquos shirt was stained by an ice cream cone The shirt then had tobe tossed into the washing machine which soaked it for twentyminutes The shirt then was brought out of the wash and was placedinto the dryer for a sixty-minute tumble Finally the shirt wasremoved by Cindy and hung on the drying rack
Clearly the narrative is about the shirt It is the theme of the taleeven though it is not truly an actor in any instance Perhaps thelanguage of ldquoprimary participantrdquo could be more helpful and lessmisleading
Moving onto clausal considerations the thematic participantmust be in a primary clause or on clause level α in the OpenText model70 Any participant found in a secondary clause hasbeen rank-shifted down to level β and therefore plays asubordinate role to the circumstances of the primary clauseObviously then a subordinated participant cannot serve as theprimary participant
Lastly one must consider the concept of rhememdashtheadditional information regarding the current thematicparticipant71 which is also understood as the extensivecircumstantial information involved in a process chain Considerthe story of a young elf
69 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98-9970 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10371 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 47
Sissy was out late one night at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that shewould not be able to return to the hovel before the werewolves cameout for the night she decided to employ her cunning Acting quicklyshe pulled leaves and twigs off of a few nearby oaks and began toconstruct a glider She then climbed atop the tallest tree at her friendsrsquoden and sets sail for home landing safely at her hovel just as sheheard the first howl of the dark night She was safe safe indeed
In the preceding story all of the details concerning her activitiesthe building gliding landing and so on all serve as rhematicmaterial to fill out the picture of the text It is clear that thissection of text is about Sissy since she is the primary participantThe rheme is what allows the reader to know that the story istruly about not only Sissy but also her quick wit and her returnvoyage home
Briefly it is worth noting that following the application ofboth prime and subsequent analysis and theme and rhemeanalysis the two analyses may be cross examined for additionaland enlightening findings For example should a prime in aclause also be a theme then the theme is considered markedmeaning that the author chose to launch his clause with thetheme change72 This reflects the nature of language in that thespeaker has to make a choice regarding how to start a clauseSince language is necessarily syntagmatic and paradigmaticmdashlinear and oppositionalmdashonly one thing can be said at a timeTherefore the first chosen words that come out of the mouthmust be considered significant especially in the language ofGreek where word order is significantly more malleable than inEnglish although it is important to note that a linguistic choice isnot always conscious
To grasp how the idea of prime and theme work together hereis a small reiteration of Sissyrsquos story ldquoSissy was out late onenight at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that she would not be ableto return to the hovel before the werewolves came out for thenight she decided to employ her cunningrdquo Notice how the firstclause begins with ldquoSissyrdquo as both the prime and the thematic
72 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 100-101
48 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
participant There is no question as to whom the story pertainsHowever the prime in the following sentence is actually aparticiple adjunct material which sets the stage for the problemin the text Thus the kernel of truth from these first twosentences is that Sissy realizes she has a problem Without thecoupling of prime and theme such a realization could very wellbe missed by a casual reader or interpreter leading to amisunderstanding of character prominence73 The true beauty ofthese analyses therefore can be seen in the fact that they causethe analyst to slow down and appreciate the rhetoric within thetext itself
The importance of theme and rheme analysis cannot beunderstated for it is key in determining exactly what the authoris trying to communicate in a given pericope The thematic actorin a given process chain is the governing character in a multi-sentence portion of the text All of the information that iscircumstantial to the theme is the rheme and should be treated asadding additional information to the theme If one were toconfuse this then one would be in danger of putting words in theauthorrsquos mouth and mirror reading into the text Thereforetheme and rheme analysis is critical to providing the clearestpossible picture of a textrsquos message the bits of the text that theauthor considers most important which leads to the best possibleapplications for daily living
There are only two thematic units in Mark 21ndash12 (cf theappendix for a full theme-rheme analysis) The first thematic unitconsists of verses 1ndash5 In this unit the only explicit subject of aprocess chain that occurs in a primary clause is ποltοί (v 2)Mark has not chosen the most heavily marked theme optionsince ποltοί does not also occupy prime position in the clauseAlthough ὁ παραλυτικός occurs in the subject slot of clause 16 (v4) it occurs in a dependent clause thus it does not constitute athematic shift Ὁ Ἰησοῦς occurs in v 5 but it is part of asecondary embedded participial clause that serves as an adjunctin the primary clause and is therefore not a thematic shift The
73 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 104-105
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 49
only remaining possibility is αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι in clause 19 (v 5)however although it is subject in a primary clause it belongs toa stretch of reported speech and is thus not a thematic shift Thenext thematic unit begins at clause 20 (v 6) with τινες τῶνγραmicromicroατέων (not marked) and extends all the way through to theend of the unit (v 12) Again a number of other subjects occur inthe subsequent clauses but as in the first unit none of themqualifies as a thematic shift because either they occur as part ofreported speech or secondary clauses (embedded or standalone)
There are only a couple thematic units in Jude A few of thesewill be examined below to demonstrate what has been writtenabove The first of these examples comes from clause twelve
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸκρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειανκαὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
Here we have an example of an unmarked theme for thetheme is not prime in the clause Τινες ἄνθρωποι is the primaryparticipant of this clause The rest of the material is rhematic inthat it is giving additional information about these ldquocertainpeoplerdquo The most significant of the rhematic material here is theprocess associated with the subject on the primary clause levelThis process is παρεισέδυσαν essentially meaning that thesepeople have snuck in among them There are other processeshowever involved that are related back to the theme here whichform a process chain when taken together Some of thesepredicators are participles which associate variouscircumstantial bits with the theme provided Other verbs found inclauses 29ndash32 are also on the primary level which at leastinclude microιαίνουσιν ἀθετοῦσιν and βλασφηmicroοῦσιν Each of theseverbs is intensely negative in nature which supports theassertion that the author genuinely does not approve of theseindividuals at all
Now one might assert that these verbs should be rhematic forother subjects since there are indeed other subjects that theseverbs predicate However there is no explicit subject on theprimary clause level that signals a change in theme after τινες
50 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
ἄνθρωποι until Μιχαὴλ74 Since this is the case it cannot be saidthat any of these intermediate participants is thematic Thesecondary clauses embedded or otherwise cannot carry enoughweight to be thematic since they are additional information usedto support the primary material they follow
The second example comes from clause 40 Οὗτοι δὲ ὅσα microὲνοὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν In this example the theme is markedmeaning that the primary participant is also in the primeposition Since the author chose to present this theme as markedit likely has extra weight In this instance the marked theme isactually a reference back to the theme in clause twelve whichserves as the topic of the entire discourse Thus it is likely thatthe theme is marked as the author tries to reorient his audiencetoward himself as opposed to his adversaries
The final example comes from clause 67 καὶ τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶνλαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν In thisexample the subject is articulated and prime which makes thisan especially marked theme When the subject comes at thebeginning of the clause the subject is the leaping off point of theclause the first bit of information that flows out of the speakerOn top of all of this the author took the time to articulate thetheme which is not necessarily required in Greek All of theseelements work together to draw attention to the subject in subtleyet important ways It is possible that this theme is so marked asthe author wants to draw attention to the wicked speech thatspills forth from the mouths of τινες ἄνθρωποιmdashspeech to whichthe author clearly does not want his audience listening
5 Topic and Comment Analysis
Topic and comment analysis functions at the highest level ofdiscourse This level includes the clause complex paragraph and
74 The demonstrative pronoun οὗτοι in clause 29 does not signal a themechange because it is a reference back to the current theme τινες ἄνθρωποι Thiswould be similar to the use of a personal pronoun like ldquoherdquo He is a referentback to a governing term that has been established in most cases as is οὗτοι
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 51
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
enacted by making assertions asking questions givingcommands evaluating what one thinks or feels about peoplethings or events and by indicating onersquos relative commitment toany given proposition or proposal9 The textual metafunctionrefers to meanings made as people organize structure andintertwine ideational and interpersonal meanings into a cohesiveand coherent flow of information that is connected and relevantto the context of situation10 The features at work in thismetafunction are what allow hearers andor readers to distinguishbetween text and ldquonon-textrdquo that is between sensical discourseand nonsensical ldquoblatherrdquo11 As Martin puts it the job of thetextual metafunction is ldquoto package ideational and interpersonalmeaning as waves of information in one rhythm or anotherdepending on contextrdquo12
In this article we fix our gaze upon a set of interrelatedfeatures that operate within the textual metafunction namelyprime and subsequent theme and rheme and topic and commentFollowing Porter and OrsquoDonnell13 we suggest that prime andsubsequent function at the clause level and are specified by wordgroup order that theme and rheme function across any numberof clauses and are delimited by spans of actor and process
Politics 41) calls this ldquoorientationalrdquo meaning9 Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo 1610 James D Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo
17ndash37 (here 17) Cf Halliday ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo175ndash76 Halliday ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo 92 Lemke (TextualPolitics 41) calls this ldquoorganizationalrdquo meaning
11 Cf Halliday ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo 44ndash4512 Martin ldquoMourningrdquo 32313 As mentioned our model is anchored in Halladayan SFL yet our
perspective on theme topic and information flow has been shaped by Porterand OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 85ndash118 (as of the writing of this articlethis book has not yet gone to press all page numbers refer to a pre-publicationcopy that we obtained from the authors and use it with their permission) Seealso Porter ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo 45ndash74 Dvorak ldquoThematizationTopic and Information Flowrdquo 17ndash37
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 33
chains and that topic and comment functions at paragraph14 leveland beyond and are marked by semantic shifts15 We show howthese features are crucial with regard to the flow of informationin a text and thus its cohesion and coherence We present aseries of frameworks for analyzing each of these features andwe validate both the utility and usefulness of these models byputting them to work in analyses of both narrative and non-narrative texts namely Mark 21ndash12 and the letter of Juderespectively16
2 Discourse Structure and Information Flow
21 LinearityLanguage users cannot communicate all at once the wholecontent of meaning they wish to share with others As a result asis often said they must ldquoorganize their thoughtsrdquo so that whenthey create text the meanings they wish to make unfold linearlyin a manner that increases the probability of understanding onthe part of a reader or hearer This constraint is commonlycharacterized as a ldquoproblemrdquo that is somehow inherent to thelinguistic system17 However it is really not an issue with thelinguistic system per se it is rather simply a matter of the use oflanguage reflecting how humans experience the goings on of life
Humans experience life as a series of social processes thatunfold in a culture as countless situations18 As a result when
14 We recognize that ldquoparagraphrdquo is notoriously challenging to defineIn this article we follow Porter ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo 175ndash95
15 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 8516 We use examples from our analyses of these two texts throughout
See the appendix for full analyses17 Cf Brown and Yule Discourse Analysis 125ff Dvorak
ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 18ndash19 Porter and OrsquoDonnellDiscourse Analysis 86
18 Martin and Rose Working with Discourse 1ndash2
34 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
language users construe and reconstrue these social processes19
they encode them into texts that unfold as sequences of wordsword groups clauses clause complexes and paragraphs20 Awell-chosen starting point for each clausemdashldquoprimerdquo as we referto it belowmdashis crucial for a poorly chosen point of departuremay result in misunderstanding on the part of the text reader orhearer possibly resulting in more work for the communicatorrequiring her or him to ldquotravel hither thither and yonrdquo in aneffort to arrive at the intended meaning In this way the so-calledldquoproblemrdquo of linearity constrains a textrsquos flow of information
Yet as Porter and OrsquoDonnell point out texts are more thanldquoan ordered list of concepts realized in a string of wordsrdquo21 Theyalso have a hierarchical structure consisting of ldquochunksrdquo of textthat are organized around thematically related material22 Thearrangement of these chunks is also not unconstrained but isgoverned by two different but related levels of context contextof culture which we call genre and context of situation whichwe call register23
22 GenreFollowing Martin24 we use the term genre to refer to ldquoa stagedgoal-oriented social processrdquo25 or more technically ldquoa recurrent
19 Ie creating meaning that is constrained by context while at the sametime contributing to and reifying that context
20 Martin and Rose Working with Discourse 2 The language ofldquounfoldingrdquo highlights the linear nature of language in use Cf Brown andYule Discourse Analysis 125ndash26 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis86 Cf Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 18
21 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 8622 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 86ndash8823 Discourse structure is also constrained by ideology in that meaning
potential is not evenly distributed across participants in a culture (MartinEnglish Text 575)
24 Martin English Text 493ndash588 (esp 546ndash73) Cf Martin and RoseGenre Relations Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of Discourserdquo230ndash56
25 Martin and Rose Working with Discourse 8
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 35
configuration of meanings that enact the social practices of agiven culturerdquo26 Our view is informed by Bakhtinrsquos theory ofspeech genres which he defined as habitualized relatively stablepatterns of meaning that are made with relatively predictabletypes of interactive utterances27 From this point of view genreincludes not only literary genres but ldquoeverydayrdquo genres bothspoken and written such as service encounters political debatesgossip jokes sermons stories and so on28
The established genres of a culture provide an economy ofmeaning-making by which members of that culture are able toaccomplish the manifold social processes required of everydaylife without having to define each social process anew each timeit needs to be repeated29 This is why as Bakhtin puts it
We learn to cast our speech in generic forms and when hearingothersrsquo speech we guess its genre from the very first words predict acertain length and a certain compositional structure we foreseethe end that is from the very beginning we have a sense of thespeech whole which is only later differentiated during the speechprocess30
Bakhtinrsquos point as Eggins and Martin rightly highlight is thatstructures of discourses vary in typically familiar ways becausethe staging of the social processes they are intended toaccomplish varies on the basis of typically familiar culturalnorms31
26 Martin and Rose Genre Relations 6 Clearly our definition differsfrom that of traditional literary studies where the term tends to refer to varioustypes of literary productions that are differentiated on the basis of form andorstylistic convention (cf Tate ldquoGenrerdquo 149)
27 Cf Bakhtin ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo 60ndash102 here 60 CfDvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo 35 Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres andRegistersrdquo 236 For an excellent portrayal of Bakhtin and his thought seeHolquist Dialogism
28 Cf Eggins Introduction 5629 Berger and Luckmann Social Construction of Reality 5330 Bakhtin ldquoProblem of Speech Genresrdquo 7931 Cf Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres and Registersrdquo 236
36 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Consider for example Mark 21ndash12 This stretch of text isone of many stories that comprise the biographical history (bios)that Mark writes about Jesus32 As such this text feeds into thegreater social goal of the gospel to articulate and to defend thesignificance of Jesus and perhaps more importantly tolegitimate the value system he embodies33 The particular kind ofstory Mark employs here is narrative34 Narratives are storiesthat aim at resolving some sort of complication Typically theyconsist of an orientation one or more complication one or moreevaluation and one or more resolution35 The discourse structureof Mark 21ndash12 follows this pattern (see appendix) Orientation(vv 1ndash2) ^ Complication1 (vv 3ndash4a) ^ Evaluation1 (v 4b) ^Resolution1 (temporary) (v 5) ^ Complication2 (vv 6ndash7) ^Evaluation2 (vv 8ndash9) ^ Resolution2 (final) (vv 10ndash12)36
The text of Jude is a letter so the structure of the text is inpart constrained by the conventions of letter writing of his daygreeting (vv 1ndash2) body (vv 3ndash23) and closing (vv 24ndash25)37
Jude identifies the social purpose of his letter as anadmonishment to struggle intensely for the faith (παρακαλῶνἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ πίστει [v 3]) Here are the basic stages Judeemploys in an effort to accomplish his task offer theencouragement proper (v 3) introduce participants to be
32 Cf deSilva Introduction to the New Testament 145ndash48 StantonGospel for a New People 69ndash70 Aune New Testament in Its LiteraryEnvironment 35 ldquoThe unconscious functions of Greco-Roman biographyinvolve the historical legitimation (or discrediting) of a social beliefvaluesystem personified in the subject of the biographyrdquo (italics added)
33 Cf deSilva Introduction 14734 Other story genres include recounts anecdotes exempla and
observations Cf Martin and Rose Genre Relations 44ff35 Martin and Rose Genre Relations 52 These are the basic
components that comprise a narrative Of course the number of thesecomponents and their order may vary depending on situational variables
36 The caret (^) in this sequence means ldquofollowed byrdquo On the basicstructure of different kinds of stories cf Martin and Rose Genre Relations49ndash98 (on narratives specifically see 67ndash74)
37 Cf Gabriel ldquoLettersrdquo 193ndash94
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 37
portrayed negatively (v 4) give a series of intertextualreferences to negative exempla (vv 5ndash16) give a series ofdirectives with additional negative evaluations of the antagonistsas foils for the positive commands (vv 17ndash23)
As these brief examples demonstrate discourse structure isnot merely the result of an authorrsquos stylistic flourishes thoughindeed an author may as a matter of style intentionallymanipulate or even flout structural norms Discourse structure ishowever largely governed by the strictures of a given cultureLanguage use becomes habitualized and is used to accomplishcertain social processes in certain ways that are deemedacceptable by those who are part of the culture
23 RegisterAs mentioned above the structure of a text is also constrained bythe register or more specific context of situation in which the textwas uttered The theory of register first developed by Halliday38
and further developed by Martin (whom we follow here)39 bothmodels context of situation and explains its relationship tolanguage
First register theory stratifies context and organizes it aroundthree contextual variables or features called field tenor andmode Briefly field refers to the sequences of activities that aregoing on in a situation as well as the people things placesqualities and circumstances that are associated with thoseactivities40 Tenor refers to the kind of social relations that areenacted and negotiated among the participants in a given
38 Cf Halliday Social Semiotic 110ndash11339 Cf Martin English Text 497ndash502 also Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres
and Registers of Discourserdquo 230ndash5640 Martin and Rose Genre Relations 14 Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal
Metafunctionrdquo 27ndash28
38 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
situation41 particularly the social relations of statuspower42 andsolidaritycontact43 Mode
is concerned with symbolic realitymdashwith texture Since symbolicreality (ie textprocess) has the function of constructing socialreality mode is oriented to both interpersonal and experientialmeaning It thus mediates the role played by language along twodimensions Interpersonally mode mediates the semiotic spacebetween monologue and dialogue Experientially mode mediatesthe semiotic space between action and reflection Putting this ingeneral terms mode mediates negotiation44
Second register theory describes the relationship betweenfield tenor and mode and discourse semantics It is described asa relationship of realization (also referred to as expression orcoding) in which in Hjelmslevian terms register is the contentplane for which discourse semantics is the expression plane45 Inthis regard field is realized as ideational meaning text as therepresentation of experience Here the goings-on participantsand circumstances of field are encoded into language primarilyas verbal groups nominal groups and adverbial or participialgroups respectively Tenor is realized as interpersonal meaningtext as interaction or exchange The enactments and negotiationsof the social relations in the situation are encoded into languageprimarily through the system of verbal attitude (ie assertive[indicative] projective [subjunctive] directive [imperative]expective [future]) Tenor is also realized through the system ofappraisal (ie attitude [affect judgment appreciation] andengagement [heterogloss monogloss]) Mode is realized astextual meaning text as a series of organized messages46 Here
41 Martin English Text 523ndash26 Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo28
42 Ie the relative position of the participants in the culturersquos socialhierarchy
43 Ie the degree of institutional involvement between participants inthe situation
44 Martin English Text 50945 Martin English Text 501ndash50246 Cf Halliday ldquoFunctions of Languagerdquo 24ndash26
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 39
the elements of ideational meaning and interpersonal meaningare ldquopackagedrdquo as it were into clauses in which some portion ofeach clause has special ldquothematicrdquo status and the remainder ofthe clause develops the theme and completes the message47
Looking again at Mark 2 generic constraints of narrative maycall for the story to open with an orientation (vv 1ndash2) butregister constrains the content of the orientation IdeationallyMark construes a world (a reality an experience) in this portionof the narrative in which the goings-on consist of the followingprocesses48
bull material processes gathering together (συνήχθησαν [v 2]) separating (χωρεῖν [v 2])49
bull a mental process hearing (ἠκούσθη [v 1])bull an existential process is (ἐστίν [v 1]) bull a verbal process speaking (ἐλάλει [v 2])
The following participants are portrayed
bull ldquoherdquo (presumably Jesus) as the one who is ldquoenteringrdquo Capernaum who ldquoisrdquo in the house and who ldquowas speakingrdquo the messagebull an assumed agent (the crowd) as the one by whom it ldquowas heardrdquo that he is in the housebull ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί) (also ldquothemrdquo [αὐτοῖς]) who had ldquogatheredrdquo and couldno longer ldquoseparaterdquo and to whom ldquoherdquo was speaking the messagebull Capernaum (Καφαρναούmicro)bull a house (οἴκῳ)bull the door of the house (θύραν)bull the message or word (λόγον)
Interpersonally the storyrsquos orientation is monoglossic beingdominated by assertive verbal attitude which is grammaticalizedby indicative verbal mood This enacts a relationship betweenMark and his presumed readers in which as storyteller Mark hashigher status than the readers because he is the one who
47 Cf Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 3748 On process types see Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar
108ff Cf also Tan ldquoTransitivityrdquo np49 The participle εἰσελθών technically constitutes the circumstance for
hearing (ἠκούσθη) and is thus not a main process Circumstances too are partof ideational meaning
40 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
apparently knows everything about the situation he describesThe readers on the other hand are situated as potentialacknowledgers of what Mark asserts Moreover that Mark hasopted to include this particular narrative in his gospel indicatesan appraisal from his perspective the readers need to be toldthis story Even just within the narrativersquos orientation phase (ieat the level of the narrative50) appraisal is evident For examplethe two clauses καὶ συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲτὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν (v 2) betoken a positive evaluation of Jesusrsquogrowing honor among the masses51
In terms of the textual strand of meaning the function inwhich we are most interested here the text unfolds in a series ofclauses and each of these clauses has a ldquoleaping off pointrdquo andtypically though not always some further development of thatpoint The major concern here is with how the author chooses toorder the components of the clause Yet even this choice isconstrained by the situation and the social purpose of both thetext as a whole and the stretch of text constituting the clause Forexample as noted Mark 21ndash2 make up the orientation portion ofthe narrative Mark has chosen to tell The first clause in theorientation is Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶνἠκούσθη Not surprisingly Markrsquos point of departure in thisclause is the adjunct52 ldquoAnd entering again into Capernaum rdquo
50 Cf ldquoThe Rhetorical Effects of Attituderdquo in Dvorak ldquoInterpersonalMetafunctionrdquo 54
51 That so many people were filling the house that there was not evenspace to get into or out of the house is a token of positive judgment with regardto social esteem (t +judgment esteem normality) Further the use of the termποltοί (many) coupled with the statement that there was no room in front of thedoor (microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν) increases the force of the judgment(both graduation force quantification mass and graduation forcequantification extent distribution) Cf Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo102 also Martin and White Language of Evaluation 150ndash51
52 Ie adverbialcircumstantial participial clause Adjunct refers to aword group or groups that modify the predicator (verb) in a clause to providecircumstances associated with the process (cf ldquoOpenTextorg AnnotationModelrdquo np)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 41
This demonstrates the ldquoenablingrdquo or ldquorelevancerdquo role of thetextual metafunction namely to ldquopackagerdquo ideational andinterpersonal meanings into clauses in a way that is both relevantto and communicatively effective in light of its purpose That ishere it orients the readers to the context of the narrative Thus itis how text is being used in a given context (ie mode) thatgoverns the textual meanings that are made (ie textualmetafunction) which in turn govern the arrangements of theclause components in the realization of each clause (informationflow)
24 SummaryWe demonstrated thus far that both discourse structure andinformation flow are not merely the result of stylistic choicesmade by language users Rather structure and flow are largelygoverned by two different levels of context namely genre andregister With regard to discourse structure people deploylanguage in ways that are staged and oriented to various socialgoals The ways in which these social goals may beaccomplished with language are governed by the language userrsquosculture the staging or structure of the discourse reflects thesecultural constraints Information flow is constrained to someextent by variations in genre and to a greater extent by registervariablesmdashand of these mostly by mode The textualmetafunction arranges ideational and interpersonal meanings inways that from the language userrsquos perspective are relevant toand most effective in reaching the communicative goal of theclause in relation to the larger purpose of the text
3 Prime and Subsequent Analysis
We argued above that the role of the textual metafunction was toorganize ideational and interpersonal content into clauses in away that is relevant and consistent with register and that createsa coherent message Here we provide a framework for modelingclauses as messages and a method for interpreting thosemessages
42 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
The message of a clause consists of two parts ldquothe elementwhich serves as the point of departure of the messagerdquo and ldquotheremainder of the messagerdquo53 Although Halliday referred to theseparts as theme and rheme respectively we follow Porter andOrsquoDonnell and use the terms prime and subsequent reservingtheme and rheme for the discussion of thematic elements at thelevel of clause complex (sentence) and multi-clause complexlevel (see ldquoTheme and Rheme Analysisrdquo below)54 In the modelwe present here prime refers to ldquowho or what the clause isfocused upon realized by the first [word] group element in theclause The subsequent is defined as the development of theprime and is realized in the remaining group elements in theclauserdquo55 The prime functions to orient the reader to the messageof the clause and the subsequent provides the news about theprime that the writer wants the readers to know to experience orto remember56
Every clause has a prime element and most also have asubsequent though it is possible for a clause to consist only of aprime57 The word group element (ie subject predicatorcomplement or adjunct)58 comprising the prime may be assimple as a single word (conjunctions are excluded) or it may bea complex nominal or verbal group or even an embeddedclause59 Subsequent consists of all other word group elementsfollowing the prime For example the initial clause in Mark 21ndash12 is analyzed for prime and subsequent as follows (see theappendix for a full prime and subsequent analysis of this unit)
53 Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 37 Cf Porter andOrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 90
54 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9155 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 91 (italics theirs)56 Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2057 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 92 Dvorak
ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2058 Cf OrsquoDonnell Porter Reed Picirilli Smith and Tan ldquoClause Level
Annotation Specificationrdquo n p59 Cf Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 20
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 43
Prime SubsequentA [[P εἰσελθὼν |A πάλιν |A εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro |A δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ]] P ἠκούσθη
Markrsquos point of departure in this clause is an adjunct consistingof an embedded participial clause that realizes a temporalcontext for interpreting or understanding the subsequent whichconsists of the predicator (main verb)
The following clause from Mark 23 raises a crucial pointnamely that prime and subsequent analysis must be performedon the Greek text and not on a translation
Prime SubsequentP ἔρχονται A [[P φέροντες |A πρὸς αὐτὸν |C παραλυτικὸν [[P αἰρόmicroενον |A ὑπὸ
τεσσάρων ]] ]]
The prime of this clause is the predicator or verbal group InGreek finite verbs are monolectic which means theygrammaticalize person as part of their form through the use ofpersonal endings60 Thus it is not necessary for users of Greek tospecify explicitly a subject in a clause In fact the defaultunmarked option in biblical Greek is not to specify a subject61
However in many other languages like English for example thedefault unmarked option is to specify a subject This means ifprime and subsequent analysis is performed on an Englishtranslation it would label prime incorrectly In this particularinstance based on the English gloss ldquoThey comeare comingbringing to him a paralytic being carried by fourrdquo the primewould be ldquotheyrdquo However the actual prime is the processldquocomeare comingrdquo Thus Mark chose to begin with the material
60 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 71 Porter and OrsquoDonnell (DiscourseAnalysis 93) note that this gives the writer of Greek the flexibility to ldquo(1) notspecify a specific subject (2) specify the subject but not place it inprimary position or (3) specify the subject and place it in primary positionin the clause rdquo
61 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 93 n 148
44 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
process and to further develop it with circumstantial informationprovided by an embedded participial clause
It is often assumed that items in prime position are prominentsimply because they occupy prime position in the clause but thisis not the de facto case Determining prominence requiresconsideration of other factors including analyses of clauserealization patterns across the corpus of text written by the sameauthor (eg the Pauline epistles)62 as well as the entire NewTestament corpus and other factors such as literary genre Also tobe accounted for are features of markedness grounding andsalience63 Further research in this area is needed but it may befor example that because predicators fill prime position themajority of times across the New Testament saying that apredicator is prominent simply because it occupies primeposition in the clause would be to say too much64 That said theorder of word groups within a clause is indeed a factor indetermining prominence65
4 Theme and Rheme Analysis
Porter and OrsquoDonnell reserve the terms theme and rheme foridentifying and discussing the ldquothematic elements at the sentenceand multi-sentence levelrdquo66 This means the focus of our textualanalysis now shifts to the level above the clause When exploringtheme and rheme analysis it is important to define the terms
62 Cf Tan ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo 95ndash11063 Cf Westfall ldquoAnalysis of Prominence in Hellenistic Greekrdquo 75ndash9464 Dvorakrsquos analysis of the entire New Testament revealed that across
the entire New Testament predicators were prime 7227 times adjuncts 5767times subjects 5354 times and complements 2634 times Cf DvorakldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 25ndash26 Cf also Porter(ldquoProminencerdquo 71) who discusses patterns of order of first and second clausecomponents
65 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 67ndash6966 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 45
clearly to delineate the steps in analysis and to stress a numberof the important advantages to such an analysis
To begin one must have an understanding of the term processchain A process is any verbal action implied or inscribedwithin a clause a process chain refers to a string of verbalprocesses that form a series across a stretch of text67 This chainof processes is ascribed to a particular actor(s) who is said to bethe thematic actor Of course other participants and their actionsmay be interspersed in the same stretch of text but these do notnecessarily break the process chain associated with the thematicactor An easy example in English is as follows
Bobby went to the store There he was greeted by a clerk and thensearched for a loaf of bread When he found it however he decidedthat it was too expensive so he put it back on the shelf However anolder woman standing nearby decided she would take it Bobby thenleft the store and travelled to the Shop-For-Less down the road wherehe purchased the bread for a less expensive price
All of the verbs in this anecdote form a process chain andBobby is the primary participant Bobby went searched founddecided put left travelled and purchased Notice as well thatthe additional processes performed by the clerk and the olderwoman do not break the chain as it follows Bobby for theiractions are clearly secondary information and reactionarythroughout Bobbyrsquos story
This story provides an excellent segue to the notion of themeTheme in narrative is best seen through the transition and changeof a participant as a primary actor in a process chainmdashwhat isusually called the thematic actor68 In other words a theme is thetransition from one thematic actor to another or a change inparticipant involvement that breaks a process chain That beingsaid the thematic actor must be an explicit subject meaning thatthe actor cannot merely be implied from a verb This does notmean however that the thematic actor must be prime or evenarticulated Indeed the thematic actor can be anarthrous or
67 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9868 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
46 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
articulated prime or subsequent Provided the thematic actor isarticulated this actor can be said to be more emphatic Moreemphatic still is when the thematic actor also occupies the primeposition in the clause69 Such a theme is said to be marked andshould be noted as a potential boundary marker for a shift indiscourse topic which will be discussed more thoroughly below
Interestingly enough the thematic actor can actually bepassive which suggests that more refined language is needed infuture formulations of theme and rheme analyses The followingbrief narrative concerning a shirt demonstrates the shortcomingsof ldquoactorrdquo language
Cindyrsquos shirt was stained by an ice cream cone The shirt then had tobe tossed into the washing machine which soaked it for twentyminutes The shirt then was brought out of the wash and was placedinto the dryer for a sixty-minute tumble Finally the shirt wasremoved by Cindy and hung on the drying rack
Clearly the narrative is about the shirt It is the theme of the taleeven though it is not truly an actor in any instance Perhaps thelanguage of ldquoprimary participantrdquo could be more helpful and lessmisleading
Moving onto clausal considerations the thematic participantmust be in a primary clause or on clause level α in the OpenText model70 Any participant found in a secondary clause hasbeen rank-shifted down to level β and therefore plays asubordinate role to the circumstances of the primary clauseObviously then a subordinated participant cannot serve as theprimary participant
Lastly one must consider the concept of rhememdashtheadditional information regarding the current thematicparticipant71 which is also understood as the extensivecircumstantial information involved in a process chain Considerthe story of a young elf
69 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98-9970 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10371 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 47
Sissy was out late one night at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that shewould not be able to return to the hovel before the werewolves cameout for the night she decided to employ her cunning Acting quicklyshe pulled leaves and twigs off of a few nearby oaks and began toconstruct a glider She then climbed atop the tallest tree at her friendsrsquoden and sets sail for home landing safely at her hovel just as sheheard the first howl of the dark night She was safe safe indeed
In the preceding story all of the details concerning her activitiesthe building gliding landing and so on all serve as rhematicmaterial to fill out the picture of the text It is clear that thissection of text is about Sissy since she is the primary participantThe rheme is what allows the reader to know that the story istruly about not only Sissy but also her quick wit and her returnvoyage home
Briefly it is worth noting that following the application ofboth prime and subsequent analysis and theme and rhemeanalysis the two analyses may be cross examined for additionaland enlightening findings For example should a prime in aclause also be a theme then the theme is considered markedmeaning that the author chose to launch his clause with thetheme change72 This reflects the nature of language in that thespeaker has to make a choice regarding how to start a clauseSince language is necessarily syntagmatic and paradigmaticmdashlinear and oppositionalmdashonly one thing can be said at a timeTherefore the first chosen words that come out of the mouthmust be considered significant especially in the language ofGreek where word order is significantly more malleable than inEnglish although it is important to note that a linguistic choice isnot always conscious
To grasp how the idea of prime and theme work together hereis a small reiteration of Sissyrsquos story ldquoSissy was out late onenight at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that she would not be ableto return to the hovel before the werewolves came out for thenight she decided to employ her cunningrdquo Notice how the firstclause begins with ldquoSissyrdquo as both the prime and the thematic
72 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 100-101
48 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
participant There is no question as to whom the story pertainsHowever the prime in the following sentence is actually aparticiple adjunct material which sets the stage for the problemin the text Thus the kernel of truth from these first twosentences is that Sissy realizes she has a problem Without thecoupling of prime and theme such a realization could very wellbe missed by a casual reader or interpreter leading to amisunderstanding of character prominence73 The true beauty ofthese analyses therefore can be seen in the fact that they causethe analyst to slow down and appreciate the rhetoric within thetext itself
The importance of theme and rheme analysis cannot beunderstated for it is key in determining exactly what the authoris trying to communicate in a given pericope The thematic actorin a given process chain is the governing character in a multi-sentence portion of the text All of the information that iscircumstantial to the theme is the rheme and should be treated asadding additional information to the theme If one were toconfuse this then one would be in danger of putting words in theauthorrsquos mouth and mirror reading into the text Thereforetheme and rheme analysis is critical to providing the clearestpossible picture of a textrsquos message the bits of the text that theauthor considers most important which leads to the best possibleapplications for daily living
There are only two thematic units in Mark 21ndash12 (cf theappendix for a full theme-rheme analysis) The first thematic unitconsists of verses 1ndash5 In this unit the only explicit subject of aprocess chain that occurs in a primary clause is ποltοί (v 2)Mark has not chosen the most heavily marked theme optionsince ποltοί does not also occupy prime position in the clauseAlthough ὁ παραλυτικός occurs in the subject slot of clause 16 (v4) it occurs in a dependent clause thus it does not constitute athematic shift Ὁ Ἰησοῦς occurs in v 5 but it is part of asecondary embedded participial clause that serves as an adjunctin the primary clause and is therefore not a thematic shift The
73 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 104-105
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 49
only remaining possibility is αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι in clause 19 (v 5)however although it is subject in a primary clause it belongs toa stretch of reported speech and is thus not a thematic shift Thenext thematic unit begins at clause 20 (v 6) with τινες τῶνγραmicromicroατέων (not marked) and extends all the way through to theend of the unit (v 12) Again a number of other subjects occur inthe subsequent clauses but as in the first unit none of themqualifies as a thematic shift because either they occur as part ofreported speech or secondary clauses (embedded or standalone)
There are only a couple thematic units in Jude A few of thesewill be examined below to demonstrate what has been writtenabove The first of these examples comes from clause twelve
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸκρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειανκαὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
Here we have an example of an unmarked theme for thetheme is not prime in the clause Τινες ἄνθρωποι is the primaryparticipant of this clause The rest of the material is rhematic inthat it is giving additional information about these ldquocertainpeoplerdquo The most significant of the rhematic material here is theprocess associated with the subject on the primary clause levelThis process is παρεισέδυσαν essentially meaning that thesepeople have snuck in among them There are other processeshowever involved that are related back to the theme here whichform a process chain when taken together Some of thesepredicators are participles which associate variouscircumstantial bits with the theme provided Other verbs found inclauses 29ndash32 are also on the primary level which at leastinclude microιαίνουσιν ἀθετοῦσιν and βλασφηmicroοῦσιν Each of theseverbs is intensely negative in nature which supports theassertion that the author genuinely does not approve of theseindividuals at all
Now one might assert that these verbs should be rhematic forother subjects since there are indeed other subjects that theseverbs predicate However there is no explicit subject on theprimary clause level that signals a change in theme after τινες
50 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
ἄνθρωποι until Μιχαὴλ74 Since this is the case it cannot be saidthat any of these intermediate participants is thematic Thesecondary clauses embedded or otherwise cannot carry enoughweight to be thematic since they are additional information usedto support the primary material they follow
The second example comes from clause 40 Οὗτοι δὲ ὅσα microὲνοὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν In this example the theme is markedmeaning that the primary participant is also in the primeposition Since the author chose to present this theme as markedit likely has extra weight In this instance the marked theme isactually a reference back to the theme in clause twelve whichserves as the topic of the entire discourse Thus it is likely thatthe theme is marked as the author tries to reorient his audiencetoward himself as opposed to his adversaries
The final example comes from clause 67 καὶ τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶνλαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν In thisexample the subject is articulated and prime which makes thisan especially marked theme When the subject comes at thebeginning of the clause the subject is the leaping off point of theclause the first bit of information that flows out of the speakerOn top of all of this the author took the time to articulate thetheme which is not necessarily required in Greek All of theseelements work together to draw attention to the subject in subtleyet important ways It is possible that this theme is so marked asthe author wants to draw attention to the wicked speech thatspills forth from the mouths of τινες ἄνθρωποιmdashspeech to whichthe author clearly does not want his audience listening
5 Topic and Comment Analysis
Topic and comment analysis functions at the highest level ofdiscourse This level includes the clause complex paragraph and
74 The demonstrative pronoun οὗτοι in clause 29 does not signal a themechange because it is a reference back to the current theme τινες ἄνθρωποι Thiswould be similar to the use of a personal pronoun like ldquoherdquo He is a referentback to a governing term that has been established in most cases as is οὗτοι
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 51
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
chains and that topic and comment functions at paragraph14 leveland beyond and are marked by semantic shifts15 We show howthese features are crucial with regard to the flow of informationin a text and thus its cohesion and coherence We present aseries of frameworks for analyzing each of these features andwe validate both the utility and usefulness of these models byputting them to work in analyses of both narrative and non-narrative texts namely Mark 21ndash12 and the letter of Juderespectively16
2 Discourse Structure and Information Flow
21 LinearityLanguage users cannot communicate all at once the wholecontent of meaning they wish to share with others As a result asis often said they must ldquoorganize their thoughtsrdquo so that whenthey create text the meanings they wish to make unfold linearlyin a manner that increases the probability of understanding onthe part of a reader or hearer This constraint is commonlycharacterized as a ldquoproblemrdquo that is somehow inherent to thelinguistic system17 However it is really not an issue with thelinguistic system per se it is rather simply a matter of the use oflanguage reflecting how humans experience the goings on of life
Humans experience life as a series of social processes thatunfold in a culture as countless situations18 As a result when
14 We recognize that ldquoparagraphrdquo is notoriously challenging to defineIn this article we follow Porter ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo 175ndash95
15 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 8516 We use examples from our analyses of these two texts throughout
See the appendix for full analyses17 Cf Brown and Yule Discourse Analysis 125ff Dvorak
ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 18ndash19 Porter and OrsquoDonnellDiscourse Analysis 86
18 Martin and Rose Working with Discourse 1ndash2
34 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
language users construe and reconstrue these social processes19
they encode them into texts that unfold as sequences of wordsword groups clauses clause complexes and paragraphs20 Awell-chosen starting point for each clausemdashldquoprimerdquo as we referto it belowmdashis crucial for a poorly chosen point of departuremay result in misunderstanding on the part of the text reader orhearer possibly resulting in more work for the communicatorrequiring her or him to ldquotravel hither thither and yonrdquo in aneffort to arrive at the intended meaning In this way the so-calledldquoproblemrdquo of linearity constrains a textrsquos flow of information
Yet as Porter and OrsquoDonnell point out texts are more thanldquoan ordered list of concepts realized in a string of wordsrdquo21 Theyalso have a hierarchical structure consisting of ldquochunksrdquo of textthat are organized around thematically related material22 Thearrangement of these chunks is also not unconstrained but isgoverned by two different but related levels of context contextof culture which we call genre and context of situation whichwe call register23
22 GenreFollowing Martin24 we use the term genre to refer to ldquoa stagedgoal-oriented social processrdquo25 or more technically ldquoa recurrent
19 Ie creating meaning that is constrained by context while at the sametime contributing to and reifying that context
20 Martin and Rose Working with Discourse 2 The language ofldquounfoldingrdquo highlights the linear nature of language in use Cf Brown andYule Discourse Analysis 125ndash26 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis86 Cf Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 18
21 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 8622 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 86ndash8823 Discourse structure is also constrained by ideology in that meaning
potential is not evenly distributed across participants in a culture (MartinEnglish Text 575)
24 Martin English Text 493ndash588 (esp 546ndash73) Cf Martin and RoseGenre Relations Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of Discourserdquo230ndash56
25 Martin and Rose Working with Discourse 8
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 35
configuration of meanings that enact the social practices of agiven culturerdquo26 Our view is informed by Bakhtinrsquos theory ofspeech genres which he defined as habitualized relatively stablepatterns of meaning that are made with relatively predictabletypes of interactive utterances27 From this point of view genreincludes not only literary genres but ldquoeverydayrdquo genres bothspoken and written such as service encounters political debatesgossip jokes sermons stories and so on28
The established genres of a culture provide an economy ofmeaning-making by which members of that culture are able toaccomplish the manifold social processes required of everydaylife without having to define each social process anew each timeit needs to be repeated29 This is why as Bakhtin puts it
We learn to cast our speech in generic forms and when hearingothersrsquo speech we guess its genre from the very first words predict acertain length and a certain compositional structure we foreseethe end that is from the very beginning we have a sense of thespeech whole which is only later differentiated during the speechprocess30
Bakhtinrsquos point as Eggins and Martin rightly highlight is thatstructures of discourses vary in typically familiar ways becausethe staging of the social processes they are intended toaccomplish varies on the basis of typically familiar culturalnorms31
26 Martin and Rose Genre Relations 6 Clearly our definition differsfrom that of traditional literary studies where the term tends to refer to varioustypes of literary productions that are differentiated on the basis of form andorstylistic convention (cf Tate ldquoGenrerdquo 149)
27 Cf Bakhtin ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo 60ndash102 here 60 CfDvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo 35 Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres andRegistersrdquo 236 For an excellent portrayal of Bakhtin and his thought seeHolquist Dialogism
28 Cf Eggins Introduction 5629 Berger and Luckmann Social Construction of Reality 5330 Bakhtin ldquoProblem of Speech Genresrdquo 7931 Cf Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres and Registersrdquo 236
36 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Consider for example Mark 21ndash12 This stretch of text isone of many stories that comprise the biographical history (bios)that Mark writes about Jesus32 As such this text feeds into thegreater social goal of the gospel to articulate and to defend thesignificance of Jesus and perhaps more importantly tolegitimate the value system he embodies33 The particular kind ofstory Mark employs here is narrative34 Narratives are storiesthat aim at resolving some sort of complication Typically theyconsist of an orientation one or more complication one or moreevaluation and one or more resolution35 The discourse structureof Mark 21ndash12 follows this pattern (see appendix) Orientation(vv 1ndash2) ^ Complication1 (vv 3ndash4a) ^ Evaluation1 (v 4b) ^Resolution1 (temporary) (v 5) ^ Complication2 (vv 6ndash7) ^Evaluation2 (vv 8ndash9) ^ Resolution2 (final) (vv 10ndash12)36
The text of Jude is a letter so the structure of the text is inpart constrained by the conventions of letter writing of his daygreeting (vv 1ndash2) body (vv 3ndash23) and closing (vv 24ndash25)37
Jude identifies the social purpose of his letter as anadmonishment to struggle intensely for the faith (παρακαλῶνἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ πίστει [v 3]) Here are the basic stages Judeemploys in an effort to accomplish his task offer theencouragement proper (v 3) introduce participants to be
32 Cf deSilva Introduction to the New Testament 145ndash48 StantonGospel for a New People 69ndash70 Aune New Testament in Its LiteraryEnvironment 35 ldquoThe unconscious functions of Greco-Roman biographyinvolve the historical legitimation (or discrediting) of a social beliefvaluesystem personified in the subject of the biographyrdquo (italics added)
33 Cf deSilva Introduction 14734 Other story genres include recounts anecdotes exempla and
observations Cf Martin and Rose Genre Relations 44ff35 Martin and Rose Genre Relations 52 These are the basic
components that comprise a narrative Of course the number of thesecomponents and their order may vary depending on situational variables
36 The caret (^) in this sequence means ldquofollowed byrdquo On the basicstructure of different kinds of stories cf Martin and Rose Genre Relations49ndash98 (on narratives specifically see 67ndash74)
37 Cf Gabriel ldquoLettersrdquo 193ndash94
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 37
portrayed negatively (v 4) give a series of intertextualreferences to negative exempla (vv 5ndash16) give a series ofdirectives with additional negative evaluations of the antagonistsas foils for the positive commands (vv 17ndash23)
As these brief examples demonstrate discourse structure isnot merely the result of an authorrsquos stylistic flourishes thoughindeed an author may as a matter of style intentionallymanipulate or even flout structural norms Discourse structure ishowever largely governed by the strictures of a given cultureLanguage use becomes habitualized and is used to accomplishcertain social processes in certain ways that are deemedacceptable by those who are part of the culture
23 RegisterAs mentioned above the structure of a text is also constrained bythe register or more specific context of situation in which the textwas uttered The theory of register first developed by Halliday38
and further developed by Martin (whom we follow here)39 bothmodels context of situation and explains its relationship tolanguage
First register theory stratifies context and organizes it aroundthree contextual variables or features called field tenor andmode Briefly field refers to the sequences of activities that aregoing on in a situation as well as the people things placesqualities and circumstances that are associated with thoseactivities40 Tenor refers to the kind of social relations that areenacted and negotiated among the participants in a given
38 Cf Halliday Social Semiotic 110ndash11339 Cf Martin English Text 497ndash502 also Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres
and Registers of Discourserdquo 230ndash5640 Martin and Rose Genre Relations 14 Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal
Metafunctionrdquo 27ndash28
38 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
situation41 particularly the social relations of statuspower42 andsolidaritycontact43 Mode
is concerned with symbolic realitymdashwith texture Since symbolicreality (ie textprocess) has the function of constructing socialreality mode is oriented to both interpersonal and experientialmeaning It thus mediates the role played by language along twodimensions Interpersonally mode mediates the semiotic spacebetween monologue and dialogue Experientially mode mediatesthe semiotic space between action and reflection Putting this ingeneral terms mode mediates negotiation44
Second register theory describes the relationship betweenfield tenor and mode and discourse semantics It is described asa relationship of realization (also referred to as expression orcoding) in which in Hjelmslevian terms register is the contentplane for which discourse semantics is the expression plane45 Inthis regard field is realized as ideational meaning text as therepresentation of experience Here the goings-on participantsand circumstances of field are encoded into language primarilyas verbal groups nominal groups and adverbial or participialgroups respectively Tenor is realized as interpersonal meaningtext as interaction or exchange The enactments and negotiationsof the social relations in the situation are encoded into languageprimarily through the system of verbal attitude (ie assertive[indicative] projective [subjunctive] directive [imperative]expective [future]) Tenor is also realized through the system ofappraisal (ie attitude [affect judgment appreciation] andengagement [heterogloss monogloss]) Mode is realized astextual meaning text as a series of organized messages46 Here
41 Martin English Text 523ndash26 Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo28
42 Ie the relative position of the participants in the culturersquos socialhierarchy
43 Ie the degree of institutional involvement between participants inthe situation
44 Martin English Text 50945 Martin English Text 501ndash50246 Cf Halliday ldquoFunctions of Languagerdquo 24ndash26
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 39
the elements of ideational meaning and interpersonal meaningare ldquopackagedrdquo as it were into clauses in which some portion ofeach clause has special ldquothematicrdquo status and the remainder ofthe clause develops the theme and completes the message47
Looking again at Mark 2 generic constraints of narrative maycall for the story to open with an orientation (vv 1ndash2) butregister constrains the content of the orientation IdeationallyMark construes a world (a reality an experience) in this portionof the narrative in which the goings-on consist of the followingprocesses48
bull material processes gathering together (συνήχθησαν [v 2]) separating (χωρεῖν [v 2])49
bull a mental process hearing (ἠκούσθη [v 1])bull an existential process is (ἐστίν [v 1]) bull a verbal process speaking (ἐλάλει [v 2])
The following participants are portrayed
bull ldquoherdquo (presumably Jesus) as the one who is ldquoenteringrdquo Capernaum who ldquoisrdquo in the house and who ldquowas speakingrdquo the messagebull an assumed agent (the crowd) as the one by whom it ldquowas heardrdquo that he is in the housebull ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί) (also ldquothemrdquo [αὐτοῖς]) who had ldquogatheredrdquo and couldno longer ldquoseparaterdquo and to whom ldquoherdquo was speaking the messagebull Capernaum (Καφαρναούmicro)bull a house (οἴκῳ)bull the door of the house (θύραν)bull the message or word (λόγον)
Interpersonally the storyrsquos orientation is monoglossic beingdominated by assertive verbal attitude which is grammaticalizedby indicative verbal mood This enacts a relationship betweenMark and his presumed readers in which as storyteller Mark hashigher status than the readers because he is the one who
47 Cf Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 3748 On process types see Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar
108ff Cf also Tan ldquoTransitivityrdquo np49 The participle εἰσελθών technically constitutes the circumstance for
hearing (ἠκούσθη) and is thus not a main process Circumstances too are partof ideational meaning
40 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
apparently knows everything about the situation he describesThe readers on the other hand are situated as potentialacknowledgers of what Mark asserts Moreover that Mark hasopted to include this particular narrative in his gospel indicatesan appraisal from his perspective the readers need to be toldthis story Even just within the narrativersquos orientation phase (ieat the level of the narrative50) appraisal is evident For examplethe two clauses καὶ συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲτὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν (v 2) betoken a positive evaluation of Jesusrsquogrowing honor among the masses51
In terms of the textual strand of meaning the function inwhich we are most interested here the text unfolds in a series ofclauses and each of these clauses has a ldquoleaping off pointrdquo andtypically though not always some further development of thatpoint The major concern here is with how the author chooses toorder the components of the clause Yet even this choice isconstrained by the situation and the social purpose of both thetext as a whole and the stretch of text constituting the clause Forexample as noted Mark 21ndash2 make up the orientation portion ofthe narrative Mark has chosen to tell The first clause in theorientation is Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶνἠκούσθη Not surprisingly Markrsquos point of departure in thisclause is the adjunct52 ldquoAnd entering again into Capernaum rdquo
50 Cf ldquoThe Rhetorical Effects of Attituderdquo in Dvorak ldquoInterpersonalMetafunctionrdquo 54
51 That so many people were filling the house that there was not evenspace to get into or out of the house is a token of positive judgment with regardto social esteem (t +judgment esteem normality) Further the use of the termποltοί (many) coupled with the statement that there was no room in front of thedoor (microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν) increases the force of the judgment(both graduation force quantification mass and graduation forcequantification extent distribution) Cf Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo102 also Martin and White Language of Evaluation 150ndash51
52 Ie adverbialcircumstantial participial clause Adjunct refers to aword group or groups that modify the predicator (verb) in a clause to providecircumstances associated with the process (cf ldquoOpenTextorg AnnotationModelrdquo np)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 41
This demonstrates the ldquoenablingrdquo or ldquorelevancerdquo role of thetextual metafunction namely to ldquopackagerdquo ideational andinterpersonal meanings into clauses in a way that is both relevantto and communicatively effective in light of its purpose That ishere it orients the readers to the context of the narrative Thus itis how text is being used in a given context (ie mode) thatgoverns the textual meanings that are made (ie textualmetafunction) which in turn govern the arrangements of theclause components in the realization of each clause (informationflow)
24 SummaryWe demonstrated thus far that both discourse structure andinformation flow are not merely the result of stylistic choicesmade by language users Rather structure and flow are largelygoverned by two different levels of context namely genre andregister With regard to discourse structure people deploylanguage in ways that are staged and oriented to various socialgoals The ways in which these social goals may beaccomplished with language are governed by the language userrsquosculture the staging or structure of the discourse reflects thesecultural constraints Information flow is constrained to someextent by variations in genre and to a greater extent by registervariablesmdashand of these mostly by mode The textualmetafunction arranges ideational and interpersonal meanings inways that from the language userrsquos perspective are relevant toand most effective in reaching the communicative goal of theclause in relation to the larger purpose of the text
3 Prime and Subsequent Analysis
We argued above that the role of the textual metafunction was toorganize ideational and interpersonal content into clauses in away that is relevant and consistent with register and that createsa coherent message Here we provide a framework for modelingclauses as messages and a method for interpreting thosemessages
42 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
The message of a clause consists of two parts ldquothe elementwhich serves as the point of departure of the messagerdquo and ldquotheremainder of the messagerdquo53 Although Halliday referred to theseparts as theme and rheme respectively we follow Porter andOrsquoDonnell and use the terms prime and subsequent reservingtheme and rheme for the discussion of thematic elements at thelevel of clause complex (sentence) and multi-clause complexlevel (see ldquoTheme and Rheme Analysisrdquo below)54 In the modelwe present here prime refers to ldquowho or what the clause isfocused upon realized by the first [word] group element in theclause The subsequent is defined as the development of theprime and is realized in the remaining group elements in theclauserdquo55 The prime functions to orient the reader to the messageof the clause and the subsequent provides the news about theprime that the writer wants the readers to know to experience orto remember56
Every clause has a prime element and most also have asubsequent though it is possible for a clause to consist only of aprime57 The word group element (ie subject predicatorcomplement or adjunct)58 comprising the prime may be assimple as a single word (conjunctions are excluded) or it may bea complex nominal or verbal group or even an embeddedclause59 Subsequent consists of all other word group elementsfollowing the prime For example the initial clause in Mark 21ndash12 is analyzed for prime and subsequent as follows (see theappendix for a full prime and subsequent analysis of this unit)
53 Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 37 Cf Porter andOrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 90
54 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9155 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 91 (italics theirs)56 Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2057 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 92 Dvorak
ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2058 Cf OrsquoDonnell Porter Reed Picirilli Smith and Tan ldquoClause Level
Annotation Specificationrdquo n p59 Cf Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 20
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 43
Prime SubsequentA [[P εἰσελθὼν |A πάλιν |A εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro |A δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ]] P ἠκούσθη
Markrsquos point of departure in this clause is an adjunct consistingof an embedded participial clause that realizes a temporalcontext for interpreting or understanding the subsequent whichconsists of the predicator (main verb)
The following clause from Mark 23 raises a crucial pointnamely that prime and subsequent analysis must be performedon the Greek text and not on a translation
Prime SubsequentP ἔρχονται A [[P φέροντες |A πρὸς αὐτὸν |C παραλυτικὸν [[P αἰρόmicroενον |A ὑπὸ
τεσσάρων ]] ]]
The prime of this clause is the predicator or verbal group InGreek finite verbs are monolectic which means theygrammaticalize person as part of their form through the use ofpersonal endings60 Thus it is not necessary for users of Greek tospecify explicitly a subject in a clause In fact the defaultunmarked option in biblical Greek is not to specify a subject61
However in many other languages like English for example thedefault unmarked option is to specify a subject This means ifprime and subsequent analysis is performed on an Englishtranslation it would label prime incorrectly In this particularinstance based on the English gloss ldquoThey comeare comingbringing to him a paralytic being carried by fourrdquo the primewould be ldquotheyrdquo However the actual prime is the processldquocomeare comingrdquo Thus Mark chose to begin with the material
60 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 71 Porter and OrsquoDonnell (DiscourseAnalysis 93) note that this gives the writer of Greek the flexibility to ldquo(1) notspecify a specific subject (2) specify the subject but not place it inprimary position or (3) specify the subject and place it in primary positionin the clause rdquo
61 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 93 n 148
44 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
process and to further develop it with circumstantial informationprovided by an embedded participial clause
It is often assumed that items in prime position are prominentsimply because they occupy prime position in the clause but thisis not the de facto case Determining prominence requiresconsideration of other factors including analyses of clauserealization patterns across the corpus of text written by the sameauthor (eg the Pauline epistles)62 as well as the entire NewTestament corpus and other factors such as literary genre Also tobe accounted for are features of markedness grounding andsalience63 Further research in this area is needed but it may befor example that because predicators fill prime position themajority of times across the New Testament saying that apredicator is prominent simply because it occupies primeposition in the clause would be to say too much64 That said theorder of word groups within a clause is indeed a factor indetermining prominence65
4 Theme and Rheme Analysis
Porter and OrsquoDonnell reserve the terms theme and rheme foridentifying and discussing the ldquothematic elements at the sentenceand multi-sentence levelrdquo66 This means the focus of our textualanalysis now shifts to the level above the clause When exploringtheme and rheme analysis it is important to define the terms
62 Cf Tan ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo 95ndash11063 Cf Westfall ldquoAnalysis of Prominence in Hellenistic Greekrdquo 75ndash9464 Dvorakrsquos analysis of the entire New Testament revealed that across
the entire New Testament predicators were prime 7227 times adjuncts 5767times subjects 5354 times and complements 2634 times Cf DvorakldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 25ndash26 Cf also Porter(ldquoProminencerdquo 71) who discusses patterns of order of first and second clausecomponents
65 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 67ndash6966 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 45
clearly to delineate the steps in analysis and to stress a numberof the important advantages to such an analysis
To begin one must have an understanding of the term processchain A process is any verbal action implied or inscribedwithin a clause a process chain refers to a string of verbalprocesses that form a series across a stretch of text67 This chainof processes is ascribed to a particular actor(s) who is said to bethe thematic actor Of course other participants and their actionsmay be interspersed in the same stretch of text but these do notnecessarily break the process chain associated with the thematicactor An easy example in English is as follows
Bobby went to the store There he was greeted by a clerk and thensearched for a loaf of bread When he found it however he decidedthat it was too expensive so he put it back on the shelf However anolder woman standing nearby decided she would take it Bobby thenleft the store and travelled to the Shop-For-Less down the road wherehe purchased the bread for a less expensive price
All of the verbs in this anecdote form a process chain andBobby is the primary participant Bobby went searched founddecided put left travelled and purchased Notice as well thatthe additional processes performed by the clerk and the olderwoman do not break the chain as it follows Bobby for theiractions are clearly secondary information and reactionarythroughout Bobbyrsquos story
This story provides an excellent segue to the notion of themeTheme in narrative is best seen through the transition and changeof a participant as a primary actor in a process chainmdashwhat isusually called the thematic actor68 In other words a theme is thetransition from one thematic actor to another or a change inparticipant involvement that breaks a process chain That beingsaid the thematic actor must be an explicit subject meaning thatthe actor cannot merely be implied from a verb This does notmean however that the thematic actor must be prime or evenarticulated Indeed the thematic actor can be anarthrous or
67 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9868 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
46 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
articulated prime or subsequent Provided the thematic actor isarticulated this actor can be said to be more emphatic Moreemphatic still is when the thematic actor also occupies the primeposition in the clause69 Such a theme is said to be marked andshould be noted as a potential boundary marker for a shift indiscourse topic which will be discussed more thoroughly below
Interestingly enough the thematic actor can actually bepassive which suggests that more refined language is needed infuture formulations of theme and rheme analyses The followingbrief narrative concerning a shirt demonstrates the shortcomingsof ldquoactorrdquo language
Cindyrsquos shirt was stained by an ice cream cone The shirt then had tobe tossed into the washing machine which soaked it for twentyminutes The shirt then was brought out of the wash and was placedinto the dryer for a sixty-minute tumble Finally the shirt wasremoved by Cindy and hung on the drying rack
Clearly the narrative is about the shirt It is the theme of the taleeven though it is not truly an actor in any instance Perhaps thelanguage of ldquoprimary participantrdquo could be more helpful and lessmisleading
Moving onto clausal considerations the thematic participantmust be in a primary clause or on clause level α in the OpenText model70 Any participant found in a secondary clause hasbeen rank-shifted down to level β and therefore plays asubordinate role to the circumstances of the primary clauseObviously then a subordinated participant cannot serve as theprimary participant
Lastly one must consider the concept of rhememdashtheadditional information regarding the current thematicparticipant71 which is also understood as the extensivecircumstantial information involved in a process chain Considerthe story of a young elf
69 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98-9970 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10371 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 47
Sissy was out late one night at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that shewould not be able to return to the hovel before the werewolves cameout for the night she decided to employ her cunning Acting quicklyshe pulled leaves and twigs off of a few nearby oaks and began toconstruct a glider She then climbed atop the tallest tree at her friendsrsquoden and sets sail for home landing safely at her hovel just as sheheard the first howl of the dark night She was safe safe indeed
In the preceding story all of the details concerning her activitiesthe building gliding landing and so on all serve as rhematicmaterial to fill out the picture of the text It is clear that thissection of text is about Sissy since she is the primary participantThe rheme is what allows the reader to know that the story istruly about not only Sissy but also her quick wit and her returnvoyage home
Briefly it is worth noting that following the application ofboth prime and subsequent analysis and theme and rhemeanalysis the two analyses may be cross examined for additionaland enlightening findings For example should a prime in aclause also be a theme then the theme is considered markedmeaning that the author chose to launch his clause with thetheme change72 This reflects the nature of language in that thespeaker has to make a choice regarding how to start a clauseSince language is necessarily syntagmatic and paradigmaticmdashlinear and oppositionalmdashonly one thing can be said at a timeTherefore the first chosen words that come out of the mouthmust be considered significant especially in the language ofGreek where word order is significantly more malleable than inEnglish although it is important to note that a linguistic choice isnot always conscious
To grasp how the idea of prime and theme work together hereis a small reiteration of Sissyrsquos story ldquoSissy was out late onenight at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that she would not be ableto return to the hovel before the werewolves came out for thenight she decided to employ her cunningrdquo Notice how the firstclause begins with ldquoSissyrdquo as both the prime and the thematic
72 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 100-101
48 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
participant There is no question as to whom the story pertainsHowever the prime in the following sentence is actually aparticiple adjunct material which sets the stage for the problemin the text Thus the kernel of truth from these first twosentences is that Sissy realizes she has a problem Without thecoupling of prime and theme such a realization could very wellbe missed by a casual reader or interpreter leading to amisunderstanding of character prominence73 The true beauty ofthese analyses therefore can be seen in the fact that they causethe analyst to slow down and appreciate the rhetoric within thetext itself
The importance of theme and rheme analysis cannot beunderstated for it is key in determining exactly what the authoris trying to communicate in a given pericope The thematic actorin a given process chain is the governing character in a multi-sentence portion of the text All of the information that iscircumstantial to the theme is the rheme and should be treated asadding additional information to the theme If one were toconfuse this then one would be in danger of putting words in theauthorrsquos mouth and mirror reading into the text Thereforetheme and rheme analysis is critical to providing the clearestpossible picture of a textrsquos message the bits of the text that theauthor considers most important which leads to the best possibleapplications for daily living
There are only two thematic units in Mark 21ndash12 (cf theappendix for a full theme-rheme analysis) The first thematic unitconsists of verses 1ndash5 In this unit the only explicit subject of aprocess chain that occurs in a primary clause is ποltοί (v 2)Mark has not chosen the most heavily marked theme optionsince ποltοί does not also occupy prime position in the clauseAlthough ὁ παραλυτικός occurs in the subject slot of clause 16 (v4) it occurs in a dependent clause thus it does not constitute athematic shift Ὁ Ἰησοῦς occurs in v 5 but it is part of asecondary embedded participial clause that serves as an adjunctin the primary clause and is therefore not a thematic shift The
73 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 104-105
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 49
only remaining possibility is αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι in clause 19 (v 5)however although it is subject in a primary clause it belongs toa stretch of reported speech and is thus not a thematic shift Thenext thematic unit begins at clause 20 (v 6) with τινες τῶνγραmicromicroατέων (not marked) and extends all the way through to theend of the unit (v 12) Again a number of other subjects occur inthe subsequent clauses but as in the first unit none of themqualifies as a thematic shift because either they occur as part ofreported speech or secondary clauses (embedded or standalone)
There are only a couple thematic units in Jude A few of thesewill be examined below to demonstrate what has been writtenabove The first of these examples comes from clause twelve
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸκρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειανκαὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
Here we have an example of an unmarked theme for thetheme is not prime in the clause Τινες ἄνθρωποι is the primaryparticipant of this clause The rest of the material is rhematic inthat it is giving additional information about these ldquocertainpeoplerdquo The most significant of the rhematic material here is theprocess associated with the subject on the primary clause levelThis process is παρεισέδυσαν essentially meaning that thesepeople have snuck in among them There are other processeshowever involved that are related back to the theme here whichform a process chain when taken together Some of thesepredicators are participles which associate variouscircumstantial bits with the theme provided Other verbs found inclauses 29ndash32 are also on the primary level which at leastinclude microιαίνουσιν ἀθετοῦσιν and βλασφηmicroοῦσιν Each of theseverbs is intensely negative in nature which supports theassertion that the author genuinely does not approve of theseindividuals at all
Now one might assert that these verbs should be rhematic forother subjects since there are indeed other subjects that theseverbs predicate However there is no explicit subject on theprimary clause level that signals a change in theme after τινες
50 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
ἄνθρωποι until Μιχαὴλ74 Since this is the case it cannot be saidthat any of these intermediate participants is thematic Thesecondary clauses embedded or otherwise cannot carry enoughweight to be thematic since they are additional information usedto support the primary material they follow
The second example comes from clause 40 Οὗτοι δὲ ὅσα microὲνοὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν In this example the theme is markedmeaning that the primary participant is also in the primeposition Since the author chose to present this theme as markedit likely has extra weight In this instance the marked theme isactually a reference back to the theme in clause twelve whichserves as the topic of the entire discourse Thus it is likely thatthe theme is marked as the author tries to reorient his audiencetoward himself as opposed to his adversaries
The final example comes from clause 67 καὶ τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶνλαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν In thisexample the subject is articulated and prime which makes thisan especially marked theme When the subject comes at thebeginning of the clause the subject is the leaping off point of theclause the first bit of information that flows out of the speakerOn top of all of this the author took the time to articulate thetheme which is not necessarily required in Greek All of theseelements work together to draw attention to the subject in subtleyet important ways It is possible that this theme is so marked asthe author wants to draw attention to the wicked speech thatspills forth from the mouths of τινες ἄνθρωποιmdashspeech to whichthe author clearly does not want his audience listening
5 Topic and Comment Analysis
Topic and comment analysis functions at the highest level ofdiscourse This level includes the clause complex paragraph and
74 The demonstrative pronoun οὗτοι in clause 29 does not signal a themechange because it is a reference back to the current theme τινες ἄνθρωποι Thiswould be similar to the use of a personal pronoun like ldquoherdquo He is a referentback to a governing term that has been established in most cases as is οὗτοι
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 51
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
language users construe and reconstrue these social processes19
they encode them into texts that unfold as sequences of wordsword groups clauses clause complexes and paragraphs20 Awell-chosen starting point for each clausemdashldquoprimerdquo as we referto it belowmdashis crucial for a poorly chosen point of departuremay result in misunderstanding on the part of the text reader orhearer possibly resulting in more work for the communicatorrequiring her or him to ldquotravel hither thither and yonrdquo in aneffort to arrive at the intended meaning In this way the so-calledldquoproblemrdquo of linearity constrains a textrsquos flow of information
Yet as Porter and OrsquoDonnell point out texts are more thanldquoan ordered list of concepts realized in a string of wordsrdquo21 Theyalso have a hierarchical structure consisting of ldquochunksrdquo of textthat are organized around thematically related material22 Thearrangement of these chunks is also not unconstrained but isgoverned by two different but related levels of context contextof culture which we call genre and context of situation whichwe call register23
22 GenreFollowing Martin24 we use the term genre to refer to ldquoa stagedgoal-oriented social processrdquo25 or more technically ldquoa recurrent
19 Ie creating meaning that is constrained by context while at the sametime contributing to and reifying that context
20 Martin and Rose Working with Discourse 2 The language ofldquounfoldingrdquo highlights the linear nature of language in use Cf Brown andYule Discourse Analysis 125ndash26 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis86 Cf Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 18
21 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 8622 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 86ndash8823 Discourse structure is also constrained by ideology in that meaning
potential is not evenly distributed across participants in a culture (MartinEnglish Text 575)
24 Martin English Text 493ndash588 (esp 546ndash73) Cf Martin and RoseGenre Relations Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of Discourserdquo230ndash56
25 Martin and Rose Working with Discourse 8
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 35
configuration of meanings that enact the social practices of agiven culturerdquo26 Our view is informed by Bakhtinrsquos theory ofspeech genres which he defined as habitualized relatively stablepatterns of meaning that are made with relatively predictabletypes of interactive utterances27 From this point of view genreincludes not only literary genres but ldquoeverydayrdquo genres bothspoken and written such as service encounters political debatesgossip jokes sermons stories and so on28
The established genres of a culture provide an economy ofmeaning-making by which members of that culture are able toaccomplish the manifold social processes required of everydaylife without having to define each social process anew each timeit needs to be repeated29 This is why as Bakhtin puts it
We learn to cast our speech in generic forms and when hearingothersrsquo speech we guess its genre from the very first words predict acertain length and a certain compositional structure we foreseethe end that is from the very beginning we have a sense of thespeech whole which is only later differentiated during the speechprocess30
Bakhtinrsquos point as Eggins and Martin rightly highlight is thatstructures of discourses vary in typically familiar ways becausethe staging of the social processes they are intended toaccomplish varies on the basis of typically familiar culturalnorms31
26 Martin and Rose Genre Relations 6 Clearly our definition differsfrom that of traditional literary studies where the term tends to refer to varioustypes of literary productions that are differentiated on the basis of form andorstylistic convention (cf Tate ldquoGenrerdquo 149)
27 Cf Bakhtin ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo 60ndash102 here 60 CfDvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo 35 Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres andRegistersrdquo 236 For an excellent portrayal of Bakhtin and his thought seeHolquist Dialogism
28 Cf Eggins Introduction 5629 Berger and Luckmann Social Construction of Reality 5330 Bakhtin ldquoProblem of Speech Genresrdquo 7931 Cf Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres and Registersrdquo 236
36 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Consider for example Mark 21ndash12 This stretch of text isone of many stories that comprise the biographical history (bios)that Mark writes about Jesus32 As such this text feeds into thegreater social goal of the gospel to articulate and to defend thesignificance of Jesus and perhaps more importantly tolegitimate the value system he embodies33 The particular kind ofstory Mark employs here is narrative34 Narratives are storiesthat aim at resolving some sort of complication Typically theyconsist of an orientation one or more complication one or moreevaluation and one or more resolution35 The discourse structureof Mark 21ndash12 follows this pattern (see appendix) Orientation(vv 1ndash2) ^ Complication1 (vv 3ndash4a) ^ Evaluation1 (v 4b) ^Resolution1 (temporary) (v 5) ^ Complication2 (vv 6ndash7) ^Evaluation2 (vv 8ndash9) ^ Resolution2 (final) (vv 10ndash12)36
The text of Jude is a letter so the structure of the text is inpart constrained by the conventions of letter writing of his daygreeting (vv 1ndash2) body (vv 3ndash23) and closing (vv 24ndash25)37
Jude identifies the social purpose of his letter as anadmonishment to struggle intensely for the faith (παρακαλῶνἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ πίστει [v 3]) Here are the basic stages Judeemploys in an effort to accomplish his task offer theencouragement proper (v 3) introduce participants to be
32 Cf deSilva Introduction to the New Testament 145ndash48 StantonGospel for a New People 69ndash70 Aune New Testament in Its LiteraryEnvironment 35 ldquoThe unconscious functions of Greco-Roman biographyinvolve the historical legitimation (or discrediting) of a social beliefvaluesystem personified in the subject of the biographyrdquo (italics added)
33 Cf deSilva Introduction 14734 Other story genres include recounts anecdotes exempla and
observations Cf Martin and Rose Genre Relations 44ff35 Martin and Rose Genre Relations 52 These are the basic
components that comprise a narrative Of course the number of thesecomponents and their order may vary depending on situational variables
36 The caret (^) in this sequence means ldquofollowed byrdquo On the basicstructure of different kinds of stories cf Martin and Rose Genre Relations49ndash98 (on narratives specifically see 67ndash74)
37 Cf Gabriel ldquoLettersrdquo 193ndash94
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 37
portrayed negatively (v 4) give a series of intertextualreferences to negative exempla (vv 5ndash16) give a series ofdirectives with additional negative evaluations of the antagonistsas foils for the positive commands (vv 17ndash23)
As these brief examples demonstrate discourse structure isnot merely the result of an authorrsquos stylistic flourishes thoughindeed an author may as a matter of style intentionallymanipulate or even flout structural norms Discourse structure ishowever largely governed by the strictures of a given cultureLanguage use becomes habitualized and is used to accomplishcertain social processes in certain ways that are deemedacceptable by those who are part of the culture
23 RegisterAs mentioned above the structure of a text is also constrained bythe register or more specific context of situation in which the textwas uttered The theory of register first developed by Halliday38
and further developed by Martin (whom we follow here)39 bothmodels context of situation and explains its relationship tolanguage
First register theory stratifies context and organizes it aroundthree contextual variables or features called field tenor andmode Briefly field refers to the sequences of activities that aregoing on in a situation as well as the people things placesqualities and circumstances that are associated with thoseactivities40 Tenor refers to the kind of social relations that areenacted and negotiated among the participants in a given
38 Cf Halliday Social Semiotic 110ndash11339 Cf Martin English Text 497ndash502 also Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres
and Registers of Discourserdquo 230ndash5640 Martin and Rose Genre Relations 14 Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal
Metafunctionrdquo 27ndash28
38 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
situation41 particularly the social relations of statuspower42 andsolidaritycontact43 Mode
is concerned with symbolic realitymdashwith texture Since symbolicreality (ie textprocess) has the function of constructing socialreality mode is oriented to both interpersonal and experientialmeaning It thus mediates the role played by language along twodimensions Interpersonally mode mediates the semiotic spacebetween monologue and dialogue Experientially mode mediatesthe semiotic space between action and reflection Putting this ingeneral terms mode mediates negotiation44
Second register theory describes the relationship betweenfield tenor and mode and discourse semantics It is described asa relationship of realization (also referred to as expression orcoding) in which in Hjelmslevian terms register is the contentplane for which discourse semantics is the expression plane45 Inthis regard field is realized as ideational meaning text as therepresentation of experience Here the goings-on participantsand circumstances of field are encoded into language primarilyas verbal groups nominal groups and adverbial or participialgroups respectively Tenor is realized as interpersonal meaningtext as interaction or exchange The enactments and negotiationsof the social relations in the situation are encoded into languageprimarily through the system of verbal attitude (ie assertive[indicative] projective [subjunctive] directive [imperative]expective [future]) Tenor is also realized through the system ofappraisal (ie attitude [affect judgment appreciation] andengagement [heterogloss monogloss]) Mode is realized astextual meaning text as a series of organized messages46 Here
41 Martin English Text 523ndash26 Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo28
42 Ie the relative position of the participants in the culturersquos socialhierarchy
43 Ie the degree of institutional involvement between participants inthe situation
44 Martin English Text 50945 Martin English Text 501ndash50246 Cf Halliday ldquoFunctions of Languagerdquo 24ndash26
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 39
the elements of ideational meaning and interpersonal meaningare ldquopackagedrdquo as it were into clauses in which some portion ofeach clause has special ldquothematicrdquo status and the remainder ofthe clause develops the theme and completes the message47
Looking again at Mark 2 generic constraints of narrative maycall for the story to open with an orientation (vv 1ndash2) butregister constrains the content of the orientation IdeationallyMark construes a world (a reality an experience) in this portionof the narrative in which the goings-on consist of the followingprocesses48
bull material processes gathering together (συνήχθησαν [v 2]) separating (χωρεῖν [v 2])49
bull a mental process hearing (ἠκούσθη [v 1])bull an existential process is (ἐστίν [v 1]) bull a verbal process speaking (ἐλάλει [v 2])
The following participants are portrayed
bull ldquoherdquo (presumably Jesus) as the one who is ldquoenteringrdquo Capernaum who ldquoisrdquo in the house and who ldquowas speakingrdquo the messagebull an assumed agent (the crowd) as the one by whom it ldquowas heardrdquo that he is in the housebull ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί) (also ldquothemrdquo [αὐτοῖς]) who had ldquogatheredrdquo and couldno longer ldquoseparaterdquo and to whom ldquoherdquo was speaking the messagebull Capernaum (Καφαρναούmicro)bull a house (οἴκῳ)bull the door of the house (θύραν)bull the message or word (λόγον)
Interpersonally the storyrsquos orientation is monoglossic beingdominated by assertive verbal attitude which is grammaticalizedby indicative verbal mood This enacts a relationship betweenMark and his presumed readers in which as storyteller Mark hashigher status than the readers because he is the one who
47 Cf Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 3748 On process types see Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar
108ff Cf also Tan ldquoTransitivityrdquo np49 The participle εἰσελθών technically constitutes the circumstance for
hearing (ἠκούσθη) and is thus not a main process Circumstances too are partof ideational meaning
40 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
apparently knows everything about the situation he describesThe readers on the other hand are situated as potentialacknowledgers of what Mark asserts Moreover that Mark hasopted to include this particular narrative in his gospel indicatesan appraisal from his perspective the readers need to be toldthis story Even just within the narrativersquos orientation phase (ieat the level of the narrative50) appraisal is evident For examplethe two clauses καὶ συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲτὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν (v 2) betoken a positive evaluation of Jesusrsquogrowing honor among the masses51
In terms of the textual strand of meaning the function inwhich we are most interested here the text unfolds in a series ofclauses and each of these clauses has a ldquoleaping off pointrdquo andtypically though not always some further development of thatpoint The major concern here is with how the author chooses toorder the components of the clause Yet even this choice isconstrained by the situation and the social purpose of both thetext as a whole and the stretch of text constituting the clause Forexample as noted Mark 21ndash2 make up the orientation portion ofthe narrative Mark has chosen to tell The first clause in theorientation is Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶνἠκούσθη Not surprisingly Markrsquos point of departure in thisclause is the adjunct52 ldquoAnd entering again into Capernaum rdquo
50 Cf ldquoThe Rhetorical Effects of Attituderdquo in Dvorak ldquoInterpersonalMetafunctionrdquo 54
51 That so many people were filling the house that there was not evenspace to get into or out of the house is a token of positive judgment with regardto social esteem (t +judgment esteem normality) Further the use of the termποltοί (many) coupled with the statement that there was no room in front of thedoor (microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν) increases the force of the judgment(both graduation force quantification mass and graduation forcequantification extent distribution) Cf Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo102 also Martin and White Language of Evaluation 150ndash51
52 Ie adverbialcircumstantial participial clause Adjunct refers to aword group or groups that modify the predicator (verb) in a clause to providecircumstances associated with the process (cf ldquoOpenTextorg AnnotationModelrdquo np)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 41
This demonstrates the ldquoenablingrdquo or ldquorelevancerdquo role of thetextual metafunction namely to ldquopackagerdquo ideational andinterpersonal meanings into clauses in a way that is both relevantto and communicatively effective in light of its purpose That ishere it orients the readers to the context of the narrative Thus itis how text is being used in a given context (ie mode) thatgoverns the textual meanings that are made (ie textualmetafunction) which in turn govern the arrangements of theclause components in the realization of each clause (informationflow)
24 SummaryWe demonstrated thus far that both discourse structure andinformation flow are not merely the result of stylistic choicesmade by language users Rather structure and flow are largelygoverned by two different levels of context namely genre andregister With regard to discourse structure people deploylanguage in ways that are staged and oriented to various socialgoals The ways in which these social goals may beaccomplished with language are governed by the language userrsquosculture the staging or structure of the discourse reflects thesecultural constraints Information flow is constrained to someextent by variations in genre and to a greater extent by registervariablesmdashand of these mostly by mode The textualmetafunction arranges ideational and interpersonal meanings inways that from the language userrsquos perspective are relevant toand most effective in reaching the communicative goal of theclause in relation to the larger purpose of the text
3 Prime and Subsequent Analysis
We argued above that the role of the textual metafunction was toorganize ideational and interpersonal content into clauses in away that is relevant and consistent with register and that createsa coherent message Here we provide a framework for modelingclauses as messages and a method for interpreting thosemessages
42 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
The message of a clause consists of two parts ldquothe elementwhich serves as the point of departure of the messagerdquo and ldquotheremainder of the messagerdquo53 Although Halliday referred to theseparts as theme and rheme respectively we follow Porter andOrsquoDonnell and use the terms prime and subsequent reservingtheme and rheme for the discussion of thematic elements at thelevel of clause complex (sentence) and multi-clause complexlevel (see ldquoTheme and Rheme Analysisrdquo below)54 In the modelwe present here prime refers to ldquowho or what the clause isfocused upon realized by the first [word] group element in theclause The subsequent is defined as the development of theprime and is realized in the remaining group elements in theclauserdquo55 The prime functions to orient the reader to the messageof the clause and the subsequent provides the news about theprime that the writer wants the readers to know to experience orto remember56
Every clause has a prime element and most also have asubsequent though it is possible for a clause to consist only of aprime57 The word group element (ie subject predicatorcomplement or adjunct)58 comprising the prime may be assimple as a single word (conjunctions are excluded) or it may bea complex nominal or verbal group or even an embeddedclause59 Subsequent consists of all other word group elementsfollowing the prime For example the initial clause in Mark 21ndash12 is analyzed for prime and subsequent as follows (see theappendix for a full prime and subsequent analysis of this unit)
53 Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 37 Cf Porter andOrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 90
54 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9155 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 91 (italics theirs)56 Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2057 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 92 Dvorak
ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2058 Cf OrsquoDonnell Porter Reed Picirilli Smith and Tan ldquoClause Level
Annotation Specificationrdquo n p59 Cf Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 20
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 43
Prime SubsequentA [[P εἰσελθὼν |A πάλιν |A εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro |A δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ]] P ἠκούσθη
Markrsquos point of departure in this clause is an adjunct consistingof an embedded participial clause that realizes a temporalcontext for interpreting or understanding the subsequent whichconsists of the predicator (main verb)
The following clause from Mark 23 raises a crucial pointnamely that prime and subsequent analysis must be performedon the Greek text and not on a translation
Prime SubsequentP ἔρχονται A [[P φέροντες |A πρὸς αὐτὸν |C παραλυτικὸν [[P αἰρόmicroενον |A ὑπὸ
τεσσάρων ]] ]]
The prime of this clause is the predicator or verbal group InGreek finite verbs are monolectic which means theygrammaticalize person as part of their form through the use ofpersonal endings60 Thus it is not necessary for users of Greek tospecify explicitly a subject in a clause In fact the defaultunmarked option in biblical Greek is not to specify a subject61
However in many other languages like English for example thedefault unmarked option is to specify a subject This means ifprime and subsequent analysis is performed on an Englishtranslation it would label prime incorrectly In this particularinstance based on the English gloss ldquoThey comeare comingbringing to him a paralytic being carried by fourrdquo the primewould be ldquotheyrdquo However the actual prime is the processldquocomeare comingrdquo Thus Mark chose to begin with the material
60 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 71 Porter and OrsquoDonnell (DiscourseAnalysis 93) note that this gives the writer of Greek the flexibility to ldquo(1) notspecify a specific subject (2) specify the subject but not place it inprimary position or (3) specify the subject and place it in primary positionin the clause rdquo
61 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 93 n 148
44 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
process and to further develop it with circumstantial informationprovided by an embedded participial clause
It is often assumed that items in prime position are prominentsimply because they occupy prime position in the clause but thisis not the de facto case Determining prominence requiresconsideration of other factors including analyses of clauserealization patterns across the corpus of text written by the sameauthor (eg the Pauline epistles)62 as well as the entire NewTestament corpus and other factors such as literary genre Also tobe accounted for are features of markedness grounding andsalience63 Further research in this area is needed but it may befor example that because predicators fill prime position themajority of times across the New Testament saying that apredicator is prominent simply because it occupies primeposition in the clause would be to say too much64 That said theorder of word groups within a clause is indeed a factor indetermining prominence65
4 Theme and Rheme Analysis
Porter and OrsquoDonnell reserve the terms theme and rheme foridentifying and discussing the ldquothematic elements at the sentenceand multi-sentence levelrdquo66 This means the focus of our textualanalysis now shifts to the level above the clause When exploringtheme and rheme analysis it is important to define the terms
62 Cf Tan ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo 95ndash11063 Cf Westfall ldquoAnalysis of Prominence in Hellenistic Greekrdquo 75ndash9464 Dvorakrsquos analysis of the entire New Testament revealed that across
the entire New Testament predicators were prime 7227 times adjuncts 5767times subjects 5354 times and complements 2634 times Cf DvorakldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 25ndash26 Cf also Porter(ldquoProminencerdquo 71) who discusses patterns of order of first and second clausecomponents
65 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 67ndash6966 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 45
clearly to delineate the steps in analysis and to stress a numberof the important advantages to such an analysis
To begin one must have an understanding of the term processchain A process is any verbal action implied or inscribedwithin a clause a process chain refers to a string of verbalprocesses that form a series across a stretch of text67 This chainof processes is ascribed to a particular actor(s) who is said to bethe thematic actor Of course other participants and their actionsmay be interspersed in the same stretch of text but these do notnecessarily break the process chain associated with the thematicactor An easy example in English is as follows
Bobby went to the store There he was greeted by a clerk and thensearched for a loaf of bread When he found it however he decidedthat it was too expensive so he put it back on the shelf However anolder woman standing nearby decided she would take it Bobby thenleft the store and travelled to the Shop-For-Less down the road wherehe purchased the bread for a less expensive price
All of the verbs in this anecdote form a process chain andBobby is the primary participant Bobby went searched founddecided put left travelled and purchased Notice as well thatthe additional processes performed by the clerk and the olderwoman do not break the chain as it follows Bobby for theiractions are clearly secondary information and reactionarythroughout Bobbyrsquos story
This story provides an excellent segue to the notion of themeTheme in narrative is best seen through the transition and changeof a participant as a primary actor in a process chainmdashwhat isusually called the thematic actor68 In other words a theme is thetransition from one thematic actor to another or a change inparticipant involvement that breaks a process chain That beingsaid the thematic actor must be an explicit subject meaning thatthe actor cannot merely be implied from a verb This does notmean however that the thematic actor must be prime or evenarticulated Indeed the thematic actor can be anarthrous or
67 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9868 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
46 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
articulated prime or subsequent Provided the thematic actor isarticulated this actor can be said to be more emphatic Moreemphatic still is when the thematic actor also occupies the primeposition in the clause69 Such a theme is said to be marked andshould be noted as a potential boundary marker for a shift indiscourse topic which will be discussed more thoroughly below
Interestingly enough the thematic actor can actually bepassive which suggests that more refined language is needed infuture formulations of theme and rheme analyses The followingbrief narrative concerning a shirt demonstrates the shortcomingsof ldquoactorrdquo language
Cindyrsquos shirt was stained by an ice cream cone The shirt then had tobe tossed into the washing machine which soaked it for twentyminutes The shirt then was brought out of the wash and was placedinto the dryer for a sixty-minute tumble Finally the shirt wasremoved by Cindy and hung on the drying rack
Clearly the narrative is about the shirt It is the theme of the taleeven though it is not truly an actor in any instance Perhaps thelanguage of ldquoprimary participantrdquo could be more helpful and lessmisleading
Moving onto clausal considerations the thematic participantmust be in a primary clause or on clause level α in the OpenText model70 Any participant found in a secondary clause hasbeen rank-shifted down to level β and therefore plays asubordinate role to the circumstances of the primary clauseObviously then a subordinated participant cannot serve as theprimary participant
Lastly one must consider the concept of rhememdashtheadditional information regarding the current thematicparticipant71 which is also understood as the extensivecircumstantial information involved in a process chain Considerthe story of a young elf
69 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98-9970 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10371 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 47
Sissy was out late one night at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that shewould not be able to return to the hovel before the werewolves cameout for the night she decided to employ her cunning Acting quicklyshe pulled leaves and twigs off of a few nearby oaks and began toconstruct a glider She then climbed atop the tallest tree at her friendsrsquoden and sets sail for home landing safely at her hovel just as sheheard the first howl of the dark night She was safe safe indeed
In the preceding story all of the details concerning her activitiesthe building gliding landing and so on all serve as rhematicmaterial to fill out the picture of the text It is clear that thissection of text is about Sissy since she is the primary participantThe rheme is what allows the reader to know that the story istruly about not only Sissy but also her quick wit and her returnvoyage home
Briefly it is worth noting that following the application ofboth prime and subsequent analysis and theme and rhemeanalysis the two analyses may be cross examined for additionaland enlightening findings For example should a prime in aclause also be a theme then the theme is considered markedmeaning that the author chose to launch his clause with thetheme change72 This reflects the nature of language in that thespeaker has to make a choice regarding how to start a clauseSince language is necessarily syntagmatic and paradigmaticmdashlinear and oppositionalmdashonly one thing can be said at a timeTherefore the first chosen words that come out of the mouthmust be considered significant especially in the language ofGreek where word order is significantly more malleable than inEnglish although it is important to note that a linguistic choice isnot always conscious
To grasp how the idea of prime and theme work together hereis a small reiteration of Sissyrsquos story ldquoSissy was out late onenight at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that she would not be ableto return to the hovel before the werewolves came out for thenight she decided to employ her cunningrdquo Notice how the firstclause begins with ldquoSissyrdquo as both the prime and the thematic
72 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 100-101
48 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
participant There is no question as to whom the story pertainsHowever the prime in the following sentence is actually aparticiple adjunct material which sets the stage for the problemin the text Thus the kernel of truth from these first twosentences is that Sissy realizes she has a problem Without thecoupling of prime and theme such a realization could very wellbe missed by a casual reader or interpreter leading to amisunderstanding of character prominence73 The true beauty ofthese analyses therefore can be seen in the fact that they causethe analyst to slow down and appreciate the rhetoric within thetext itself
The importance of theme and rheme analysis cannot beunderstated for it is key in determining exactly what the authoris trying to communicate in a given pericope The thematic actorin a given process chain is the governing character in a multi-sentence portion of the text All of the information that iscircumstantial to the theme is the rheme and should be treated asadding additional information to the theme If one were toconfuse this then one would be in danger of putting words in theauthorrsquos mouth and mirror reading into the text Thereforetheme and rheme analysis is critical to providing the clearestpossible picture of a textrsquos message the bits of the text that theauthor considers most important which leads to the best possibleapplications for daily living
There are only two thematic units in Mark 21ndash12 (cf theappendix for a full theme-rheme analysis) The first thematic unitconsists of verses 1ndash5 In this unit the only explicit subject of aprocess chain that occurs in a primary clause is ποltοί (v 2)Mark has not chosen the most heavily marked theme optionsince ποltοί does not also occupy prime position in the clauseAlthough ὁ παραλυτικός occurs in the subject slot of clause 16 (v4) it occurs in a dependent clause thus it does not constitute athematic shift Ὁ Ἰησοῦς occurs in v 5 but it is part of asecondary embedded participial clause that serves as an adjunctin the primary clause and is therefore not a thematic shift The
73 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 104-105
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 49
only remaining possibility is αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι in clause 19 (v 5)however although it is subject in a primary clause it belongs toa stretch of reported speech and is thus not a thematic shift Thenext thematic unit begins at clause 20 (v 6) with τινες τῶνγραmicromicroατέων (not marked) and extends all the way through to theend of the unit (v 12) Again a number of other subjects occur inthe subsequent clauses but as in the first unit none of themqualifies as a thematic shift because either they occur as part ofreported speech or secondary clauses (embedded or standalone)
There are only a couple thematic units in Jude A few of thesewill be examined below to demonstrate what has been writtenabove The first of these examples comes from clause twelve
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸκρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειανκαὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
Here we have an example of an unmarked theme for thetheme is not prime in the clause Τινες ἄνθρωποι is the primaryparticipant of this clause The rest of the material is rhematic inthat it is giving additional information about these ldquocertainpeoplerdquo The most significant of the rhematic material here is theprocess associated with the subject on the primary clause levelThis process is παρεισέδυσαν essentially meaning that thesepeople have snuck in among them There are other processeshowever involved that are related back to the theme here whichform a process chain when taken together Some of thesepredicators are participles which associate variouscircumstantial bits with the theme provided Other verbs found inclauses 29ndash32 are also on the primary level which at leastinclude microιαίνουσιν ἀθετοῦσιν and βλασφηmicroοῦσιν Each of theseverbs is intensely negative in nature which supports theassertion that the author genuinely does not approve of theseindividuals at all
Now one might assert that these verbs should be rhematic forother subjects since there are indeed other subjects that theseverbs predicate However there is no explicit subject on theprimary clause level that signals a change in theme after τινες
50 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
ἄνθρωποι until Μιχαὴλ74 Since this is the case it cannot be saidthat any of these intermediate participants is thematic Thesecondary clauses embedded or otherwise cannot carry enoughweight to be thematic since they are additional information usedto support the primary material they follow
The second example comes from clause 40 Οὗτοι δὲ ὅσα microὲνοὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν In this example the theme is markedmeaning that the primary participant is also in the primeposition Since the author chose to present this theme as markedit likely has extra weight In this instance the marked theme isactually a reference back to the theme in clause twelve whichserves as the topic of the entire discourse Thus it is likely thatthe theme is marked as the author tries to reorient his audiencetoward himself as opposed to his adversaries
The final example comes from clause 67 καὶ τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶνλαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν In thisexample the subject is articulated and prime which makes thisan especially marked theme When the subject comes at thebeginning of the clause the subject is the leaping off point of theclause the first bit of information that flows out of the speakerOn top of all of this the author took the time to articulate thetheme which is not necessarily required in Greek All of theseelements work together to draw attention to the subject in subtleyet important ways It is possible that this theme is so marked asthe author wants to draw attention to the wicked speech thatspills forth from the mouths of τινες ἄνθρωποιmdashspeech to whichthe author clearly does not want his audience listening
5 Topic and Comment Analysis
Topic and comment analysis functions at the highest level ofdiscourse This level includes the clause complex paragraph and
74 The demonstrative pronoun οὗτοι in clause 29 does not signal a themechange because it is a reference back to the current theme τινες ἄνθρωποι Thiswould be similar to the use of a personal pronoun like ldquoherdquo He is a referentback to a governing term that has been established in most cases as is οὗτοι
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 51
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
configuration of meanings that enact the social practices of agiven culturerdquo26 Our view is informed by Bakhtinrsquos theory ofspeech genres which he defined as habitualized relatively stablepatterns of meaning that are made with relatively predictabletypes of interactive utterances27 From this point of view genreincludes not only literary genres but ldquoeverydayrdquo genres bothspoken and written such as service encounters political debatesgossip jokes sermons stories and so on28
The established genres of a culture provide an economy ofmeaning-making by which members of that culture are able toaccomplish the manifold social processes required of everydaylife without having to define each social process anew each timeit needs to be repeated29 This is why as Bakhtin puts it
We learn to cast our speech in generic forms and when hearingothersrsquo speech we guess its genre from the very first words predict acertain length and a certain compositional structure we foreseethe end that is from the very beginning we have a sense of thespeech whole which is only later differentiated during the speechprocess30
Bakhtinrsquos point as Eggins and Martin rightly highlight is thatstructures of discourses vary in typically familiar ways becausethe staging of the social processes they are intended toaccomplish varies on the basis of typically familiar culturalnorms31
26 Martin and Rose Genre Relations 6 Clearly our definition differsfrom that of traditional literary studies where the term tends to refer to varioustypes of literary productions that are differentiated on the basis of form andorstylistic convention (cf Tate ldquoGenrerdquo 149)
27 Cf Bakhtin ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo 60ndash102 here 60 CfDvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo 35 Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres andRegistersrdquo 236 For an excellent portrayal of Bakhtin and his thought seeHolquist Dialogism
28 Cf Eggins Introduction 5629 Berger and Luckmann Social Construction of Reality 5330 Bakhtin ldquoProblem of Speech Genresrdquo 7931 Cf Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres and Registersrdquo 236
36 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Consider for example Mark 21ndash12 This stretch of text isone of many stories that comprise the biographical history (bios)that Mark writes about Jesus32 As such this text feeds into thegreater social goal of the gospel to articulate and to defend thesignificance of Jesus and perhaps more importantly tolegitimate the value system he embodies33 The particular kind ofstory Mark employs here is narrative34 Narratives are storiesthat aim at resolving some sort of complication Typically theyconsist of an orientation one or more complication one or moreevaluation and one or more resolution35 The discourse structureof Mark 21ndash12 follows this pattern (see appendix) Orientation(vv 1ndash2) ^ Complication1 (vv 3ndash4a) ^ Evaluation1 (v 4b) ^Resolution1 (temporary) (v 5) ^ Complication2 (vv 6ndash7) ^Evaluation2 (vv 8ndash9) ^ Resolution2 (final) (vv 10ndash12)36
The text of Jude is a letter so the structure of the text is inpart constrained by the conventions of letter writing of his daygreeting (vv 1ndash2) body (vv 3ndash23) and closing (vv 24ndash25)37
Jude identifies the social purpose of his letter as anadmonishment to struggle intensely for the faith (παρακαλῶνἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ πίστει [v 3]) Here are the basic stages Judeemploys in an effort to accomplish his task offer theencouragement proper (v 3) introduce participants to be
32 Cf deSilva Introduction to the New Testament 145ndash48 StantonGospel for a New People 69ndash70 Aune New Testament in Its LiteraryEnvironment 35 ldquoThe unconscious functions of Greco-Roman biographyinvolve the historical legitimation (or discrediting) of a social beliefvaluesystem personified in the subject of the biographyrdquo (italics added)
33 Cf deSilva Introduction 14734 Other story genres include recounts anecdotes exempla and
observations Cf Martin and Rose Genre Relations 44ff35 Martin and Rose Genre Relations 52 These are the basic
components that comprise a narrative Of course the number of thesecomponents and their order may vary depending on situational variables
36 The caret (^) in this sequence means ldquofollowed byrdquo On the basicstructure of different kinds of stories cf Martin and Rose Genre Relations49ndash98 (on narratives specifically see 67ndash74)
37 Cf Gabriel ldquoLettersrdquo 193ndash94
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 37
portrayed negatively (v 4) give a series of intertextualreferences to negative exempla (vv 5ndash16) give a series ofdirectives with additional negative evaluations of the antagonistsas foils for the positive commands (vv 17ndash23)
As these brief examples demonstrate discourse structure isnot merely the result of an authorrsquos stylistic flourishes thoughindeed an author may as a matter of style intentionallymanipulate or even flout structural norms Discourse structure ishowever largely governed by the strictures of a given cultureLanguage use becomes habitualized and is used to accomplishcertain social processes in certain ways that are deemedacceptable by those who are part of the culture
23 RegisterAs mentioned above the structure of a text is also constrained bythe register or more specific context of situation in which the textwas uttered The theory of register first developed by Halliday38
and further developed by Martin (whom we follow here)39 bothmodels context of situation and explains its relationship tolanguage
First register theory stratifies context and organizes it aroundthree contextual variables or features called field tenor andmode Briefly field refers to the sequences of activities that aregoing on in a situation as well as the people things placesqualities and circumstances that are associated with thoseactivities40 Tenor refers to the kind of social relations that areenacted and negotiated among the participants in a given
38 Cf Halliday Social Semiotic 110ndash11339 Cf Martin English Text 497ndash502 also Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres
and Registers of Discourserdquo 230ndash5640 Martin and Rose Genre Relations 14 Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal
Metafunctionrdquo 27ndash28
38 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
situation41 particularly the social relations of statuspower42 andsolidaritycontact43 Mode
is concerned with symbolic realitymdashwith texture Since symbolicreality (ie textprocess) has the function of constructing socialreality mode is oriented to both interpersonal and experientialmeaning It thus mediates the role played by language along twodimensions Interpersonally mode mediates the semiotic spacebetween monologue and dialogue Experientially mode mediatesthe semiotic space between action and reflection Putting this ingeneral terms mode mediates negotiation44
Second register theory describes the relationship betweenfield tenor and mode and discourse semantics It is described asa relationship of realization (also referred to as expression orcoding) in which in Hjelmslevian terms register is the contentplane for which discourse semantics is the expression plane45 Inthis regard field is realized as ideational meaning text as therepresentation of experience Here the goings-on participantsand circumstances of field are encoded into language primarilyas verbal groups nominal groups and adverbial or participialgroups respectively Tenor is realized as interpersonal meaningtext as interaction or exchange The enactments and negotiationsof the social relations in the situation are encoded into languageprimarily through the system of verbal attitude (ie assertive[indicative] projective [subjunctive] directive [imperative]expective [future]) Tenor is also realized through the system ofappraisal (ie attitude [affect judgment appreciation] andengagement [heterogloss monogloss]) Mode is realized astextual meaning text as a series of organized messages46 Here
41 Martin English Text 523ndash26 Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo28
42 Ie the relative position of the participants in the culturersquos socialhierarchy
43 Ie the degree of institutional involvement between participants inthe situation
44 Martin English Text 50945 Martin English Text 501ndash50246 Cf Halliday ldquoFunctions of Languagerdquo 24ndash26
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 39
the elements of ideational meaning and interpersonal meaningare ldquopackagedrdquo as it were into clauses in which some portion ofeach clause has special ldquothematicrdquo status and the remainder ofthe clause develops the theme and completes the message47
Looking again at Mark 2 generic constraints of narrative maycall for the story to open with an orientation (vv 1ndash2) butregister constrains the content of the orientation IdeationallyMark construes a world (a reality an experience) in this portionof the narrative in which the goings-on consist of the followingprocesses48
bull material processes gathering together (συνήχθησαν [v 2]) separating (χωρεῖν [v 2])49
bull a mental process hearing (ἠκούσθη [v 1])bull an existential process is (ἐστίν [v 1]) bull a verbal process speaking (ἐλάλει [v 2])
The following participants are portrayed
bull ldquoherdquo (presumably Jesus) as the one who is ldquoenteringrdquo Capernaum who ldquoisrdquo in the house and who ldquowas speakingrdquo the messagebull an assumed agent (the crowd) as the one by whom it ldquowas heardrdquo that he is in the housebull ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί) (also ldquothemrdquo [αὐτοῖς]) who had ldquogatheredrdquo and couldno longer ldquoseparaterdquo and to whom ldquoherdquo was speaking the messagebull Capernaum (Καφαρναούmicro)bull a house (οἴκῳ)bull the door of the house (θύραν)bull the message or word (λόγον)
Interpersonally the storyrsquos orientation is monoglossic beingdominated by assertive verbal attitude which is grammaticalizedby indicative verbal mood This enacts a relationship betweenMark and his presumed readers in which as storyteller Mark hashigher status than the readers because he is the one who
47 Cf Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 3748 On process types see Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar
108ff Cf also Tan ldquoTransitivityrdquo np49 The participle εἰσελθών technically constitutes the circumstance for
hearing (ἠκούσθη) and is thus not a main process Circumstances too are partof ideational meaning
40 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
apparently knows everything about the situation he describesThe readers on the other hand are situated as potentialacknowledgers of what Mark asserts Moreover that Mark hasopted to include this particular narrative in his gospel indicatesan appraisal from his perspective the readers need to be toldthis story Even just within the narrativersquos orientation phase (ieat the level of the narrative50) appraisal is evident For examplethe two clauses καὶ συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲτὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν (v 2) betoken a positive evaluation of Jesusrsquogrowing honor among the masses51
In terms of the textual strand of meaning the function inwhich we are most interested here the text unfolds in a series ofclauses and each of these clauses has a ldquoleaping off pointrdquo andtypically though not always some further development of thatpoint The major concern here is with how the author chooses toorder the components of the clause Yet even this choice isconstrained by the situation and the social purpose of both thetext as a whole and the stretch of text constituting the clause Forexample as noted Mark 21ndash2 make up the orientation portion ofthe narrative Mark has chosen to tell The first clause in theorientation is Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶνἠκούσθη Not surprisingly Markrsquos point of departure in thisclause is the adjunct52 ldquoAnd entering again into Capernaum rdquo
50 Cf ldquoThe Rhetorical Effects of Attituderdquo in Dvorak ldquoInterpersonalMetafunctionrdquo 54
51 That so many people were filling the house that there was not evenspace to get into or out of the house is a token of positive judgment with regardto social esteem (t +judgment esteem normality) Further the use of the termποltοί (many) coupled with the statement that there was no room in front of thedoor (microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν) increases the force of the judgment(both graduation force quantification mass and graduation forcequantification extent distribution) Cf Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo102 also Martin and White Language of Evaluation 150ndash51
52 Ie adverbialcircumstantial participial clause Adjunct refers to aword group or groups that modify the predicator (verb) in a clause to providecircumstances associated with the process (cf ldquoOpenTextorg AnnotationModelrdquo np)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 41
This demonstrates the ldquoenablingrdquo or ldquorelevancerdquo role of thetextual metafunction namely to ldquopackagerdquo ideational andinterpersonal meanings into clauses in a way that is both relevantto and communicatively effective in light of its purpose That ishere it orients the readers to the context of the narrative Thus itis how text is being used in a given context (ie mode) thatgoverns the textual meanings that are made (ie textualmetafunction) which in turn govern the arrangements of theclause components in the realization of each clause (informationflow)
24 SummaryWe demonstrated thus far that both discourse structure andinformation flow are not merely the result of stylistic choicesmade by language users Rather structure and flow are largelygoverned by two different levels of context namely genre andregister With regard to discourse structure people deploylanguage in ways that are staged and oriented to various socialgoals The ways in which these social goals may beaccomplished with language are governed by the language userrsquosculture the staging or structure of the discourse reflects thesecultural constraints Information flow is constrained to someextent by variations in genre and to a greater extent by registervariablesmdashand of these mostly by mode The textualmetafunction arranges ideational and interpersonal meanings inways that from the language userrsquos perspective are relevant toand most effective in reaching the communicative goal of theclause in relation to the larger purpose of the text
3 Prime and Subsequent Analysis
We argued above that the role of the textual metafunction was toorganize ideational and interpersonal content into clauses in away that is relevant and consistent with register and that createsa coherent message Here we provide a framework for modelingclauses as messages and a method for interpreting thosemessages
42 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
The message of a clause consists of two parts ldquothe elementwhich serves as the point of departure of the messagerdquo and ldquotheremainder of the messagerdquo53 Although Halliday referred to theseparts as theme and rheme respectively we follow Porter andOrsquoDonnell and use the terms prime and subsequent reservingtheme and rheme for the discussion of thematic elements at thelevel of clause complex (sentence) and multi-clause complexlevel (see ldquoTheme and Rheme Analysisrdquo below)54 In the modelwe present here prime refers to ldquowho or what the clause isfocused upon realized by the first [word] group element in theclause The subsequent is defined as the development of theprime and is realized in the remaining group elements in theclauserdquo55 The prime functions to orient the reader to the messageof the clause and the subsequent provides the news about theprime that the writer wants the readers to know to experience orto remember56
Every clause has a prime element and most also have asubsequent though it is possible for a clause to consist only of aprime57 The word group element (ie subject predicatorcomplement or adjunct)58 comprising the prime may be assimple as a single word (conjunctions are excluded) or it may bea complex nominal or verbal group or even an embeddedclause59 Subsequent consists of all other word group elementsfollowing the prime For example the initial clause in Mark 21ndash12 is analyzed for prime and subsequent as follows (see theappendix for a full prime and subsequent analysis of this unit)
53 Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 37 Cf Porter andOrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 90
54 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9155 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 91 (italics theirs)56 Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2057 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 92 Dvorak
ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2058 Cf OrsquoDonnell Porter Reed Picirilli Smith and Tan ldquoClause Level
Annotation Specificationrdquo n p59 Cf Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 20
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 43
Prime SubsequentA [[P εἰσελθὼν |A πάλιν |A εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro |A δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ]] P ἠκούσθη
Markrsquos point of departure in this clause is an adjunct consistingof an embedded participial clause that realizes a temporalcontext for interpreting or understanding the subsequent whichconsists of the predicator (main verb)
The following clause from Mark 23 raises a crucial pointnamely that prime and subsequent analysis must be performedon the Greek text and not on a translation
Prime SubsequentP ἔρχονται A [[P φέροντες |A πρὸς αὐτὸν |C παραλυτικὸν [[P αἰρόmicroενον |A ὑπὸ
τεσσάρων ]] ]]
The prime of this clause is the predicator or verbal group InGreek finite verbs are monolectic which means theygrammaticalize person as part of their form through the use ofpersonal endings60 Thus it is not necessary for users of Greek tospecify explicitly a subject in a clause In fact the defaultunmarked option in biblical Greek is not to specify a subject61
However in many other languages like English for example thedefault unmarked option is to specify a subject This means ifprime and subsequent analysis is performed on an Englishtranslation it would label prime incorrectly In this particularinstance based on the English gloss ldquoThey comeare comingbringing to him a paralytic being carried by fourrdquo the primewould be ldquotheyrdquo However the actual prime is the processldquocomeare comingrdquo Thus Mark chose to begin with the material
60 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 71 Porter and OrsquoDonnell (DiscourseAnalysis 93) note that this gives the writer of Greek the flexibility to ldquo(1) notspecify a specific subject (2) specify the subject but not place it inprimary position or (3) specify the subject and place it in primary positionin the clause rdquo
61 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 93 n 148
44 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
process and to further develop it with circumstantial informationprovided by an embedded participial clause
It is often assumed that items in prime position are prominentsimply because they occupy prime position in the clause but thisis not the de facto case Determining prominence requiresconsideration of other factors including analyses of clauserealization patterns across the corpus of text written by the sameauthor (eg the Pauline epistles)62 as well as the entire NewTestament corpus and other factors such as literary genre Also tobe accounted for are features of markedness grounding andsalience63 Further research in this area is needed but it may befor example that because predicators fill prime position themajority of times across the New Testament saying that apredicator is prominent simply because it occupies primeposition in the clause would be to say too much64 That said theorder of word groups within a clause is indeed a factor indetermining prominence65
4 Theme and Rheme Analysis
Porter and OrsquoDonnell reserve the terms theme and rheme foridentifying and discussing the ldquothematic elements at the sentenceand multi-sentence levelrdquo66 This means the focus of our textualanalysis now shifts to the level above the clause When exploringtheme and rheme analysis it is important to define the terms
62 Cf Tan ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo 95ndash11063 Cf Westfall ldquoAnalysis of Prominence in Hellenistic Greekrdquo 75ndash9464 Dvorakrsquos analysis of the entire New Testament revealed that across
the entire New Testament predicators were prime 7227 times adjuncts 5767times subjects 5354 times and complements 2634 times Cf DvorakldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 25ndash26 Cf also Porter(ldquoProminencerdquo 71) who discusses patterns of order of first and second clausecomponents
65 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 67ndash6966 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 45
clearly to delineate the steps in analysis and to stress a numberof the important advantages to such an analysis
To begin one must have an understanding of the term processchain A process is any verbal action implied or inscribedwithin a clause a process chain refers to a string of verbalprocesses that form a series across a stretch of text67 This chainof processes is ascribed to a particular actor(s) who is said to bethe thematic actor Of course other participants and their actionsmay be interspersed in the same stretch of text but these do notnecessarily break the process chain associated with the thematicactor An easy example in English is as follows
Bobby went to the store There he was greeted by a clerk and thensearched for a loaf of bread When he found it however he decidedthat it was too expensive so he put it back on the shelf However anolder woman standing nearby decided she would take it Bobby thenleft the store and travelled to the Shop-For-Less down the road wherehe purchased the bread for a less expensive price
All of the verbs in this anecdote form a process chain andBobby is the primary participant Bobby went searched founddecided put left travelled and purchased Notice as well thatthe additional processes performed by the clerk and the olderwoman do not break the chain as it follows Bobby for theiractions are clearly secondary information and reactionarythroughout Bobbyrsquos story
This story provides an excellent segue to the notion of themeTheme in narrative is best seen through the transition and changeof a participant as a primary actor in a process chainmdashwhat isusually called the thematic actor68 In other words a theme is thetransition from one thematic actor to another or a change inparticipant involvement that breaks a process chain That beingsaid the thematic actor must be an explicit subject meaning thatthe actor cannot merely be implied from a verb This does notmean however that the thematic actor must be prime or evenarticulated Indeed the thematic actor can be anarthrous or
67 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9868 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
46 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
articulated prime or subsequent Provided the thematic actor isarticulated this actor can be said to be more emphatic Moreemphatic still is when the thematic actor also occupies the primeposition in the clause69 Such a theme is said to be marked andshould be noted as a potential boundary marker for a shift indiscourse topic which will be discussed more thoroughly below
Interestingly enough the thematic actor can actually bepassive which suggests that more refined language is needed infuture formulations of theme and rheme analyses The followingbrief narrative concerning a shirt demonstrates the shortcomingsof ldquoactorrdquo language
Cindyrsquos shirt was stained by an ice cream cone The shirt then had tobe tossed into the washing machine which soaked it for twentyminutes The shirt then was brought out of the wash and was placedinto the dryer for a sixty-minute tumble Finally the shirt wasremoved by Cindy and hung on the drying rack
Clearly the narrative is about the shirt It is the theme of the taleeven though it is not truly an actor in any instance Perhaps thelanguage of ldquoprimary participantrdquo could be more helpful and lessmisleading
Moving onto clausal considerations the thematic participantmust be in a primary clause or on clause level α in the OpenText model70 Any participant found in a secondary clause hasbeen rank-shifted down to level β and therefore plays asubordinate role to the circumstances of the primary clauseObviously then a subordinated participant cannot serve as theprimary participant
Lastly one must consider the concept of rhememdashtheadditional information regarding the current thematicparticipant71 which is also understood as the extensivecircumstantial information involved in a process chain Considerthe story of a young elf
69 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98-9970 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10371 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 47
Sissy was out late one night at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that shewould not be able to return to the hovel before the werewolves cameout for the night she decided to employ her cunning Acting quicklyshe pulled leaves and twigs off of a few nearby oaks and began toconstruct a glider She then climbed atop the tallest tree at her friendsrsquoden and sets sail for home landing safely at her hovel just as sheheard the first howl of the dark night She was safe safe indeed
In the preceding story all of the details concerning her activitiesthe building gliding landing and so on all serve as rhematicmaterial to fill out the picture of the text It is clear that thissection of text is about Sissy since she is the primary participantThe rheme is what allows the reader to know that the story istruly about not only Sissy but also her quick wit and her returnvoyage home
Briefly it is worth noting that following the application ofboth prime and subsequent analysis and theme and rhemeanalysis the two analyses may be cross examined for additionaland enlightening findings For example should a prime in aclause also be a theme then the theme is considered markedmeaning that the author chose to launch his clause with thetheme change72 This reflects the nature of language in that thespeaker has to make a choice regarding how to start a clauseSince language is necessarily syntagmatic and paradigmaticmdashlinear and oppositionalmdashonly one thing can be said at a timeTherefore the first chosen words that come out of the mouthmust be considered significant especially in the language ofGreek where word order is significantly more malleable than inEnglish although it is important to note that a linguistic choice isnot always conscious
To grasp how the idea of prime and theme work together hereis a small reiteration of Sissyrsquos story ldquoSissy was out late onenight at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that she would not be ableto return to the hovel before the werewolves came out for thenight she decided to employ her cunningrdquo Notice how the firstclause begins with ldquoSissyrdquo as both the prime and the thematic
72 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 100-101
48 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
participant There is no question as to whom the story pertainsHowever the prime in the following sentence is actually aparticiple adjunct material which sets the stage for the problemin the text Thus the kernel of truth from these first twosentences is that Sissy realizes she has a problem Without thecoupling of prime and theme such a realization could very wellbe missed by a casual reader or interpreter leading to amisunderstanding of character prominence73 The true beauty ofthese analyses therefore can be seen in the fact that they causethe analyst to slow down and appreciate the rhetoric within thetext itself
The importance of theme and rheme analysis cannot beunderstated for it is key in determining exactly what the authoris trying to communicate in a given pericope The thematic actorin a given process chain is the governing character in a multi-sentence portion of the text All of the information that iscircumstantial to the theme is the rheme and should be treated asadding additional information to the theme If one were toconfuse this then one would be in danger of putting words in theauthorrsquos mouth and mirror reading into the text Thereforetheme and rheme analysis is critical to providing the clearestpossible picture of a textrsquos message the bits of the text that theauthor considers most important which leads to the best possibleapplications for daily living
There are only two thematic units in Mark 21ndash12 (cf theappendix for a full theme-rheme analysis) The first thematic unitconsists of verses 1ndash5 In this unit the only explicit subject of aprocess chain that occurs in a primary clause is ποltοί (v 2)Mark has not chosen the most heavily marked theme optionsince ποltοί does not also occupy prime position in the clauseAlthough ὁ παραλυτικός occurs in the subject slot of clause 16 (v4) it occurs in a dependent clause thus it does not constitute athematic shift Ὁ Ἰησοῦς occurs in v 5 but it is part of asecondary embedded participial clause that serves as an adjunctin the primary clause and is therefore not a thematic shift The
73 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 104-105
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 49
only remaining possibility is αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι in clause 19 (v 5)however although it is subject in a primary clause it belongs toa stretch of reported speech and is thus not a thematic shift Thenext thematic unit begins at clause 20 (v 6) with τινες τῶνγραmicromicroατέων (not marked) and extends all the way through to theend of the unit (v 12) Again a number of other subjects occur inthe subsequent clauses but as in the first unit none of themqualifies as a thematic shift because either they occur as part ofreported speech or secondary clauses (embedded or standalone)
There are only a couple thematic units in Jude A few of thesewill be examined below to demonstrate what has been writtenabove The first of these examples comes from clause twelve
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸκρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειανκαὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
Here we have an example of an unmarked theme for thetheme is not prime in the clause Τινες ἄνθρωποι is the primaryparticipant of this clause The rest of the material is rhematic inthat it is giving additional information about these ldquocertainpeoplerdquo The most significant of the rhematic material here is theprocess associated with the subject on the primary clause levelThis process is παρεισέδυσαν essentially meaning that thesepeople have snuck in among them There are other processeshowever involved that are related back to the theme here whichform a process chain when taken together Some of thesepredicators are participles which associate variouscircumstantial bits with the theme provided Other verbs found inclauses 29ndash32 are also on the primary level which at leastinclude microιαίνουσιν ἀθετοῦσιν and βλασφηmicroοῦσιν Each of theseverbs is intensely negative in nature which supports theassertion that the author genuinely does not approve of theseindividuals at all
Now one might assert that these verbs should be rhematic forother subjects since there are indeed other subjects that theseverbs predicate However there is no explicit subject on theprimary clause level that signals a change in theme after τινες
50 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
ἄνθρωποι until Μιχαὴλ74 Since this is the case it cannot be saidthat any of these intermediate participants is thematic Thesecondary clauses embedded or otherwise cannot carry enoughweight to be thematic since they are additional information usedto support the primary material they follow
The second example comes from clause 40 Οὗτοι δὲ ὅσα microὲνοὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν In this example the theme is markedmeaning that the primary participant is also in the primeposition Since the author chose to present this theme as markedit likely has extra weight In this instance the marked theme isactually a reference back to the theme in clause twelve whichserves as the topic of the entire discourse Thus it is likely thatthe theme is marked as the author tries to reorient his audiencetoward himself as opposed to his adversaries
The final example comes from clause 67 καὶ τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶνλαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν In thisexample the subject is articulated and prime which makes thisan especially marked theme When the subject comes at thebeginning of the clause the subject is the leaping off point of theclause the first bit of information that flows out of the speakerOn top of all of this the author took the time to articulate thetheme which is not necessarily required in Greek All of theseelements work together to draw attention to the subject in subtleyet important ways It is possible that this theme is so marked asthe author wants to draw attention to the wicked speech thatspills forth from the mouths of τινες ἄνθρωποιmdashspeech to whichthe author clearly does not want his audience listening
5 Topic and Comment Analysis
Topic and comment analysis functions at the highest level ofdiscourse This level includes the clause complex paragraph and
74 The demonstrative pronoun οὗτοι in clause 29 does not signal a themechange because it is a reference back to the current theme τινες ἄνθρωποι Thiswould be similar to the use of a personal pronoun like ldquoherdquo He is a referentback to a governing term that has been established in most cases as is οὗτοι
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 51
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
Consider for example Mark 21ndash12 This stretch of text isone of many stories that comprise the biographical history (bios)that Mark writes about Jesus32 As such this text feeds into thegreater social goal of the gospel to articulate and to defend thesignificance of Jesus and perhaps more importantly tolegitimate the value system he embodies33 The particular kind ofstory Mark employs here is narrative34 Narratives are storiesthat aim at resolving some sort of complication Typically theyconsist of an orientation one or more complication one or moreevaluation and one or more resolution35 The discourse structureof Mark 21ndash12 follows this pattern (see appendix) Orientation(vv 1ndash2) ^ Complication1 (vv 3ndash4a) ^ Evaluation1 (v 4b) ^Resolution1 (temporary) (v 5) ^ Complication2 (vv 6ndash7) ^Evaluation2 (vv 8ndash9) ^ Resolution2 (final) (vv 10ndash12)36
The text of Jude is a letter so the structure of the text is inpart constrained by the conventions of letter writing of his daygreeting (vv 1ndash2) body (vv 3ndash23) and closing (vv 24ndash25)37
Jude identifies the social purpose of his letter as anadmonishment to struggle intensely for the faith (παρακαλῶνἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ πίστει [v 3]) Here are the basic stages Judeemploys in an effort to accomplish his task offer theencouragement proper (v 3) introduce participants to be
32 Cf deSilva Introduction to the New Testament 145ndash48 StantonGospel for a New People 69ndash70 Aune New Testament in Its LiteraryEnvironment 35 ldquoThe unconscious functions of Greco-Roman biographyinvolve the historical legitimation (or discrediting) of a social beliefvaluesystem personified in the subject of the biographyrdquo (italics added)
33 Cf deSilva Introduction 14734 Other story genres include recounts anecdotes exempla and
observations Cf Martin and Rose Genre Relations 44ff35 Martin and Rose Genre Relations 52 These are the basic
components that comprise a narrative Of course the number of thesecomponents and their order may vary depending on situational variables
36 The caret (^) in this sequence means ldquofollowed byrdquo On the basicstructure of different kinds of stories cf Martin and Rose Genre Relations49ndash98 (on narratives specifically see 67ndash74)
37 Cf Gabriel ldquoLettersrdquo 193ndash94
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 37
portrayed negatively (v 4) give a series of intertextualreferences to negative exempla (vv 5ndash16) give a series ofdirectives with additional negative evaluations of the antagonistsas foils for the positive commands (vv 17ndash23)
As these brief examples demonstrate discourse structure isnot merely the result of an authorrsquos stylistic flourishes thoughindeed an author may as a matter of style intentionallymanipulate or even flout structural norms Discourse structure ishowever largely governed by the strictures of a given cultureLanguage use becomes habitualized and is used to accomplishcertain social processes in certain ways that are deemedacceptable by those who are part of the culture
23 RegisterAs mentioned above the structure of a text is also constrained bythe register or more specific context of situation in which the textwas uttered The theory of register first developed by Halliday38
and further developed by Martin (whom we follow here)39 bothmodels context of situation and explains its relationship tolanguage
First register theory stratifies context and organizes it aroundthree contextual variables or features called field tenor andmode Briefly field refers to the sequences of activities that aregoing on in a situation as well as the people things placesqualities and circumstances that are associated with thoseactivities40 Tenor refers to the kind of social relations that areenacted and negotiated among the participants in a given
38 Cf Halliday Social Semiotic 110ndash11339 Cf Martin English Text 497ndash502 also Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres
and Registers of Discourserdquo 230ndash5640 Martin and Rose Genre Relations 14 Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal
Metafunctionrdquo 27ndash28
38 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
situation41 particularly the social relations of statuspower42 andsolidaritycontact43 Mode
is concerned with symbolic realitymdashwith texture Since symbolicreality (ie textprocess) has the function of constructing socialreality mode is oriented to both interpersonal and experientialmeaning It thus mediates the role played by language along twodimensions Interpersonally mode mediates the semiotic spacebetween monologue and dialogue Experientially mode mediatesthe semiotic space between action and reflection Putting this ingeneral terms mode mediates negotiation44
Second register theory describes the relationship betweenfield tenor and mode and discourse semantics It is described asa relationship of realization (also referred to as expression orcoding) in which in Hjelmslevian terms register is the contentplane for which discourse semantics is the expression plane45 Inthis regard field is realized as ideational meaning text as therepresentation of experience Here the goings-on participantsand circumstances of field are encoded into language primarilyas verbal groups nominal groups and adverbial or participialgroups respectively Tenor is realized as interpersonal meaningtext as interaction or exchange The enactments and negotiationsof the social relations in the situation are encoded into languageprimarily through the system of verbal attitude (ie assertive[indicative] projective [subjunctive] directive [imperative]expective [future]) Tenor is also realized through the system ofappraisal (ie attitude [affect judgment appreciation] andengagement [heterogloss monogloss]) Mode is realized astextual meaning text as a series of organized messages46 Here
41 Martin English Text 523ndash26 Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo28
42 Ie the relative position of the participants in the culturersquos socialhierarchy
43 Ie the degree of institutional involvement between participants inthe situation
44 Martin English Text 50945 Martin English Text 501ndash50246 Cf Halliday ldquoFunctions of Languagerdquo 24ndash26
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 39
the elements of ideational meaning and interpersonal meaningare ldquopackagedrdquo as it were into clauses in which some portion ofeach clause has special ldquothematicrdquo status and the remainder ofthe clause develops the theme and completes the message47
Looking again at Mark 2 generic constraints of narrative maycall for the story to open with an orientation (vv 1ndash2) butregister constrains the content of the orientation IdeationallyMark construes a world (a reality an experience) in this portionof the narrative in which the goings-on consist of the followingprocesses48
bull material processes gathering together (συνήχθησαν [v 2]) separating (χωρεῖν [v 2])49
bull a mental process hearing (ἠκούσθη [v 1])bull an existential process is (ἐστίν [v 1]) bull a verbal process speaking (ἐλάλει [v 2])
The following participants are portrayed
bull ldquoherdquo (presumably Jesus) as the one who is ldquoenteringrdquo Capernaum who ldquoisrdquo in the house and who ldquowas speakingrdquo the messagebull an assumed agent (the crowd) as the one by whom it ldquowas heardrdquo that he is in the housebull ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί) (also ldquothemrdquo [αὐτοῖς]) who had ldquogatheredrdquo and couldno longer ldquoseparaterdquo and to whom ldquoherdquo was speaking the messagebull Capernaum (Καφαρναούmicro)bull a house (οἴκῳ)bull the door of the house (θύραν)bull the message or word (λόγον)
Interpersonally the storyrsquos orientation is monoglossic beingdominated by assertive verbal attitude which is grammaticalizedby indicative verbal mood This enacts a relationship betweenMark and his presumed readers in which as storyteller Mark hashigher status than the readers because he is the one who
47 Cf Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 3748 On process types see Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar
108ff Cf also Tan ldquoTransitivityrdquo np49 The participle εἰσελθών technically constitutes the circumstance for
hearing (ἠκούσθη) and is thus not a main process Circumstances too are partof ideational meaning
40 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
apparently knows everything about the situation he describesThe readers on the other hand are situated as potentialacknowledgers of what Mark asserts Moreover that Mark hasopted to include this particular narrative in his gospel indicatesan appraisal from his perspective the readers need to be toldthis story Even just within the narrativersquos orientation phase (ieat the level of the narrative50) appraisal is evident For examplethe two clauses καὶ συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲτὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν (v 2) betoken a positive evaluation of Jesusrsquogrowing honor among the masses51
In terms of the textual strand of meaning the function inwhich we are most interested here the text unfolds in a series ofclauses and each of these clauses has a ldquoleaping off pointrdquo andtypically though not always some further development of thatpoint The major concern here is with how the author chooses toorder the components of the clause Yet even this choice isconstrained by the situation and the social purpose of both thetext as a whole and the stretch of text constituting the clause Forexample as noted Mark 21ndash2 make up the orientation portion ofthe narrative Mark has chosen to tell The first clause in theorientation is Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶνἠκούσθη Not surprisingly Markrsquos point of departure in thisclause is the adjunct52 ldquoAnd entering again into Capernaum rdquo
50 Cf ldquoThe Rhetorical Effects of Attituderdquo in Dvorak ldquoInterpersonalMetafunctionrdquo 54
51 That so many people were filling the house that there was not evenspace to get into or out of the house is a token of positive judgment with regardto social esteem (t +judgment esteem normality) Further the use of the termποltοί (many) coupled with the statement that there was no room in front of thedoor (microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν) increases the force of the judgment(both graduation force quantification mass and graduation forcequantification extent distribution) Cf Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo102 also Martin and White Language of Evaluation 150ndash51
52 Ie adverbialcircumstantial participial clause Adjunct refers to aword group or groups that modify the predicator (verb) in a clause to providecircumstances associated with the process (cf ldquoOpenTextorg AnnotationModelrdquo np)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 41
This demonstrates the ldquoenablingrdquo or ldquorelevancerdquo role of thetextual metafunction namely to ldquopackagerdquo ideational andinterpersonal meanings into clauses in a way that is both relevantto and communicatively effective in light of its purpose That ishere it orients the readers to the context of the narrative Thus itis how text is being used in a given context (ie mode) thatgoverns the textual meanings that are made (ie textualmetafunction) which in turn govern the arrangements of theclause components in the realization of each clause (informationflow)
24 SummaryWe demonstrated thus far that both discourse structure andinformation flow are not merely the result of stylistic choicesmade by language users Rather structure and flow are largelygoverned by two different levels of context namely genre andregister With regard to discourse structure people deploylanguage in ways that are staged and oriented to various socialgoals The ways in which these social goals may beaccomplished with language are governed by the language userrsquosculture the staging or structure of the discourse reflects thesecultural constraints Information flow is constrained to someextent by variations in genre and to a greater extent by registervariablesmdashand of these mostly by mode The textualmetafunction arranges ideational and interpersonal meanings inways that from the language userrsquos perspective are relevant toand most effective in reaching the communicative goal of theclause in relation to the larger purpose of the text
3 Prime and Subsequent Analysis
We argued above that the role of the textual metafunction was toorganize ideational and interpersonal content into clauses in away that is relevant and consistent with register and that createsa coherent message Here we provide a framework for modelingclauses as messages and a method for interpreting thosemessages
42 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
The message of a clause consists of two parts ldquothe elementwhich serves as the point of departure of the messagerdquo and ldquotheremainder of the messagerdquo53 Although Halliday referred to theseparts as theme and rheme respectively we follow Porter andOrsquoDonnell and use the terms prime and subsequent reservingtheme and rheme for the discussion of thematic elements at thelevel of clause complex (sentence) and multi-clause complexlevel (see ldquoTheme and Rheme Analysisrdquo below)54 In the modelwe present here prime refers to ldquowho or what the clause isfocused upon realized by the first [word] group element in theclause The subsequent is defined as the development of theprime and is realized in the remaining group elements in theclauserdquo55 The prime functions to orient the reader to the messageof the clause and the subsequent provides the news about theprime that the writer wants the readers to know to experience orto remember56
Every clause has a prime element and most also have asubsequent though it is possible for a clause to consist only of aprime57 The word group element (ie subject predicatorcomplement or adjunct)58 comprising the prime may be assimple as a single word (conjunctions are excluded) or it may bea complex nominal or verbal group or even an embeddedclause59 Subsequent consists of all other word group elementsfollowing the prime For example the initial clause in Mark 21ndash12 is analyzed for prime and subsequent as follows (see theappendix for a full prime and subsequent analysis of this unit)
53 Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 37 Cf Porter andOrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 90
54 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9155 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 91 (italics theirs)56 Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2057 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 92 Dvorak
ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2058 Cf OrsquoDonnell Porter Reed Picirilli Smith and Tan ldquoClause Level
Annotation Specificationrdquo n p59 Cf Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 20
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 43
Prime SubsequentA [[P εἰσελθὼν |A πάλιν |A εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro |A δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ]] P ἠκούσθη
Markrsquos point of departure in this clause is an adjunct consistingof an embedded participial clause that realizes a temporalcontext for interpreting or understanding the subsequent whichconsists of the predicator (main verb)
The following clause from Mark 23 raises a crucial pointnamely that prime and subsequent analysis must be performedon the Greek text and not on a translation
Prime SubsequentP ἔρχονται A [[P φέροντες |A πρὸς αὐτὸν |C παραλυτικὸν [[P αἰρόmicroενον |A ὑπὸ
τεσσάρων ]] ]]
The prime of this clause is the predicator or verbal group InGreek finite verbs are monolectic which means theygrammaticalize person as part of their form through the use ofpersonal endings60 Thus it is not necessary for users of Greek tospecify explicitly a subject in a clause In fact the defaultunmarked option in biblical Greek is not to specify a subject61
However in many other languages like English for example thedefault unmarked option is to specify a subject This means ifprime and subsequent analysis is performed on an Englishtranslation it would label prime incorrectly In this particularinstance based on the English gloss ldquoThey comeare comingbringing to him a paralytic being carried by fourrdquo the primewould be ldquotheyrdquo However the actual prime is the processldquocomeare comingrdquo Thus Mark chose to begin with the material
60 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 71 Porter and OrsquoDonnell (DiscourseAnalysis 93) note that this gives the writer of Greek the flexibility to ldquo(1) notspecify a specific subject (2) specify the subject but not place it inprimary position or (3) specify the subject and place it in primary positionin the clause rdquo
61 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 93 n 148
44 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
process and to further develop it with circumstantial informationprovided by an embedded participial clause
It is often assumed that items in prime position are prominentsimply because they occupy prime position in the clause but thisis not the de facto case Determining prominence requiresconsideration of other factors including analyses of clauserealization patterns across the corpus of text written by the sameauthor (eg the Pauline epistles)62 as well as the entire NewTestament corpus and other factors such as literary genre Also tobe accounted for are features of markedness grounding andsalience63 Further research in this area is needed but it may befor example that because predicators fill prime position themajority of times across the New Testament saying that apredicator is prominent simply because it occupies primeposition in the clause would be to say too much64 That said theorder of word groups within a clause is indeed a factor indetermining prominence65
4 Theme and Rheme Analysis
Porter and OrsquoDonnell reserve the terms theme and rheme foridentifying and discussing the ldquothematic elements at the sentenceand multi-sentence levelrdquo66 This means the focus of our textualanalysis now shifts to the level above the clause When exploringtheme and rheme analysis it is important to define the terms
62 Cf Tan ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo 95ndash11063 Cf Westfall ldquoAnalysis of Prominence in Hellenistic Greekrdquo 75ndash9464 Dvorakrsquos analysis of the entire New Testament revealed that across
the entire New Testament predicators were prime 7227 times adjuncts 5767times subjects 5354 times and complements 2634 times Cf DvorakldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 25ndash26 Cf also Porter(ldquoProminencerdquo 71) who discusses patterns of order of first and second clausecomponents
65 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 67ndash6966 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 45
clearly to delineate the steps in analysis and to stress a numberof the important advantages to such an analysis
To begin one must have an understanding of the term processchain A process is any verbal action implied or inscribedwithin a clause a process chain refers to a string of verbalprocesses that form a series across a stretch of text67 This chainof processes is ascribed to a particular actor(s) who is said to bethe thematic actor Of course other participants and their actionsmay be interspersed in the same stretch of text but these do notnecessarily break the process chain associated with the thematicactor An easy example in English is as follows
Bobby went to the store There he was greeted by a clerk and thensearched for a loaf of bread When he found it however he decidedthat it was too expensive so he put it back on the shelf However anolder woman standing nearby decided she would take it Bobby thenleft the store and travelled to the Shop-For-Less down the road wherehe purchased the bread for a less expensive price
All of the verbs in this anecdote form a process chain andBobby is the primary participant Bobby went searched founddecided put left travelled and purchased Notice as well thatthe additional processes performed by the clerk and the olderwoman do not break the chain as it follows Bobby for theiractions are clearly secondary information and reactionarythroughout Bobbyrsquos story
This story provides an excellent segue to the notion of themeTheme in narrative is best seen through the transition and changeof a participant as a primary actor in a process chainmdashwhat isusually called the thematic actor68 In other words a theme is thetransition from one thematic actor to another or a change inparticipant involvement that breaks a process chain That beingsaid the thematic actor must be an explicit subject meaning thatthe actor cannot merely be implied from a verb This does notmean however that the thematic actor must be prime or evenarticulated Indeed the thematic actor can be anarthrous or
67 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9868 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
46 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
articulated prime or subsequent Provided the thematic actor isarticulated this actor can be said to be more emphatic Moreemphatic still is when the thematic actor also occupies the primeposition in the clause69 Such a theme is said to be marked andshould be noted as a potential boundary marker for a shift indiscourse topic which will be discussed more thoroughly below
Interestingly enough the thematic actor can actually bepassive which suggests that more refined language is needed infuture formulations of theme and rheme analyses The followingbrief narrative concerning a shirt demonstrates the shortcomingsof ldquoactorrdquo language
Cindyrsquos shirt was stained by an ice cream cone The shirt then had tobe tossed into the washing machine which soaked it for twentyminutes The shirt then was brought out of the wash and was placedinto the dryer for a sixty-minute tumble Finally the shirt wasremoved by Cindy and hung on the drying rack
Clearly the narrative is about the shirt It is the theme of the taleeven though it is not truly an actor in any instance Perhaps thelanguage of ldquoprimary participantrdquo could be more helpful and lessmisleading
Moving onto clausal considerations the thematic participantmust be in a primary clause or on clause level α in the OpenText model70 Any participant found in a secondary clause hasbeen rank-shifted down to level β and therefore plays asubordinate role to the circumstances of the primary clauseObviously then a subordinated participant cannot serve as theprimary participant
Lastly one must consider the concept of rhememdashtheadditional information regarding the current thematicparticipant71 which is also understood as the extensivecircumstantial information involved in a process chain Considerthe story of a young elf
69 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98-9970 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10371 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 47
Sissy was out late one night at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that shewould not be able to return to the hovel before the werewolves cameout for the night she decided to employ her cunning Acting quicklyshe pulled leaves and twigs off of a few nearby oaks and began toconstruct a glider She then climbed atop the tallest tree at her friendsrsquoden and sets sail for home landing safely at her hovel just as sheheard the first howl of the dark night She was safe safe indeed
In the preceding story all of the details concerning her activitiesthe building gliding landing and so on all serve as rhematicmaterial to fill out the picture of the text It is clear that thissection of text is about Sissy since she is the primary participantThe rheme is what allows the reader to know that the story istruly about not only Sissy but also her quick wit and her returnvoyage home
Briefly it is worth noting that following the application ofboth prime and subsequent analysis and theme and rhemeanalysis the two analyses may be cross examined for additionaland enlightening findings For example should a prime in aclause also be a theme then the theme is considered markedmeaning that the author chose to launch his clause with thetheme change72 This reflects the nature of language in that thespeaker has to make a choice regarding how to start a clauseSince language is necessarily syntagmatic and paradigmaticmdashlinear and oppositionalmdashonly one thing can be said at a timeTherefore the first chosen words that come out of the mouthmust be considered significant especially in the language ofGreek where word order is significantly more malleable than inEnglish although it is important to note that a linguistic choice isnot always conscious
To grasp how the idea of prime and theme work together hereis a small reiteration of Sissyrsquos story ldquoSissy was out late onenight at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that she would not be ableto return to the hovel before the werewolves came out for thenight she decided to employ her cunningrdquo Notice how the firstclause begins with ldquoSissyrdquo as both the prime and the thematic
72 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 100-101
48 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
participant There is no question as to whom the story pertainsHowever the prime in the following sentence is actually aparticiple adjunct material which sets the stage for the problemin the text Thus the kernel of truth from these first twosentences is that Sissy realizes she has a problem Without thecoupling of prime and theme such a realization could very wellbe missed by a casual reader or interpreter leading to amisunderstanding of character prominence73 The true beauty ofthese analyses therefore can be seen in the fact that they causethe analyst to slow down and appreciate the rhetoric within thetext itself
The importance of theme and rheme analysis cannot beunderstated for it is key in determining exactly what the authoris trying to communicate in a given pericope The thematic actorin a given process chain is the governing character in a multi-sentence portion of the text All of the information that iscircumstantial to the theme is the rheme and should be treated asadding additional information to the theme If one were toconfuse this then one would be in danger of putting words in theauthorrsquos mouth and mirror reading into the text Thereforetheme and rheme analysis is critical to providing the clearestpossible picture of a textrsquos message the bits of the text that theauthor considers most important which leads to the best possibleapplications for daily living
There are only two thematic units in Mark 21ndash12 (cf theappendix for a full theme-rheme analysis) The first thematic unitconsists of verses 1ndash5 In this unit the only explicit subject of aprocess chain that occurs in a primary clause is ποltοί (v 2)Mark has not chosen the most heavily marked theme optionsince ποltοί does not also occupy prime position in the clauseAlthough ὁ παραλυτικός occurs in the subject slot of clause 16 (v4) it occurs in a dependent clause thus it does not constitute athematic shift Ὁ Ἰησοῦς occurs in v 5 but it is part of asecondary embedded participial clause that serves as an adjunctin the primary clause and is therefore not a thematic shift The
73 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 104-105
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 49
only remaining possibility is αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι in clause 19 (v 5)however although it is subject in a primary clause it belongs toa stretch of reported speech and is thus not a thematic shift Thenext thematic unit begins at clause 20 (v 6) with τινες τῶνγραmicromicroατέων (not marked) and extends all the way through to theend of the unit (v 12) Again a number of other subjects occur inthe subsequent clauses but as in the first unit none of themqualifies as a thematic shift because either they occur as part ofreported speech or secondary clauses (embedded or standalone)
There are only a couple thematic units in Jude A few of thesewill be examined below to demonstrate what has been writtenabove The first of these examples comes from clause twelve
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸκρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειανκαὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
Here we have an example of an unmarked theme for thetheme is not prime in the clause Τινες ἄνθρωποι is the primaryparticipant of this clause The rest of the material is rhematic inthat it is giving additional information about these ldquocertainpeoplerdquo The most significant of the rhematic material here is theprocess associated with the subject on the primary clause levelThis process is παρεισέδυσαν essentially meaning that thesepeople have snuck in among them There are other processeshowever involved that are related back to the theme here whichform a process chain when taken together Some of thesepredicators are participles which associate variouscircumstantial bits with the theme provided Other verbs found inclauses 29ndash32 are also on the primary level which at leastinclude microιαίνουσιν ἀθετοῦσιν and βλασφηmicroοῦσιν Each of theseverbs is intensely negative in nature which supports theassertion that the author genuinely does not approve of theseindividuals at all
Now one might assert that these verbs should be rhematic forother subjects since there are indeed other subjects that theseverbs predicate However there is no explicit subject on theprimary clause level that signals a change in theme after τινες
50 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
ἄνθρωποι until Μιχαὴλ74 Since this is the case it cannot be saidthat any of these intermediate participants is thematic Thesecondary clauses embedded or otherwise cannot carry enoughweight to be thematic since they are additional information usedto support the primary material they follow
The second example comes from clause 40 Οὗτοι δὲ ὅσα microὲνοὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν In this example the theme is markedmeaning that the primary participant is also in the primeposition Since the author chose to present this theme as markedit likely has extra weight In this instance the marked theme isactually a reference back to the theme in clause twelve whichserves as the topic of the entire discourse Thus it is likely thatthe theme is marked as the author tries to reorient his audiencetoward himself as opposed to his adversaries
The final example comes from clause 67 καὶ τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶνλαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν In thisexample the subject is articulated and prime which makes thisan especially marked theme When the subject comes at thebeginning of the clause the subject is the leaping off point of theclause the first bit of information that flows out of the speakerOn top of all of this the author took the time to articulate thetheme which is not necessarily required in Greek All of theseelements work together to draw attention to the subject in subtleyet important ways It is possible that this theme is so marked asthe author wants to draw attention to the wicked speech thatspills forth from the mouths of τινες ἄνθρωποιmdashspeech to whichthe author clearly does not want his audience listening
5 Topic and Comment Analysis
Topic and comment analysis functions at the highest level ofdiscourse This level includes the clause complex paragraph and
74 The demonstrative pronoun οὗτοι in clause 29 does not signal a themechange because it is a reference back to the current theme τινες ἄνθρωποι Thiswould be similar to the use of a personal pronoun like ldquoherdquo He is a referentback to a governing term that has been established in most cases as is οὗτοι
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 51
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
portrayed negatively (v 4) give a series of intertextualreferences to negative exempla (vv 5ndash16) give a series ofdirectives with additional negative evaluations of the antagonistsas foils for the positive commands (vv 17ndash23)
As these brief examples demonstrate discourse structure isnot merely the result of an authorrsquos stylistic flourishes thoughindeed an author may as a matter of style intentionallymanipulate or even flout structural norms Discourse structure ishowever largely governed by the strictures of a given cultureLanguage use becomes habitualized and is used to accomplishcertain social processes in certain ways that are deemedacceptable by those who are part of the culture
23 RegisterAs mentioned above the structure of a text is also constrained bythe register or more specific context of situation in which the textwas uttered The theory of register first developed by Halliday38
and further developed by Martin (whom we follow here)39 bothmodels context of situation and explains its relationship tolanguage
First register theory stratifies context and organizes it aroundthree contextual variables or features called field tenor andmode Briefly field refers to the sequences of activities that aregoing on in a situation as well as the people things placesqualities and circumstances that are associated with thoseactivities40 Tenor refers to the kind of social relations that areenacted and negotiated among the participants in a given
38 Cf Halliday Social Semiotic 110ndash11339 Cf Martin English Text 497ndash502 also Eggins and Martin ldquoGenres
and Registers of Discourserdquo 230ndash5640 Martin and Rose Genre Relations 14 Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal
Metafunctionrdquo 27ndash28
38 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
situation41 particularly the social relations of statuspower42 andsolidaritycontact43 Mode
is concerned with symbolic realitymdashwith texture Since symbolicreality (ie textprocess) has the function of constructing socialreality mode is oriented to both interpersonal and experientialmeaning It thus mediates the role played by language along twodimensions Interpersonally mode mediates the semiotic spacebetween monologue and dialogue Experientially mode mediatesthe semiotic space between action and reflection Putting this ingeneral terms mode mediates negotiation44
Second register theory describes the relationship betweenfield tenor and mode and discourse semantics It is described asa relationship of realization (also referred to as expression orcoding) in which in Hjelmslevian terms register is the contentplane for which discourse semantics is the expression plane45 Inthis regard field is realized as ideational meaning text as therepresentation of experience Here the goings-on participantsand circumstances of field are encoded into language primarilyas verbal groups nominal groups and adverbial or participialgroups respectively Tenor is realized as interpersonal meaningtext as interaction or exchange The enactments and negotiationsof the social relations in the situation are encoded into languageprimarily through the system of verbal attitude (ie assertive[indicative] projective [subjunctive] directive [imperative]expective [future]) Tenor is also realized through the system ofappraisal (ie attitude [affect judgment appreciation] andengagement [heterogloss monogloss]) Mode is realized astextual meaning text as a series of organized messages46 Here
41 Martin English Text 523ndash26 Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo28
42 Ie the relative position of the participants in the culturersquos socialhierarchy
43 Ie the degree of institutional involvement between participants inthe situation
44 Martin English Text 50945 Martin English Text 501ndash50246 Cf Halliday ldquoFunctions of Languagerdquo 24ndash26
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 39
the elements of ideational meaning and interpersonal meaningare ldquopackagedrdquo as it were into clauses in which some portion ofeach clause has special ldquothematicrdquo status and the remainder ofthe clause develops the theme and completes the message47
Looking again at Mark 2 generic constraints of narrative maycall for the story to open with an orientation (vv 1ndash2) butregister constrains the content of the orientation IdeationallyMark construes a world (a reality an experience) in this portionof the narrative in which the goings-on consist of the followingprocesses48
bull material processes gathering together (συνήχθησαν [v 2]) separating (χωρεῖν [v 2])49
bull a mental process hearing (ἠκούσθη [v 1])bull an existential process is (ἐστίν [v 1]) bull a verbal process speaking (ἐλάλει [v 2])
The following participants are portrayed
bull ldquoherdquo (presumably Jesus) as the one who is ldquoenteringrdquo Capernaum who ldquoisrdquo in the house and who ldquowas speakingrdquo the messagebull an assumed agent (the crowd) as the one by whom it ldquowas heardrdquo that he is in the housebull ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί) (also ldquothemrdquo [αὐτοῖς]) who had ldquogatheredrdquo and couldno longer ldquoseparaterdquo and to whom ldquoherdquo was speaking the messagebull Capernaum (Καφαρναούmicro)bull a house (οἴκῳ)bull the door of the house (θύραν)bull the message or word (λόγον)
Interpersonally the storyrsquos orientation is monoglossic beingdominated by assertive verbal attitude which is grammaticalizedby indicative verbal mood This enacts a relationship betweenMark and his presumed readers in which as storyteller Mark hashigher status than the readers because he is the one who
47 Cf Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 3748 On process types see Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar
108ff Cf also Tan ldquoTransitivityrdquo np49 The participle εἰσελθών technically constitutes the circumstance for
hearing (ἠκούσθη) and is thus not a main process Circumstances too are partof ideational meaning
40 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
apparently knows everything about the situation he describesThe readers on the other hand are situated as potentialacknowledgers of what Mark asserts Moreover that Mark hasopted to include this particular narrative in his gospel indicatesan appraisal from his perspective the readers need to be toldthis story Even just within the narrativersquos orientation phase (ieat the level of the narrative50) appraisal is evident For examplethe two clauses καὶ συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲτὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν (v 2) betoken a positive evaluation of Jesusrsquogrowing honor among the masses51
In terms of the textual strand of meaning the function inwhich we are most interested here the text unfolds in a series ofclauses and each of these clauses has a ldquoleaping off pointrdquo andtypically though not always some further development of thatpoint The major concern here is with how the author chooses toorder the components of the clause Yet even this choice isconstrained by the situation and the social purpose of both thetext as a whole and the stretch of text constituting the clause Forexample as noted Mark 21ndash2 make up the orientation portion ofthe narrative Mark has chosen to tell The first clause in theorientation is Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶνἠκούσθη Not surprisingly Markrsquos point of departure in thisclause is the adjunct52 ldquoAnd entering again into Capernaum rdquo
50 Cf ldquoThe Rhetorical Effects of Attituderdquo in Dvorak ldquoInterpersonalMetafunctionrdquo 54
51 That so many people were filling the house that there was not evenspace to get into or out of the house is a token of positive judgment with regardto social esteem (t +judgment esteem normality) Further the use of the termποltοί (many) coupled with the statement that there was no room in front of thedoor (microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν) increases the force of the judgment(both graduation force quantification mass and graduation forcequantification extent distribution) Cf Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo102 also Martin and White Language of Evaluation 150ndash51
52 Ie adverbialcircumstantial participial clause Adjunct refers to aword group or groups that modify the predicator (verb) in a clause to providecircumstances associated with the process (cf ldquoOpenTextorg AnnotationModelrdquo np)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 41
This demonstrates the ldquoenablingrdquo or ldquorelevancerdquo role of thetextual metafunction namely to ldquopackagerdquo ideational andinterpersonal meanings into clauses in a way that is both relevantto and communicatively effective in light of its purpose That ishere it orients the readers to the context of the narrative Thus itis how text is being used in a given context (ie mode) thatgoverns the textual meanings that are made (ie textualmetafunction) which in turn govern the arrangements of theclause components in the realization of each clause (informationflow)
24 SummaryWe demonstrated thus far that both discourse structure andinformation flow are not merely the result of stylistic choicesmade by language users Rather structure and flow are largelygoverned by two different levels of context namely genre andregister With regard to discourse structure people deploylanguage in ways that are staged and oriented to various socialgoals The ways in which these social goals may beaccomplished with language are governed by the language userrsquosculture the staging or structure of the discourse reflects thesecultural constraints Information flow is constrained to someextent by variations in genre and to a greater extent by registervariablesmdashand of these mostly by mode The textualmetafunction arranges ideational and interpersonal meanings inways that from the language userrsquos perspective are relevant toand most effective in reaching the communicative goal of theclause in relation to the larger purpose of the text
3 Prime and Subsequent Analysis
We argued above that the role of the textual metafunction was toorganize ideational and interpersonal content into clauses in away that is relevant and consistent with register and that createsa coherent message Here we provide a framework for modelingclauses as messages and a method for interpreting thosemessages
42 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
The message of a clause consists of two parts ldquothe elementwhich serves as the point of departure of the messagerdquo and ldquotheremainder of the messagerdquo53 Although Halliday referred to theseparts as theme and rheme respectively we follow Porter andOrsquoDonnell and use the terms prime and subsequent reservingtheme and rheme for the discussion of thematic elements at thelevel of clause complex (sentence) and multi-clause complexlevel (see ldquoTheme and Rheme Analysisrdquo below)54 In the modelwe present here prime refers to ldquowho or what the clause isfocused upon realized by the first [word] group element in theclause The subsequent is defined as the development of theprime and is realized in the remaining group elements in theclauserdquo55 The prime functions to orient the reader to the messageof the clause and the subsequent provides the news about theprime that the writer wants the readers to know to experience orto remember56
Every clause has a prime element and most also have asubsequent though it is possible for a clause to consist only of aprime57 The word group element (ie subject predicatorcomplement or adjunct)58 comprising the prime may be assimple as a single word (conjunctions are excluded) or it may bea complex nominal or verbal group or even an embeddedclause59 Subsequent consists of all other word group elementsfollowing the prime For example the initial clause in Mark 21ndash12 is analyzed for prime and subsequent as follows (see theappendix for a full prime and subsequent analysis of this unit)
53 Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 37 Cf Porter andOrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 90
54 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9155 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 91 (italics theirs)56 Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2057 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 92 Dvorak
ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2058 Cf OrsquoDonnell Porter Reed Picirilli Smith and Tan ldquoClause Level
Annotation Specificationrdquo n p59 Cf Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 20
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 43
Prime SubsequentA [[P εἰσελθὼν |A πάλιν |A εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro |A δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ]] P ἠκούσθη
Markrsquos point of departure in this clause is an adjunct consistingof an embedded participial clause that realizes a temporalcontext for interpreting or understanding the subsequent whichconsists of the predicator (main verb)
The following clause from Mark 23 raises a crucial pointnamely that prime and subsequent analysis must be performedon the Greek text and not on a translation
Prime SubsequentP ἔρχονται A [[P φέροντες |A πρὸς αὐτὸν |C παραλυτικὸν [[P αἰρόmicroενον |A ὑπὸ
τεσσάρων ]] ]]
The prime of this clause is the predicator or verbal group InGreek finite verbs are monolectic which means theygrammaticalize person as part of their form through the use ofpersonal endings60 Thus it is not necessary for users of Greek tospecify explicitly a subject in a clause In fact the defaultunmarked option in biblical Greek is not to specify a subject61
However in many other languages like English for example thedefault unmarked option is to specify a subject This means ifprime and subsequent analysis is performed on an Englishtranslation it would label prime incorrectly In this particularinstance based on the English gloss ldquoThey comeare comingbringing to him a paralytic being carried by fourrdquo the primewould be ldquotheyrdquo However the actual prime is the processldquocomeare comingrdquo Thus Mark chose to begin with the material
60 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 71 Porter and OrsquoDonnell (DiscourseAnalysis 93) note that this gives the writer of Greek the flexibility to ldquo(1) notspecify a specific subject (2) specify the subject but not place it inprimary position or (3) specify the subject and place it in primary positionin the clause rdquo
61 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 93 n 148
44 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
process and to further develop it with circumstantial informationprovided by an embedded participial clause
It is often assumed that items in prime position are prominentsimply because they occupy prime position in the clause but thisis not the de facto case Determining prominence requiresconsideration of other factors including analyses of clauserealization patterns across the corpus of text written by the sameauthor (eg the Pauline epistles)62 as well as the entire NewTestament corpus and other factors such as literary genre Also tobe accounted for are features of markedness grounding andsalience63 Further research in this area is needed but it may befor example that because predicators fill prime position themajority of times across the New Testament saying that apredicator is prominent simply because it occupies primeposition in the clause would be to say too much64 That said theorder of word groups within a clause is indeed a factor indetermining prominence65
4 Theme and Rheme Analysis
Porter and OrsquoDonnell reserve the terms theme and rheme foridentifying and discussing the ldquothematic elements at the sentenceand multi-sentence levelrdquo66 This means the focus of our textualanalysis now shifts to the level above the clause When exploringtheme and rheme analysis it is important to define the terms
62 Cf Tan ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo 95ndash11063 Cf Westfall ldquoAnalysis of Prominence in Hellenistic Greekrdquo 75ndash9464 Dvorakrsquos analysis of the entire New Testament revealed that across
the entire New Testament predicators were prime 7227 times adjuncts 5767times subjects 5354 times and complements 2634 times Cf DvorakldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 25ndash26 Cf also Porter(ldquoProminencerdquo 71) who discusses patterns of order of first and second clausecomponents
65 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 67ndash6966 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 45
clearly to delineate the steps in analysis and to stress a numberof the important advantages to such an analysis
To begin one must have an understanding of the term processchain A process is any verbal action implied or inscribedwithin a clause a process chain refers to a string of verbalprocesses that form a series across a stretch of text67 This chainof processes is ascribed to a particular actor(s) who is said to bethe thematic actor Of course other participants and their actionsmay be interspersed in the same stretch of text but these do notnecessarily break the process chain associated with the thematicactor An easy example in English is as follows
Bobby went to the store There he was greeted by a clerk and thensearched for a loaf of bread When he found it however he decidedthat it was too expensive so he put it back on the shelf However anolder woman standing nearby decided she would take it Bobby thenleft the store and travelled to the Shop-For-Less down the road wherehe purchased the bread for a less expensive price
All of the verbs in this anecdote form a process chain andBobby is the primary participant Bobby went searched founddecided put left travelled and purchased Notice as well thatthe additional processes performed by the clerk and the olderwoman do not break the chain as it follows Bobby for theiractions are clearly secondary information and reactionarythroughout Bobbyrsquos story
This story provides an excellent segue to the notion of themeTheme in narrative is best seen through the transition and changeof a participant as a primary actor in a process chainmdashwhat isusually called the thematic actor68 In other words a theme is thetransition from one thematic actor to another or a change inparticipant involvement that breaks a process chain That beingsaid the thematic actor must be an explicit subject meaning thatthe actor cannot merely be implied from a verb This does notmean however that the thematic actor must be prime or evenarticulated Indeed the thematic actor can be anarthrous or
67 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9868 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
46 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
articulated prime or subsequent Provided the thematic actor isarticulated this actor can be said to be more emphatic Moreemphatic still is when the thematic actor also occupies the primeposition in the clause69 Such a theme is said to be marked andshould be noted as a potential boundary marker for a shift indiscourse topic which will be discussed more thoroughly below
Interestingly enough the thematic actor can actually bepassive which suggests that more refined language is needed infuture formulations of theme and rheme analyses The followingbrief narrative concerning a shirt demonstrates the shortcomingsof ldquoactorrdquo language
Cindyrsquos shirt was stained by an ice cream cone The shirt then had tobe tossed into the washing machine which soaked it for twentyminutes The shirt then was brought out of the wash and was placedinto the dryer for a sixty-minute tumble Finally the shirt wasremoved by Cindy and hung on the drying rack
Clearly the narrative is about the shirt It is the theme of the taleeven though it is not truly an actor in any instance Perhaps thelanguage of ldquoprimary participantrdquo could be more helpful and lessmisleading
Moving onto clausal considerations the thematic participantmust be in a primary clause or on clause level α in the OpenText model70 Any participant found in a secondary clause hasbeen rank-shifted down to level β and therefore plays asubordinate role to the circumstances of the primary clauseObviously then a subordinated participant cannot serve as theprimary participant
Lastly one must consider the concept of rhememdashtheadditional information regarding the current thematicparticipant71 which is also understood as the extensivecircumstantial information involved in a process chain Considerthe story of a young elf
69 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98-9970 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10371 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 47
Sissy was out late one night at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that shewould not be able to return to the hovel before the werewolves cameout for the night she decided to employ her cunning Acting quicklyshe pulled leaves and twigs off of a few nearby oaks and began toconstruct a glider She then climbed atop the tallest tree at her friendsrsquoden and sets sail for home landing safely at her hovel just as sheheard the first howl of the dark night She was safe safe indeed
In the preceding story all of the details concerning her activitiesthe building gliding landing and so on all serve as rhematicmaterial to fill out the picture of the text It is clear that thissection of text is about Sissy since she is the primary participantThe rheme is what allows the reader to know that the story istruly about not only Sissy but also her quick wit and her returnvoyage home
Briefly it is worth noting that following the application ofboth prime and subsequent analysis and theme and rhemeanalysis the two analyses may be cross examined for additionaland enlightening findings For example should a prime in aclause also be a theme then the theme is considered markedmeaning that the author chose to launch his clause with thetheme change72 This reflects the nature of language in that thespeaker has to make a choice regarding how to start a clauseSince language is necessarily syntagmatic and paradigmaticmdashlinear and oppositionalmdashonly one thing can be said at a timeTherefore the first chosen words that come out of the mouthmust be considered significant especially in the language ofGreek where word order is significantly more malleable than inEnglish although it is important to note that a linguistic choice isnot always conscious
To grasp how the idea of prime and theme work together hereis a small reiteration of Sissyrsquos story ldquoSissy was out late onenight at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that she would not be ableto return to the hovel before the werewolves came out for thenight she decided to employ her cunningrdquo Notice how the firstclause begins with ldquoSissyrdquo as both the prime and the thematic
72 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 100-101
48 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
participant There is no question as to whom the story pertainsHowever the prime in the following sentence is actually aparticiple adjunct material which sets the stage for the problemin the text Thus the kernel of truth from these first twosentences is that Sissy realizes she has a problem Without thecoupling of prime and theme such a realization could very wellbe missed by a casual reader or interpreter leading to amisunderstanding of character prominence73 The true beauty ofthese analyses therefore can be seen in the fact that they causethe analyst to slow down and appreciate the rhetoric within thetext itself
The importance of theme and rheme analysis cannot beunderstated for it is key in determining exactly what the authoris trying to communicate in a given pericope The thematic actorin a given process chain is the governing character in a multi-sentence portion of the text All of the information that iscircumstantial to the theme is the rheme and should be treated asadding additional information to the theme If one were toconfuse this then one would be in danger of putting words in theauthorrsquos mouth and mirror reading into the text Thereforetheme and rheme analysis is critical to providing the clearestpossible picture of a textrsquos message the bits of the text that theauthor considers most important which leads to the best possibleapplications for daily living
There are only two thematic units in Mark 21ndash12 (cf theappendix for a full theme-rheme analysis) The first thematic unitconsists of verses 1ndash5 In this unit the only explicit subject of aprocess chain that occurs in a primary clause is ποltοί (v 2)Mark has not chosen the most heavily marked theme optionsince ποltοί does not also occupy prime position in the clauseAlthough ὁ παραλυτικός occurs in the subject slot of clause 16 (v4) it occurs in a dependent clause thus it does not constitute athematic shift Ὁ Ἰησοῦς occurs in v 5 but it is part of asecondary embedded participial clause that serves as an adjunctin the primary clause and is therefore not a thematic shift The
73 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 104-105
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 49
only remaining possibility is αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι in clause 19 (v 5)however although it is subject in a primary clause it belongs toa stretch of reported speech and is thus not a thematic shift Thenext thematic unit begins at clause 20 (v 6) with τινες τῶνγραmicromicroατέων (not marked) and extends all the way through to theend of the unit (v 12) Again a number of other subjects occur inthe subsequent clauses but as in the first unit none of themqualifies as a thematic shift because either they occur as part ofreported speech or secondary clauses (embedded or standalone)
There are only a couple thematic units in Jude A few of thesewill be examined below to demonstrate what has been writtenabove The first of these examples comes from clause twelve
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸκρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειανκαὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
Here we have an example of an unmarked theme for thetheme is not prime in the clause Τινες ἄνθρωποι is the primaryparticipant of this clause The rest of the material is rhematic inthat it is giving additional information about these ldquocertainpeoplerdquo The most significant of the rhematic material here is theprocess associated with the subject on the primary clause levelThis process is παρεισέδυσαν essentially meaning that thesepeople have snuck in among them There are other processeshowever involved that are related back to the theme here whichform a process chain when taken together Some of thesepredicators are participles which associate variouscircumstantial bits with the theme provided Other verbs found inclauses 29ndash32 are also on the primary level which at leastinclude microιαίνουσιν ἀθετοῦσιν and βλασφηmicroοῦσιν Each of theseverbs is intensely negative in nature which supports theassertion that the author genuinely does not approve of theseindividuals at all
Now one might assert that these verbs should be rhematic forother subjects since there are indeed other subjects that theseverbs predicate However there is no explicit subject on theprimary clause level that signals a change in theme after τινες
50 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
ἄνθρωποι until Μιχαὴλ74 Since this is the case it cannot be saidthat any of these intermediate participants is thematic Thesecondary clauses embedded or otherwise cannot carry enoughweight to be thematic since they are additional information usedto support the primary material they follow
The second example comes from clause 40 Οὗτοι δὲ ὅσα microὲνοὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν In this example the theme is markedmeaning that the primary participant is also in the primeposition Since the author chose to present this theme as markedit likely has extra weight In this instance the marked theme isactually a reference back to the theme in clause twelve whichserves as the topic of the entire discourse Thus it is likely thatthe theme is marked as the author tries to reorient his audiencetoward himself as opposed to his adversaries
The final example comes from clause 67 καὶ τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶνλαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν In thisexample the subject is articulated and prime which makes thisan especially marked theme When the subject comes at thebeginning of the clause the subject is the leaping off point of theclause the first bit of information that flows out of the speakerOn top of all of this the author took the time to articulate thetheme which is not necessarily required in Greek All of theseelements work together to draw attention to the subject in subtleyet important ways It is possible that this theme is so marked asthe author wants to draw attention to the wicked speech thatspills forth from the mouths of τινες ἄνθρωποιmdashspeech to whichthe author clearly does not want his audience listening
5 Topic and Comment Analysis
Topic and comment analysis functions at the highest level ofdiscourse This level includes the clause complex paragraph and
74 The demonstrative pronoun οὗτοι in clause 29 does not signal a themechange because it is a reference back to the current theme τινες ἄνθρωποι Thiswould be similar to the use of a personal pronoun like ldquoherdquo He is a referentback to a governing term that has been established in most cases as is οὗτοι
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 51
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
situation41 particularly the social relations of statuspower42 andsolidaritycontact43 Mode
is concerned with symbolic realitymdashwith texture Since symbolicreality (ie textprocess) has the function of constructing socialreality mode is oriented to both interpersonal and experientialmeaning It thus mediates the role played by language along twodimensions Interpersonally mode mediates the semiotic spacebetween monologue and dialogue Experientially mode mediatesthe semiotic space between action and reflection Putting this ingeneral terms mode mediates negotiation44
Second register theory describes the relationship betweenfield tenor and mode and discourse semantics It is described asa relationship of realization (also referred to as expression orcoding) in which in Hjelmslevian terms register is the contentplane for which discourse semantics is the expression plane45 Inthis regard field is realized as ideational meaning text as therepresentation of experience Here the goings-on participantsand circumstances of field are encoded into language primarilyas verbal groups nominal groups and adverbial or participialgroups respectively Tenor is realized as interpersonal meaningtext as interaction or exchange The enactments and negotiationsof the social relations in the situation are encoded into languageprimarily through the system of verbal attitude (ie assertive[indicative] projective [subjunctive] directive [imperative]expective [future]) Tenor is also realized through the system ofappraisal (ie attitude [affect judgment appreciation] andengagement [heterogloss monogloss]) Mode is realized astextual meaning text as a series of organized messages46 Here
41 Martin English Text 523ndash26 Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo28
42 Ie the relative position of the participants in the culturersquos socialhierarchy
43 Ie the degree of institutional involvement between participants inthe situation
44 Martin English Text 50945 Martin English Text 501ndash50246 Cf Halliday ldquoFunctions of Languagerdquo 24ndash26
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 39
the elements of ideational meaning and interpersonal meaningare ldquopackagedrdquo as it were into clauses in which some portion ofeach clause has special ldquothematicrdquo status and the remainder ofthe clause develops the theme and completes the message47
Looking again at Mark 2 generic constraints of narrative maycall for the story to open with an orientation (vv 1ndash2) butregister constrains the content of the orientation IdeationallyMark construes a world (a reality an experience) in this portionof the narrative in which the goings-on consist of the followingprocesses48
bull material processes gathering together (συνήχθησαν [v 2]) separating (χωρεῖν [v 2])49
bull a mental process hearing (ἠκούσθη [v 1])bull an existential process is (ἐστίν [v 1]) bull a verbal process speaking (ἐλάλει [v 2])
The following participants are portrayed
bull ldquoherdquo (presumably Jesus) as the one who is ldquoenteringrdquo Capernaum who ldquoisrdquo in the house and who ldquowas speakingrdquo the messagebull an assumed agent (the crowd) as the one by whom it ldquowas heardrdquo that he is in the housebull ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί) (also ldquothemrdquo [αὐτοῖς]) who had ldquogatheredrdquo and couldno longer ldquoseparaterdquo and to whom ldquoherdquo was speaking the messagebull Capernaum (Καφαρναούmicro)bull a house (οἴκῳ)bull the door of the house (θύραν)bull the message or word (λόγον)
Interpersonally the storyrsquos orientation is monoglossic beingdominated by assertive verbal attitude which is grammaticalizedby indicative verbal mood This enacts a relationship betweenMark and his presumed readers in which as storyteller Mark hashigher status than the readers because he is the one who
47 Cf Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 3748 On process types see Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar
108ff Cf also Tan ldquoTransitivityrdquo np49 The participle εἰσελθών technically constitutes the circumstance for
hearing (ἠκούσθη) and is thus not a main process Circumstances too are partof ideational meaning
40 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
apparently knows everything about the situation he describesThe readers on the other hand are situated as potentialacknowledgers of what Mark asserts Moreover that Mark hasopted to include this particular narrative in his gospel indicatesan appraisal from his perspective the readers need to be toldthis story Even just within the narrativersquos orientation phase (ieat the level of the narrative50) appraisal is evident For examplethe two clauses καὶ συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲτὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν (v 2) betoken a positive evaluation of Jesusrsquogrowing honor among the masses51
In terms of the textual strand of meaning the function inwhich we are most interested here the text unfolds in a series ofclauses and each of these clauses has a ldquoleaping off pointrdquo andtypically though not always some further development of thatpoint The major concern here is with how the author chooses toorder the components of the clause Yet even this choice isconstrained by the situation and the social purpose of both thetext as a whole and the stretch of text constituting the clause Forexample as noted Mark 21ndash2 make up the orientation portion ofthe narrative Mark has chosen to tell The first clause in theorientation is Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶνἠκούσθη Not surprisingly Markrsquos point of departure in thisclause is the adjunct52 ldquoAnd entering again into Capernaum rdquo
50 Cf ldquoThe Rhetorical Effects of Attituderdquo in Dvorak ldquoInterpersonalMetafunctionrdquo 54
51 That so many people were filling the house that there was not evenspace to get into or out of the house is a token of positive judgment with regardto social esteem (t +judgment esteem normality) Further the use of the termποltοί (many) coupled with the statement that there was no room in front of thedoor (microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν) increases the force of the judgment(both graduation force quantification mass and graduation forcequantification extent distribution) Cf Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo102 also Martin and White Language of Evaluation 150ndash51
52 Ie adverbialcircumstantial participial clause Adjunct refers to aword group or groups that modify the predicator (verb) in a clause to providecircumstances associated with the process (cf ldquoOpenTextorg AnnotationModelrdquo np)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 41
This demonstrates the ldquoenablingrdquo or ldquorelevancerdquo role of thetextual metafunction namely to ldquopackagerdquo ideational andinterpersonal meanings into clauses in a way that is both relevantto and communicatively effective in light of its purpose That ishere it orients the readers to the context of the narrative Thus itis how text is being used in a given context (ie mode) thatgoverns the textual meanings that are made (ie textualmetafunction) which in turn govern the arrangements of theclause components in the realization of each clause (informationflow)
24 SummaryWe demonstrated thus far that both discourse structure andinformation flow are not merely the result of stylistic choicesmade by language users Rather structure and flow are largelygoverned by two different levels of context namely genre andregister With regard to discourse structure people deploylanguage in ways that are staged and oriented to various socialgoals The ways in which these social goals may beaccomplished with language are governed by the language userrsquosculture the staging or structure of the discourse reflects thesecultural constraints Information flow is constrained to someextent by variations in genre and to a greater extent by registervariablesmdashand of these mostly by mode The textualmetafunction arranges ideational and interpersonal meanings inways that from the language userrsquos perspective are relevant toand most effective in reaching the communicative goal of theclause in relation to the larger purpose of the text
3 Prime and Subsequent Analysis
We argued above that the role of the textual metafunction was toorganize ideational and interpersonal content into clauses in away that is relevant and consistent with register and that createsa coherent message Here we provide a framework for modelingclauses as messages and a method for interpreting thosemessages
42 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
The message of a clause consists of two parts ldquothe elementwhich serves as the point of departure of the messagerdquo and ldquotheremainder of the messagerdquo53 Although Halliday referred to theseparts as theme and rheme respectively we follow Porter andOrsquoDonnell and use the terms prime and subsequent reservingtheme and rheme for the discussion of thematic elements at thelevel of clause complex (sentence) and multi-clause complexlevel (see ldquoTheme and Rheme Analysisrdquo below)54 In the modelwe present here prime refers to ldquowho or what the clause isfocused upon realized by the first [word] group element in theclause The subsequent is defined as the development of theprime and is realized in the remaining group elements in theclauserdquo55 The prime functions to orient the reader to the messageof the clause and the subsequent provides the news about theprime that the writer wants the readers to know to experience orto remember56
Every clause has a prime element and most also have asubsequent though it is possible for a clause to consist only of aprime57 The word group element (ie subject predicatorcomplement or adjunct)58 comprising the prime may be assimple as a single word (conjunctions are excluded) or it may bea complex nominal or verbal group or even an embeddedclause59 Subsequent consists of all other word group elementsfollowing the prime For example the initial clause in Mark 21ndash12 is analyzed for prime and subsequent as follows (see theappendix for a full prime and subsequent analysis of this unit)
53 Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 37 Cf Porter andOrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 90
54 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9155 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 91 (italics theirs)56 Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2057 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 92 Dvorak
ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2058 Cf OrsquoDonnell Porter Reed Picirilli Smith and Tan ldquoClause Level
Annotation Specificationrdquo n p59 Cf Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 20
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 43
Prime SubsequentA [[P εἰσελθὼν |A πάλιν |A εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro |A δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ]] P ἠκούσθη
Markrsquos point of departure in this clause is an adjunct consistingof an embedded participial clause that realizes a temporalcontext for interpreting or understanding the subsequent whichconsists of the predicator (main verb)
The following clause from Mark 23 raises a crucial pointnamely that prime and subsequent analysis must be performedon the Greek text and not on a translation
Prime SubsequentP ἔρχονται A [[P φέροντες |A πρὸς αὐτὸν |C παραλυτικὸν [[P αἰρόmicroενον |A ὑπὸ
τεσσάρων ]] ]]
The prime of this clause is the predicator or verbal group InGreek finite verbs are monolectic which means theygrammaticalize person as part of their form through the use ofpersonal endings60 Thus it is not necessary for users of Greek tospecify explicitly a subject in a clause In fact the defaultunmarked option in biblical Greek is not to specify a subject61
However in many other languages like English for example thedefault unmarked option is to specify a subject This means ifprime and subsequent analysis is performed on an Englishtranslation it would label prime incorrectly In this particularinstance based on the English gloss ldquoThey comeare comingbringing to him a paralytic being carried by fourrdquo the primewould be ldquotheyrdquo However the actual prime is the processldquocomeare comingrdquo Thus Mark chose to begin with the material
60 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 71 Porter and OrsquoDonnell (DiscourseAnalysis 93) note that this gives the writer of Greek the flexibility to ldquo(1) notspecify a specific subject (2) specify the subject but not place it inprimary position or (3) specify the subject and place it in primary positionin the clause rdquo
61 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 93 n 148
44 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
process and to further develop it with circumstantial informationprovided by an embedded participial clause
It is often assumed that items in prime position are prominentsimply because they occupy prime position in the clause but thisis not the de facto case Determining prominence requiresconsideration of other factors including analyses of clauserealization patterns across the corpus of text written by the sameauthor (eg the Pauline epistles)62 as well as the entire NewTestament corpus and other factors such as literary genre Also tobe accounted for are features of markedness grounding andsalience63 Further research in this area is needed but it may befor example that because predicators fill prime position themajority of times across the New Testament saying that apredicator is prominent simply because it occupies primeposition in the clause would be to say too much64 That said theorder of word groups within a clause is indeed a factor indetermining prominence65
4 Theme and Rheme Analysis
Porter and OrsquoDonnell reserve the terms theme and rheme foridentifying and discussing the ldquothematic elements at the sentenceand multi-sentence levelrdquo66 This means the focus of our textualanalysis now shifts to the level above the clause When exploringtheme and rheme analysis it is important to define the terms
62 Cf Tan ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo 95ndash11063 Cf Westfall ldquoAnalysis of Prominence in Hellenistic Greekrdquo 75ndash9464 Dvorakrsquos analysis of the entire New Testament revealed that across
the entire New Testament predicators were prime 7227 times adjuncts 5767times subjects 5354 times and complements 2634 times Cf DvorakldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 25ndash26 Cf also Porter(ldquoProminencerdquo 71) who discusses patterns of order of first and second clausecomponents
65 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 67ndash6966 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 45
clearly to delineate the steps in analysis and to stress a numberof the important advantages to such an analysis
To begin one must have an understanding of the term processchain A process is any verbal action implied or inscribedwithin a clause a process chain refers to a string of verbalprocesses that form a series across a stretch of text67 This chainof processes is ascribed to a particular actor(s) who is said to bethe thematic actor Of course other participants and their actionsmay be interspersed in the same stretch of text but these do notnecessarily break the process chain associated with the thematicactor An easy example in English is as follows
Bobby went to the store There he was greeted by a clerk and thensearched for a loaf of bread When he found it however he decidedthat it was too expensive so he put it back on the shelf However anolder woman standing nearby decided she would take it Bobby thenleft the store and travelled to the Shop-For-Less down the road wherehe purchased the bread for a less expensive price
All of the verbs in this anecdote form a process chain andBobby is the primary participant Bobby went searched founddecided put left travelled and purchased Notice as well thatthe additional processes performed by the clerk and the olderwoman do not break the chain as it follows Bobby for theiractions are clearly secondary information and reactionarythroughout Bobbyrsquos story
This story provides an excellent segue to the notion of themeTheme in narrative is best seen through the transition and changeof a participant as a primary actor in a process chainmdashwhat isusually called the thematic actor68 In other words a theme is thetransition from one thematic actor to another or a change inparticipant involvement that breaks a process chain That beingsaid the thematic actor must be an explicit subject meaning thatthe actor cannot merely be implied from a verb This does notmean however that the thematic actor must be prime or evenarticulated Indeed the thematic actor can be anarthrous or
67 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9868 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
46 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
articulated prime or subsequent Provided the thematic actor isarticulated this actor can be said to be more emphatic Moreemphatic still is when the thematic actor also occupies the primeposition in the clause69 Such a theme is said to be marked andshould be noted as a potential boundary marker for a shift indiscourse topic which will be discussed more thoroughly below
Interestingly enough the thematic actor can actually bepassive which suggests that more refined language is needed infuture formulations of theme and rheme analyses The followingbrief narrative concerning a shirt demonstrates the shortcomingsof ldquoactorrdquo language
Cindyrsquos shirt was stained by an ice cream cone The shirt then had tobe tossed into the washing machine which soaked it for twentyminutes The shirt then was brought out of the wash and was placedinto the dryer for a sixty-minute tumble Finally the shirt wasremoved by Cindy and hung on the drying rack
Clearly the narrative is about the shirt It is the theme of the taleeven though it is not truly an actor in any instance Perhaps thelanguage of ldquoprimary participantrdquo could be more helpful and lessmisleading
Moving onto clausal considerations the thematic participantmust be in a primary clause or on clause level α in the OpenText model70 Any participant found in a secondary clause hasbeen rank-shifted down to level β and therefore plays asubordinate role to the circumstances of the primary clauseObviously then a subordinated participant cannot serve as theprimary participant
Lastly one must consider the concept of rhememdashtheadditional information regarding the current thematicparticipant71 which is also understood as the extensivecircumstantial information involved in a process chain Considerthe story of a young elf
69 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98-9970 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10371 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 47
Sissy was out late one night at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that shewould not be able to return to the hovel before the werewolves cameout for the night she decided to employ her cunning Acting quicklyshe pulled leaves and twigs off of a few nearby oaks and began toconstruct a glider She then climbed atop the tallest tree at her friendsrsquoden and sets sail for home landing safely at her hovel just as sheheard the first howl of the dark night She was safe safe indeed
In the preceding story all of the details concerning her activitiesthe building gliding landing and so on all serve as rhematicmaterial to fill out the picture of the text It is clear that thissection of text is about Sissy since she is the primary participantThe rheme is what allows the reader to know that the story istruly about not only Sissy but also her quick wit and her returnvoyage home
Briefly it is worth noting that following the application ofboth prime and subsequent analysis and theme and rhemeanalysis the two analyses may be cross examined for additionaland enlightening findings For example should a prime in aclause also be a theme then the theme is considered markedmeaning that the author chose to launch his clause with thetheme change72 This reflects the nature of language in that thespeaker has to make a choice regarding how to start a clauseSince language is necessarily syntagmatic and paradigmaticmdashlinear and oppositionalmdashonly one thing can be said at a timeTherefore the first chosen words that come out of the mouthmust be considered significant especially in the language ofGreek where word order is significantly more malleable than inEnglish although it is important to note that a linguistic choice isnot always conscious
To grasp how the idea of prime and theme work together hereis a small reiteration of Sissyrsquos story ldquoSissy was out late onenight at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that she would not be ableto return to the hovel before the werewolves came out for thenight she decided to employ her cunningrdquo Notice how the firstclause begins with ldquoSissyrdquo as both the prime and the thematic
72 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 100-101
48 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
participant There is no question as to whom the story pertainsHowever the prime in the following sentence is actually aparticiple adjunct material which sets the stage for the problemin the text Thus the kernel of truth from these first twosentences is that Sissy realizes she has a problem Without thecoupling of prime and theme such a realization could very wellbe missed by a casual reader or interpreter leading to amisunderstanding of character prominence73 The true beauty ofthese analyses therefore can be seen in the fact that they causethe analyst to slow down and appreciate the rhetoric within thetext itself
The importance of theme and rheme analysis cannot beunderstated for it is key in determining exactly what the authoris trying to communicate in a given pericope The thematic actorin a given process chain is the governing character in a multi-sentence portion of the text All of the information that iscircumstantial to the theme is the rheme and should be treated asadding additional information to the theme If one were toconfuse this then one would be in danger of putting words in theauthorrsquos mouth and mirror reading into the text Thereforetheme and rheme analysis is critical to providing the clearestpossible picture of a textrsquos message the bits of the text that theauthor considers most important which leads to the best possibleapplications for daily living
There are only two thematic units in Mark 21ndash12 (cf theappendix for a full theme-rheme analysis) The first thematic unitconsists of verses 1ndash5 In this unit the only explicit subject of aprocess chain that occurs in a primary clause is ποltοί (v 2)Mark has not chosen the most heavily marked theme optionsince ποltοί does not also occupy prime position in the clauseAlthough ὁ παραλυτικός occurs in the subject slot of clause 16 (v4) it occurs in a dependent clause thus it does not constitute athematic shift Ὁ Ἰησοῦς occurs in v 5 but it is part of asecondary embedded participial clause that serves as an adjunctin the primary clause and is therefore not a thematic shift The
73 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 104-105
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 49
only remaining possibility is αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι in clause 19 (v 5)however although it is subject in a primary clause it belongs toa stretch of reported speech and is thus not a thematic shift Thenext thematic unit begins at clause 20 (v 6) with τινες τῶνγραmicromicroατέων (not marked) and extends all the way through to theend of the unit (v 12) Again a number of other subjects occur inthe subsequent clauses but as in the first unit none of themqualifies as a thematic shift because either they occur as part ofreported speech or secondary clauses (embedded or standalone)
There are only a couple thematic units in Jude A few of thesewill be examined below to demonstrate what has been writtenabove The first of these examples comes from clause twelve
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸκρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειανκαὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
Here we have an example of an unmarked theme for thetheme is not prime in the clause Τινες ἄνθρωποι is the primaryparticipant of this clause The rest of the material is rhematic inthat it is giving additional information about these ldquocertainpeoplerdquo The most significant of the rhematic material here is theprocess associated with the subject on the primary clause levelThis process is παρεισέδυσαν essentially meaning that thesepeople have snuck in among them There are other processeshowever involved that are related back to the theme here whichform a process chain when taken together Some of thesepredicators are participles which associate variouscircumstantial bits with the theme provided Other verbs found inclauses 29ndash32 are also on the primary level which at leastinclude microιαίνουσιν ἀθετοῦσιν and βλασφηmicroοῦσιν Each of theseverbs is intensely negative in nature which supports theassertion that the author genuinely does not approve of theseindividuals at all
Now one might assert that these verbs should be rhematic forother subjects since there are indeed other subjects that theseverbs predicate However there is no explicit subject on theprimary clause level that signals a change in theme after τινες
50 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
ἄνθρωποι until Μιχαὴλ74 Since this is the case it cannot be saidthat any of these intermediate participants is thematic Thesecondary clauses embedded or otherwise cannot carry enoughweight to be thematic since they are additional information usedto support the primary material they follow
The second example comes from clause 40 Οὗτοι δὲ ὅσα microὲνοὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν In this example the theme is markedmeaning that the primary participant is also in the primeposition Since the author chose to present this theme as markedit likely has extra weight In this instance the marked theme isactually a reference back to the theme in clause twelve whichserves as the topic of the entire discourse Thus it is likely thatthe theme is marked as the author tries to reorient his audiencetoward himself as opposed to his adversaries
The final example comes from clause 67 καὶ τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶνλαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν In thisexample the subject is articulated and prime which makes thisan especially marked theme When the subject comes at thebeginning of the clause the subject is the leaping off point of theclause the first bit of information that flows out of the speakerOn top of all of this the author took the time to articulate thetheme which is not necessarily required in Greek All of theseelements work together to draw attention to the subject in subtleyet important ways It is possible that this theme is so marked asthe author wants to draw attention to the wicked speech thatspills forth from the mouths of τινες ἄνθρωποιmdashspeech to whichthe author clearly does not want his audience listening
5 Topic and Comment Analysis
Topic and comment analysis functions at the highest level ofdiscourse This level includes the clause complex paragraph and
74 The demonstrative pronoun οὗτοι in clause 29 does not signal a themechange because it is a reference back to the current theme τινες ἄνθρωποι Thiswould be similar to the use of a personal pronoun like ldquoherdquo He is a referentback to a governing term that has been established in most cases as is οὗτοι
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 51
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
the elements of ideational meaning and interpersonal meaningare ldquopackagedrdquo as it were into clauses in which some portion ofeach clause has special ldquothematicrdquo status and the remainder ofthe clause develops the theme and completes the message47
Looking again at Mark 2 generic constraints of narrative maycall for the story to open with an orientation (vv 1ndash2) butregister constrains the content of the orientation IdeationallyMark construes a world (a reality an experience) in this portionof the narrative in which the goings-on consist of the followingprocesses48
bull material processes gathering together (συνήχθησαν [v 2]) separating (χωρεῖν [v 2])49
bull a mental process hearing (ἠκούσθη [v 1])bull an existential process is (ἐστίν [v 1]) bull a verbal process speaking (ἐλάλει [v 2])
The following participants are portrayed
bull ldquoherdquo (presumably Jesus) as the one who is ldquoenteringrdquo Capernaum who ldquoisrdquo in the house and who ldquowas speakingrdquo the messagebull an assumed agent (the crowd) as the one by whom it ldquowas heardrdquo that he is in the housebull ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί) (also ldquothemrdquo [αὐτοῖς]) who had ldquogatheredrdquo and couldno longer ldquoseparaterdquo and to whom ldquoherdquo was speaking the messagebull Capernaum (Καφαρναούmicro)bull a house (οἴκῳ)bull the door of the house (θύραν)bull the message or word (λόγον)
Interpersonally the storyrsquos orientation is monoglossic beingdominated by assertive verbal attitude which is grammaticalizedby indicative verbal mood This enacts a relationship betweenMark and his presumed readers in which as storyteller Mark hashigher status than the readers because he is the one who
47 Cf Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 3748 On process types see Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar
108ff Cf also Tan ldquoTransitivityrdquo np49 The participle εἰσελθών technically constitutes the circumstance for
hearing (ἠκούσθη) and is thus not a main process Circumstances too are partof ideational meaning
40 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
apparently knows everything about the situation he describesThe readers on the other hand are situated as potentialacknowledgers of what Mark asserts Moreover that Mark hasopted to include this particular narrative in his gospel indicatesan appraisal from his perspective the readers need to be toldthis story Even just within the narrativersquos orientation phase (ieat the level of the narrative50) appraisal is evident For examplethe two clauses καὶ συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲτὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν (v 2) betoken a positive evaluation of Jesusrsquogrowing honor among the masses51
In terms of the textual strand of meaning the function inwhich we are most interested here the text unfolds in a series ofclauses and each of these clauses has a ldquoleaping off pointrdquo andtypically though not always some further development of thatpoint The major concern here is with how the author chooses toorder the components of the clause Yet even this choice isconstrained by the situation and the social purpose of both thetext as a whole and the stretch of text constituting the clause Forexample as noted Mark 21ndash2 make up the orientation portion ofthe narrative Mark has chosen to tell The first clause in theorientation is Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶνἠκούσθη Not surprisingly Markrsquos point of departure in thisclause is the adjunct52 ldquoAnd entering again into Capernaum rdquo
50 Cf ldquoThe Rhetorical Effects of Attituderdquo in Dvorak ldquoInterpersonalMetafunctionrdquo 54
51 That so many people were filling the house that there was not evenspace to get into or out of the house is a token of positive judgment with regardto social esteem (t +judgment esteem normality) Further the use of the termποltοί (many) coupled with the statement that there was no room in front of thedoor (microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν) increases the force of the judgment(both graduation force quantification mass and graduation forcequantification extent distribution) Cf Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo102 also Martin and White Language of Evaluation 150ndash51
52 Ie adverbialcircumstantial participial clause Adjunct refers to aword group or groups that modify the predicator (verb) in a clause to providecircumstances associated with the process (cf ldquoOpenTextorg AnnotationModelrdquo np)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 41
This demonstrates the ldquoenablingrdquo or ldquorelevancerdquo role of thetextual metafunction namely to ldquopackagerdquo ideational andinterpersonal meanings into clauses in a way that is both relevantto and communicatively effective in light of its purpose That ishere it orients the readers to the context of the narrative Thus itis how text is being used in a given context (ie mode) thatgoverns the textual meanings that are made (ie textualmetafunction) which in turn govern the arrangements of theclause components in the realization of each clause (informationflow)
24 SummaryWe demonstrated thus far that both discourse structure andinformation flow are not merely the result of stylistic choicesmade by language users Rather structure and flow are largelygoverned by two different levels of context namely genre andregister With regard to discourse structure people deploylanguage in ways that are staged and oriented to various socialgoals The ways in which these social goals may beaccomplished with language are governed by the language userrsquosculture the staging or structure of the discourse reflects thesecultural constraints Information flow is constrained to someextent by variations in genre and to a greater extent by registervariablesmdashand of these mostly by mode The textualmetafunction arranges ideational and interpersonal meanings inways that from the language userrsquos perspective are relevant toand most effective in reaching the communicative goal of theclause in relation to the larger purpose of the text
3 Prime and Subsequent Analysis
We argued above that the role of the textual metafunction was toorganize ideational and interpersonal content into clauses in away that is relevant and consistent with register and that createsa coherent message Here we provide a framework for modelingclauses as messages and a method for interpreting thosemessages
42 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
The message of a clause consists of two parts ldquothe elementwhich serves as the point of departure of the messagerdquo and ldquotheremainder of the messagerdquo53 Although Halliday referred to theseparts as theme and rheme respectively we follow Porter andOrsquoDonnell and use the terms prime and subsequent reservingtheme and rheme for the discussion of thematic elements at thelevel of clause complex (sentence) and multi-clause complexlevel (see ldquoTheme and Rheme Analysisrdquo below)54 In the modelwe present here prime refers to ldquowho or what the clause isfocused upon realized by the first [word] group element in theclause The subsequent is defined as the development of theprime and is realized in the remaining group elements in theclauserdquo55 The prime functions to orient the reader to the messageof the clause and the subsequent provides the news about theprime that the writer wants the readers to know to experience orto remember56
Every clause has a prime element and most also have asubsequent though it is possible for a clause to consist only of aprime57 The word group element (ie subject predicatorcomplement or adjunct)58 comprising the prime may be assimple as a single word (conjunctions are excluded) or it may bea complex nominal or verbal group or even an embeddedclause59 Subsequent consists of all other word group elementsfollowing the prime For example the initial clause in Mark 21ndash12 is analyzed for prime and subsequent as follows (see theappendix for a full prime and subsequent analysis of this unit)
53 Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 37 Cf Porter andOrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 90
54 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9155 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 91 (italics theirs)56 Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2057 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 92 Dvorak
ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2058 Cf OrsquoDonnell Porter Reed Picirilli Smith and Tan ldquoClause Level
Annotation Specificationrdquo n p59 Cf Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 20
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 43
Prime SubsequentA [[P εἰσελθὼν |A πάλιν |A εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro |A δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ]] P ἠκούσθη
Markrsquos point of departure in this clause is an adjunct consistingof an embedded participial clause that realizes a temporalcontext for interpreting or understanding the subsequent whichconsists of the predicator (main verb)
The following clause from Mark 23 raises a crucial pointnamely that prime and subsequent analysis must be performedon the Greek text and not on a translation
Prime SubsequentP ἔρχονται A [[P φέροντες |A πρὸς αὐτὸν |C παραλυτικὸν [[P αἰρόmicroενον |A ὑπὸ
τεσσάρων ]] ]]
The prime of this clause is the predicator or verbal group InGreek finite verbs are monolectic which means theygrammaticalize person as part of their form through the use ofpersonal endings60 Thus it is not necessary for users of Greek tospecify explicitly a subject in a clause In fact the defaultunmarked option in biblical Greek is not to specify a subject61
However in many other languages like English for example thedefault unmarked option is to specify a subject This means ifprime and subsequent analysis is performed on an Englishtranslation it would label prime incorrectly In this particularinstance based on the English gloss ldquoThey comeare comingbringing to him a paralytic being carried by fourrdquo the primewould be ldquotheyrdquo However the actual prime is the processldquocomeare comingrdquo Thus Mark chose to begin with the material
60 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 71 Porter and OrsquoDonnell (DiscourseAnalysis 93) note that this gives the writer of Greek the flexibility to ldquo(1) notspecify a specific subject (2) specify the subject but not place it inprimary position or (3) specify the subject and place it in primary positionin the clause rdquo
61 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 93 n 148
44 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
process and to further develop it with circumstantial informationprovided by an embedded participial clause
It is often assumed that items in prime position are prominentsimply because they occupy prime position in the clause but thisis not the de facto case Determining prominence requiresconsideration of other factors including analyses of clauserealization patterns across the corpus of text written by the sameauthor (eg the Pauline epistles)62 as well as the entire NewTestament corpus and other factors such as literary genre Also tobe accounted for are features of markedness grounding andsalience63 Further research in this area is needed but it may befor example that because predicators fill prime position themajority of times across the New Testament saying that apredicator is prominent simply because it occupies primeposition in the clause would be to say too much64 That said theorder of word groups within a clause is indeed a factor indetermining prominence65
4 Theme and Rheme Analysis
Porter and OrsquoDonnell reserve the terms theme and rheme foridentifying and discussing the ldquothematic elements at the sentenceand multi-sentence levelrdquo66 This means the focus of our textualanalysis now shifts to the level above the clause When exploringtheme and rheme analysis it is important to define the terms
62 Cf Tan ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo 95ndash11063 Cf Westfall ldquoAnalysis of Prominence in Hellenistic Greekrdquo 75ndash9464 Dvorakrsquos analysis of the entire New Testament revealed that across
the entire New Testament predicators were prime 7227 times adjuncts 5767times subjects 5354 times and complements 2634 times Cf DvorakldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 25ndash26 Cf also Porter(ldquoProminencerdquo 71) who discusses patterns of order of first and second clausecomponents
65 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 67ndash6966 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 45
clearly to delineate the steps in analysis and to stress a numberof the important advantages to such an analysis
To begin one must have an understanding of the term processchain A process is any verbal action implied or inscribedwithin a clause a process chain refers to a string of verbalprocesses that form a series across a stretch of text67 This chainof processes is ascribed to a particular actor(s) who is said to bethe thematic actor Of course other participants and their actionsmay be interspersed in the same stretch of text but these do notnecessarily break the process chain associated with the thematicactor An easy example in English is as follows
Bobby went to the store There he was greeted by a clerk and thensearched for a loaf of bread When he found it however he decidedthat it was too expensive so he put it back on the shelf However anolder woman standing nearby decided she would take it Bobby thenleft the store and travelled to the Shop-For-Less down the road wherehe purchased the bread for a less expensive price
All of the verbs in this anecdote form a process chain andBobby is the primary participant Bobby went searched founddecided put left travelled and purchased Notice as well thatthe additional processes performed by the clerk and the olderwoman do not break the chain as it follows Bobby for theiractions are clearly secondary information and reactionarythroughout Bobbyrsquos story
This story provides an excellent segue to the notion of themeTheme in narrative is best seen through the transition and changeof a participant as a primary actor in a process chainmdashwhat isusually called the thematic actor68 In other words a theme is thetransition from one thematic actor to another or a change inparticipant involvement that breaks a process chain That beingsaid the thematic actor must be an explicit subject meaning thatthe actor cannot merely be implied from a verb This does notmean however that the thematic actor must be prime or evenarticulated Indeed the thematic actor can be anarthrous or
67 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9868 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
46 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
articulated prime or subsequent Provided the thematic actor isarticulated this actor can be said to be more emphatic Moreemphatic still is when the thematic actor also occupies the primeposition in the clause69 Such a theme is said to be marked andshould be noted as a potential boundary marker for a shift indiscourse topic which will be discussed more thoroughly below
Interestingly enough the thematic actor can actually bepassive which suggests that more refined language is needed infuture formulations of theme and rheme analyses The followingbrief narrative concerning a shirt demonstrates the shortcomingsof ldquoactorrdquo language
Cindyrsquos shirt was stained by an ice cream cone The shirt then had tobe tossed into the washing machine which soaked it for twentyminutes The shirt then was brought out of the wash and was placedinto the dryer for a sixty-minute tumble Finally the shirt wasremoved by Cindy and hung on the drying rack
Clearly the narrative is about the shirt It is the theme of the taleeven though it is not truly an actor in any instance Perhaps thelanguage of ldquoprimary participantrdquo could be more helpful and lessmisleading
Moving onto clausal considerations the thematic participantmust be in a primary clause or on clause level α in the OpenText model70 Any participant found in a secondary clause hasbeen rank-shifted down to level β and therefore plays asubordinate role to the circumstances of the primary clauseObviously then a subordinated participant cannot serve as theprimary participant
Lastly one must consider the concept of rhememdashtheadditional information regarding the current thematicparticipant71 which is also understood as the extensivecircumstantial information involved in a process chain Considerthe story of a young elf
69 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98-9970 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10371 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 47
Sissy was out late one night at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that shewould not be able to return to the hovel before the werewolves cameout for the night she decided to employ her cunning Acting quicklyshe pulled leaves and twigs off of a few nearby oaks and began toconstruct a glider She then climbed atop the tallest tree at her friendsrsquoden and sets sail for home landing safely at her hovel just as sheheard the first howl of the dark night She was safe safe indeed
In the preceding story all of the details concerning her activitiesthe building gliding landing and so on all serve as rhematicmaterial to fill out the picture of the text It is clear that thissection of text is about Sissy since she is the primary participantThe rheme is what allows the reader to know that the story istruly about not only Sissy but also her quick wit and her returnvoyage home
Briefly it is worth noting that following the application ofboth prime and subsequent analysis and theme and rhemeanalysis the two analyses may be cross examined for additionaland enlightening findings For example should a prime in aclause also be a theme then the theme is considered markedmeaning that the author chose to launch his clause with thetheme change72 This reflects the nature of language in that thespeaker has to make a choice regarding how to start a clauseSince language is necessarily syntagmatic and paradigmaticmdashlinear and oppositionalmdashonly one thing can be said at a timeTherefore the first chosen words that come out of the mouthmust be considered significant especially in the language ofGreek where word order is significantly more malleable than inEnglish although it is important to note that a linguistic choice isnot always conscious
To grasp how the idea of prime and theme work together hereis a small reiteration of Sissyrsquos story ldquoSissy was out late onenight at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that she would not be ableto return to the hovel before the werewolves came out for thenight she decided to employ her cunningrdquo Notice how the firstclause begins with ldquoSissyrdquo as both the prime and the thematic
72 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 100-101
48 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
participant There is no question as to whom the story pertainsHowever the prime in the following sentence is actually aparticiple adjunct material which sets the stage for the problemin the text Thus the kernel of truth from these first twosentences is that Sissy realizes she has a problem Without thecoupling of prime and theme such a realization could very wellbe missed by a casual reader or interpreter leading to amisunderstanding of character prominence73 The true beauty ofthese analyses therefore can be seen in the fact that they causethe analyst to slow down and appreciate the rhetoric within thetext itself
The importance of theme and rheme analysis cannot beunderstated for it is key in determining exactly what the authoris trying to communicate in a given pericope The thematic actorin a given process chain is the governing character in a multi-sentence portion of the text All of the information that iscircumstantial to the theme is the rheme and should be treated asadding additional information to the theme If one were toconfuse this then one would be in danger of putting words in theauthorrsquos mouth and mirror reading into the text Thereforetheme and rheme analysis is critical to providing the clearestpossible picture of a textrsquos message the bits of the text that theauthor considers most important which leads to the best possibleapplications for daily living
There are only two thematic units in Mark 21ndash12 (cf theappendix for a full theme-rheme analysis) The first thematic unitconsists of verses 1ndash5 In this unit the only explicit subject of aprocess chain that occurs in a primary clause is ποltοί (v 2)Mark has not chosen the most heavily marked theme optionsince ποltοί does not also occupy prime position in the clauseAlthough ὁ παραλυτικός occurs in the subject slot of clause 16 (v4) it occurs in a dependent clause thus it does not constitute athematic shift Ὁ Ἰησοῦς occurs in v 5 but it is part of asecondary embedded participial clause that serves as an adjunctin the primary clause and is therefore not a thematic shift The
73 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 104-105
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 49
only remaining possibility is αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι in clause 19 (v 5)however although it is subject in a primary clause it belongs toa stretch of reported speech and is thus not a thematic shift Thenext thematic unit begins at clause 20 (v 6) with τινες τῶνγραmicromicroατέων (not marked) and extends all the way through to theend of the unit (v 12) Again a number of other subjects occur inthe subsequent clauses but as in the first unit none of themqualifies as a thematic shift because either they occur as part ofreported speech or secondary clauses (embedded or standalone)
There are only a couple thematic units in Jude A few of thesewill be examined below to demonstrate what has been writtenabove The first of these examples comes from clause twelve
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸκρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειανκαὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
Here we have an example of an unmarked theme for thetheme is not prime in the clause Τινες ἄνθρωποι is the primaryparticipant of this clause The rest of the material is rhematic inthat it is giving additional information about these ldquocertainpeoplerdquo The most significant of the rhematic material here is theprocess associated with the subject on the primary clause levelThis process is παρεισέδυσαν essentially meaning that thesepeople have snuck in among them There are other processeshowever involved that are related back to the theme here whichform a process chain when taken together Some of thesepredicators are participles which associate variouscircumstantial bits with the theme provided Other verbs found inclauses 29ndash32 are also on the primary level which at leastinclude microιαίνουσιν ἀθετοῦσιν and βλασφηmicroοῦσιν Each of theseverbs is intensely negative in nature which supports theassertion that the author genuinely does not approve of theseindividuals at all
Now one might assert that these verbs should be rhematic forother subjects since there are indeed other subjects that theseverbs predicate However there is no explicit subject on theprimary clause level that signals a change in theme after τινες
50 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
ἄνθρωποι until Μιχαὴλ74 Since this is the case it cannot be saidthat any of these intermediate participants is thematic Thesecondary clauses embedded or otherwise cannot carry enoughweight to be thematic since they are additional information usedto support the primary material they follow
The second example comes from clause 40 Οὗτοι δὲ ὅσα microὲνοὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν In this example the theme is markedmeaning that the primary participant is also in the primeposition Since the author chose to present this theme as markedit likely has extra weight In this instance the marked theme isactually a reference back to the theme in clause twelve whichserves as the topic of the entire discourse Thus it is likely thatthe theme is marked as the author tries to reorient his audiencetoward himself as opposed to his adversaries
The final example comes from clause 67 καὶ τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶνλαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν In thisexample the subject is articulated and prime which makes thisan especially marked theme When the subject comes at thebeginning of the clause the subject is the leaping off point of theclause the first bit of information that flows out of the speakerOn top of all of this the author took the time to articulate thetheme which is not necessarily required in Greek All of theseelements work together to draw attention to the subject in subtleyet important ways It is possible that this theme is so marked asthe author wants to draw attention to the wicked speech thatspills forth from the mouths of τινες ἄνθρωποιmdashspeech to whichthe author clearly does not want his audience listening
5 Topic and Comment Analysis
Topic and comment analysis functions at the highest level ofdiscourse This level includes the clause complex paragraph and
74 The demonstrative pronoun οὗτοι in clause 29 does not signal a themechange because it is a reference back to the current theme τινες ἄνθρωποι Thiswould be similar to the use of a personal pronoun like ldquoherdquo He is a referentback to a governing term that has been established in most cases as is οὗτοι
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 51
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
apparently knows everything about the situation he describesThe readers on the other hand are situated as potentialacknowledgers of what Mark asserts Moreover that Mark hasopted to include this particular narrative in his gospel indicatesan appraisal from his perspective the readers need to be toldthis story Even just within the narrativersquos orientation phase (ieat the level of the narrative50) appraisal is evident For examplethe two clauses καὶ συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲτὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν (v 2) betoken a positive evaluation of Jesusrsquogrowing honor among the masses51
In terms of the textual strand of meaning the function inwhich we are most interested here the text unfolds in a series ofclauses and each of these clauses has a ldquoleaping off pointrdquo andtypically though not always some further development of thatpoint The major concern here is with how the author chooses toorder the components of the clause Yet even this choice isconstrained by the situation and the social purpose of both thetext as a whole and the stretch of text constituting the clause Forexample as noted Mark 21ndash2 make up the orientation portion ofthe narrative Mark has chosen to tell The first clause in theorientation is Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶνἠκούσθη Not surprisingly Markrsquos point of departure in thisclause is the adjunct52 ldquoAnd entering again into Capernaum rdquo
50 Cf ldquoThe Rhetorical Effects of Attituderdquo in Dvorak ldquoInterpersonalMetafunctionrdquo 54
51 That so many people were filling the house that there was not evenspace to get into or out of the house is a token of positive judgment with regardto social esteem (t +judgment esteem normality) Further the use of the termποltοί (many) coupled with the statement that there was no room in front of thedoor (microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν) increases the force of the judgment(both graduation force quantification mass and graduation forcequantification extent distribution) Cf Dvorak ldquoInterpersonal Metafunctionrdquo102 also Martin and White Language of Evaluation 150ndash51
52 Ie adverbialcircumstantial participial clause Adjunct refers to aword group or groups that modify the predicator (verb) in a clause to providecircumstances associated with the process (cf ldquoOpenTextorg AnnotationModelrdquo np)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 41
This demonstrates the ldquoenablingrdquo or ldquorelevancerdquo role of thetextual metafunction namely to ldquopackagerdquo ideational andinterpersonal meanings into clauses in a way that is both relevantto and communicatively effective in light of its purpose That ishere it orients the readers to the context of the narrative Thus itis how text is being used in a given context (ie mode) thatgoverns the textual meanings that are made (ie textualmetafunction) which in turn govern the arrangements of theclause components in the realization of each clause (informationflow)
24 SummaryWe demonstrated thus far that both discourse structure andinformation flow are not merely the result of stylistic choicesmade by language users Rather structure and flow are largelygoverned by two different levels of context namely genre andregister With regard to discourse structure people deploylanguage in ways that are staged and oriented to various socialgoals The ways in which these social goals may beaccomplished with language are governed by the language userrsquosculture the staging or structure of the discourse reflects thesecultural constraints Information flow is constrained to someextent by variations in genre and to a greater extent by registervariablesmdashand of these mostly by mode The textualmetafunction arranges ideational and interpersonal meanings inways that from the language userrsquos perspective are relevant toand most effective in reaching the communicative goal of theclause in relation to the larger purpose of the text
3 Prime and Subsequent Analysis
We argued above that the role of the textual metafunction was toorganize ideational and interpersonal content into clauses in away that is relevant and consistent with register and that createsa coherent message Here we provide a framework for modelingclauses as messages and a method for interpreting thosemessages
42 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
The message of a clause consists of two parts ldquothe elementwhich serves as the point of departure of the messagerdquo and ldquotheremainder of the messagerdquo53 Although Halliday referred to theseparts as theme and rheme respectively we follow Porter andOrsquoDonnell and use the terms prime and subsequent reservingtheme and rheme for the discussion of thematic elements at thelevel of clause complex (sentence) and multi-clause complexlevel (see ldquoTheme and Rheme Analysisrdquo below)54 In the modelwe present here prime refers to ldquowho or what the clause isfocused upon realized by the first [word] group element in theclause The subsequent is defined as the development of theprime and is realized in the remaining group elements in theclauserdquo55 The prime functions to orient the reader to the messageof the clause and the subsequent provides the news about theprime that the writer wants the readers to know to experience orto remember56
Every clause has a prime element and most also have asubsequent though it is possible for a clause to consist only of aprime57 The word group element (ie subject predicatorcomplement or adjunct)58 comprising the prime may be assimple as a single word (conjunctions are excluded) or it may bea complex nominal or verbal group or even an embeddedclause59 Subsequent consists of all other word group elementsfollowing the prime For example the initial clause in Mark 21ndash12 is analyzed for prime and subsequent as follows (see theappendix for a full prime and subsequent analysis of this unit)
53 Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 37 Cf Porter andOrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 90
54 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9155 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 91 (italics theirs)56 Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2057 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 92 Dvorak
ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2058 Cf OrsquoDonnell Porter Reed Picirilli Smith and Tan ldquoClause Level
Annotation Specificationrdquo n p59 Cf Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 20
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 43
Prime SubsequentA [[P εἰσελθὼν |A πάλιν |A εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro |A δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ]] P ἠκούσθη
Markrsquos point of departure in this clause is an adjunct consistingof an embedded participial clause that realizes a temporalcontext for interpreting or understanding the subsequent whichconsists of the predicator (main verb)
The following clause from Mark 23 raises a crucial pointnamely that prime and subsequent analysis must be performedon the Greek text and not on a translation
Prime SubsequentP ἔρχονται A [[P φέροντες |A πρὸς αὐτὸν |C παραλυτικὸν [[P αἰρόmicroενον |A ὑπὸ
τεσσάρων ]] ]]
The prime of this clause is the predicator or verbal group InGreek finite verbs are monolectic which means theygrammaticalize person as part of their form through the use ofpersonal endings60 Thus it is not necessary for users of Greek tospecify explicitly a subject in a clause In fact the defaultunmarked option in biblical Greek is not to specify a subject61
However in many other languages like English for example thedefault unmarked option is to specify a subject This means ifprime and subsequent analysis is performed on an Englishtranslation it would label prime incorrectly In this particularinstance based on the English gloss ldquoThey comeare comingbringing to him a paralytic being carried by fourrdquo the primewould be ldquotheyrdquo However the actual prime is the processldquocomeare comingrdquo Thus Mark chose to begin with the material
60 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 71 Porter and OrsquoDonnell (DiscourseAnalysis 93) note that this gives the writer of Greek the flexibility to ldquo(1) notspecify a specific subject (2) specify the subject but not place it inprimary position or (3) specify the subject and place it in primary positionin the clause rdquo
61 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 93 n 148
44 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
process and to further develop it with circumstantial informationprovided by an embedded participial clause
It is often assumed that items in prime position are prominentsimply because they occupy prime position in the clause but thisis not the de facto case Determining prominence requiresconsideration of other factors including analyses of clauserealization patterns across the corpus of text written by the sameauthor (eg the Pauline epistles)62 as well as the entire NewTestament corpus and other factors such as literary genre Also tobe accounted for are features of markedness grounding andsalience63 Further research in this area is needed but it may befor example that because predicators fill prime position themajority of times across the New Testament saying that apredicator is prominent simply because it occupies primeposition in the clause would be to say too much64 That said theorder of word groups within a clause is indeed a factor indetermining prominence65
4 Theme and Rheme Analysis
Porter and OrsquoDonnell reserve the terms theme and rheme foridentifying and discussing the ldquothematic elements at the sentenceand multi-sentence levelrdquo66 This means the focus of our textualanalysis now shifts to the level above the clause When exploringtheme and rheme analysis it is important to define the terms
62 Cf Tan ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo 95ndash11063 Cf Westfall ldquoAnalysis of Prominence in Hellenistic Greekrdquo 75ndash9464 Dvorakrsquos analysis of the entire New Testament revealed that across
the entire New Testament predicators were prime 7227 times adjuncts 5767times subjects 5354 times and complements 2634 times Cf DvorakldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 25ndash26 Cf also Porter(ldquoProminencerdquo 71) who discusses patterns of order of first and second clausecomponents
65 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 67ndash6966 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 45
clearly to delineate the steps in analysis and to stress a numberof the important advantages to such an analysis
To begin one must have an understanding of the term processchain A process is any verbal action implied or inscribedwithin a clause a process chain refers to a string of verbalprocesses that form a series across a stretch of text67 This chainof processes is ascribed to a particular actor(s) who is said to bethe thematic actor Of course other participants and their actionsmay be interspersed in the same stretch of text but these do notnecessarily break the process chain associated with the thematicactor An easy example in English is as follows
Bobby went to the store There he was greeted by a clerk and thensearched for a loaf of bread When he found it however he decidedthat it was too expensive so he put it back on the shelf However anolder woman standing nearby decided she would take it Bobby thenleft the store and travelled to the Shop-For-Less down the road wherehe purchased the bread for a less expensive price
All of the verbs in this anecdote form a process chain andBobby is the primary participant Bobby went searched founddecided put left travelled and purchased Notice as well thatthe additional processes performed by the clerk and the olderwoman do not break the chain as it follows Bobby for theiractions are clearly secondary information and reactionarythroughout Bobbyrsquos story
This story provides an excellent segue to the notion of themeTheme in narrative is best seen through the transition and changeof a participant as a primary actor in a process chainmdashwhat isusually called the thematic actor68 In other words a theme is thetransition from one thematic actor to another or a change inparticipant involvement that breaks a process chain That beingsaid the thematic actor must be an explicit subject meaning thatthe actor cannot merely be implied from a verb This does notmean however that the thematic actor must be prime or evenarticulated Indeed the thematic actor can be anarthrous or
67 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9868 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
46 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
articulated prime or subsequent Provided the thematic actor isarticulated this actor can be said to be more emphatic Moreemphatic still is when the thematic actor also occupies the primeposition in the clause69 Such a theme is said to be marked andshould be noted as a potential boundary marker for a shift indiscourse topic which will be discussed more thoroughly below
Interestingly enough the thematic actor can actually bepassive which suggests that more refined language is needed infuture formulations of theme and rheme analyses The followingbrief narrative concerning a shirt demonstrates the shortcomingsof ldquoactorrdquo language
Cindyrsquos shirt was stained by an ice cream cone The shirt then had tobe tossed into the washing machine which soaked it for twentyminutes The shirt then was brought out of the wash and was placedinto the dryer for a sixty-minute tumble Finally the shirt wasremoved by Cindy and hung on the drying rack
Clearly the narrative is about the shirt It is the theme of the taleeven though it is not truly an actor in any instance Perhaps thelanguage of ldquoprimary participantrdquo could be more helpful and lessmisleading
Moving onto clausal considerations the thematic participantmust be in a primary clause or on clause level α in the OpenText model70 Any participant found in a secondary clause hasbeen rank-shifted down to level β and therefore plays asubordinate role to the circumstances of the primary clauseObviously then a subordinated participant cannot serve as theprimary participant
Lastly one must consider the concept of rhememdashtheadditional information regarding the current thematicparticipant71 which is also understood as the extensivecircumstantial information involved in a process chain Considerthe story of a young elf
69 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98-9970 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10371 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 47
Sissy was out late one night at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that shewould not be able to return to the hovel before the werewolves cameout for the night she decided to employ her cunning Acting quicklyshe pulled leaves and twigs off of a few nearby oaks and began toconstruct a glider She then climbed atop the tallest tree at her friendsrsquoden and sets sail for home landing safely at her hovel just as sheheard the first howl of the dark night She was safe safe indeed
In the preceding story all of the details concerning her activitiesthe building gliding landing and so on all serve as rhematicmaterial to fill out the picture of the text It is clear that thissection of text is about Sissy since she is the primary participantThe rheme is what allows the reader to know that the story istruly about not only Sissy but also her quick wit and her returnvoyage home
Briefly it is worth noting that following the application ofboth prime and subsequent analysis and theme and rhemeanalysis the two analyses may be cross examined for additionaland enlightening findings For example should a prime in aclause also be a theme then the theme is considered markedmeaning that the author chose to launch his clause with thetheme change72 This reflects the nature of language in that thespeaker has to make a choice regarding how to start a clauseSince language is necessarily syntagmatic and paradigmaticmdashlinear and oppositionalmdashonly one thing can be said at a timeTherefore the first chosen words that come out of the mouthmust be considered significant especially in the language ofGreek where word order is significantly more malleable than inEnglish although it is important to note that a linguistic choice isnot always conscious
To grasp how the idea of prime and theme work together hereis a small reiteration of Sissyrsquos story ldquoSissy was out late onenight at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that she would not be ableto return to the hovel before the werewolves came out for thenight she decided to employ her cunningrdquo Notice how the firstclause begins with ldquoSissyrdquo as both the prime and the thematic
72 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 100-101
48 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
participant There is no question as to whom the story pertainsHowever the prime in the following sentence is actually aparticiple adjunct material which sets the stage for the problemin the text Thus the kernel of truth from these first twosentences is that Sissy realizes she has a problem Without thecoupling of prime and theme such a realization could very wellbe missed by a casual reader or interpreter leading to amisunderstanding of character prominence73 The true beauty ofthese analyses therefore can be seen in the fact that they causethe analyst to slow down and appreciate the rhetoric within thetext itself
The importance of theme and rheme analysis cannot beunderstated for it is key in determining exactly what the authoris trying to communicate in a given pericope The thematic actorin a given process chain is the governing character in a multi-sentence portion of the text All of the information that iscircumstantial to the theme is the rheme and should be treated asadding additional information to the theme If one were toconfuse this then one would be in danger of putting words in theauthorrsquos mouth and mirror reading into the text Thereforetheme and rheme analysis is critical to providing the clearestpossible picture of a textrsquos message the bits of the text that theauthor considers most important which leads to the best possibleapplications for daily living
There are only two thematic units in Mark 21ndash12 (cf theappendix for a full theme-rheme analysis) The first thematic unitconsists of verses 1ndash5 In this unit the only explicit subject of aprocess chain that occurs in a primary clause is ποltοί (v 2)Mark has not chosen the most heavily marked theme optionsince ποltοί does not also occupy prime position in the clauseAlthough ὁ παραλυτικός occurs in the subject slot of clause 16 (v4) it occurs in a dependent clause thus it does not constitute athematic shift Ὁ Ἰησοῦς occurs in v 5 but it is part of asecondary embedded participial clause that serves as an adjunctin the primary clause and is therefore not a thematic shift The
73 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 104-105
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 49
only remaining possibility is αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι in clause 19 (v 5)however although it is subject in a primary clause it belongs toa stretch of reported speech and is thus not a thematic shift Thenext thematic unit begins at clause 20 (v 6) with τινες τῶνγραmicromicroατέων (not marked) and extends all the way through to theend of the unit (v 12) Again a number of other subjects occur inthe subsequent clauses but as in the first unit none of themqualifies as a thematic shift because either they occur as part ofreported speech or secondary clauses (embedded or standalone)
There are only a couple thematic units in Jude A few of thesewill be examined below to demonstrate what has been writtenabove The first of these examples comes from clause twelve
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸκρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειανκαὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
Here we have an example of an unmarked theme for thetheme is not prime in the clause Τινες ἄνθρωποι is the primaryparticipant of this clause The rest of the material is rhematic inthat it is giving additional information about these ldquocertainpeoplerdquo The most significant of the rhematic material here is theprocess associated with the subject on the primary clause levelThis process is παρεισέδυσαν essentially meaning that thesepeople have snuck in among them There are other processeshowever involved that are related back to the theme here whichform a process chain when taken together Some of thesepredicators are participles which associate variouscircumstantial bits with the theme provided Other verbs found inclauses 29ndash32 are also on the primary level which at leastinclude microιαίνουσιν ἀθετοῦσιν and βλασφηmicroοῦσιν Each of theseverbs is intensely negative in nature which supports theassertion that the author genuinely does not approve of theseindividuals at all
Now one might assert that these verbs should be rhematic forother subjects since there are indeed other subjects that theseverbs predicate However there is no explicit subject on theprimary clause level that signals a change in theme after τινες
50 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
ἄνθρωποι until Μιχαὴλ74 Since this is the case it cannot be saidthat any of these intermediate participants is thematic Thesecondary clauses embedded or otherwise cannot carry enoughweight to be thematic since they are additional information usedto support the primary material they follow
The second example comes from clause 40 Οὗτοι δὲ ὅσα microὲνοὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν In this example the theme is markedmeaning that the primary participant is also in the primeposition Since the author chose to present this theme as markedit likely has extra weight In this instance the marked theme isactually a reference back to the theme in clause twelve whichserves as the topic of the entire discourse Thus it is likely thatthe theme is marked as the author tries to reorient his audiencetoward himself as opposed to his adversaries
The final example comes from clause 67 καὶ τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶνλαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν In thisexample the subject is articulated and prime which makes thisan especially marked theme When the subject comes at thebeginning of the clause the subject is the leaping off point of theclause the first bit of information that flows out of the speakerOn top of all of this the author took the time to articulate thetheme which is not necessarily required in Greek All of theseelements work together to draw attention to the subject in subtleyet important ways It is possible that this theme is so marked asthe author wants to draw attention to the wicked speech thatspills forth from the mouths of τινες ἄνθρωποιmdashspeech to whichthe author clearly does not want his audience listening
5 Topic and Comment Analysis
Topic and comment analysis functions at the highest level ofdiscourse This level includes the clause complex paragraph and
74 The demonstrative pronoun οὗτοι in clause 29 does not signal a themechange because it is a reference back to the current theme τινες ἄνθρωποι Thiswould be similar to the use of a personal pronoun like ldquoherdquo He is a referentback to a governing term that has been established in most cases as is οὗτοι
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 51
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
This demonstrates the ldquoenablingrdquo or ldquorelevancerdquo role of thetextual metafunction namely to ldquopackagerdquo ideational andinterpersonal meanings into clauses in a way that is both relevantto and communicatively effective in light of its purpose That ishere it orients the readers to the context of the narrative Thus itis how text is being used in a given context (ie mode) thatgoverns the textual meanings that are made (ie textualmetafunction) which in turn govern the arrangements of theclause components in the realization of each clause (informationflow)
24 SummaryWe demonstrated thus far that both discourse structure andinformation flow are not merely the result of stylistic choicesmade by language users Rather structure and flow are largelygoverned by two different levels of context namely genre andregister With regard to discourse structure people deploylanguage in ways that are staged and oriented to various socialgoals The ways in which these social goals may beaccomplished with language are governed by the language userrsquosculture the staging or structure of the discourse reflects thesecultural constraints Information flow is constrained to someextent by variations in genre and to a greater extent by registervariablesmdashand of these mostly by mode The textualmetafunction arranges ideational and interpersonal meanings inways that from the language userrsquos perspective are relevant toand most effective in reaching the communicative goal of theclause in relation to the larger purpose of the text
3 Prime and Subsequent Analysis
We argued above that the role of the textual metafunction was toorganize ideational and interpersonal content into clauses in away that is relevant and consistent with register and that createsa coherent message Here we provide a framework for modelingclauses as messages and a method for interpreting thosemessages
42 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
The message of a clause consists of two parts ldquothe elementwhich serves as the point of departure of the messagerdquo and ldquotheremainder of the messagerdquo53 Although Halliday referred to theseparts as theme and rheme respectively we follow Porter andOrsquoDonnell and use the terms prime and subsequent reservingtheme and rheme for the discussion of thematic elements at thelevel of clause complex (sentence) and multi-clause complexlevel (see ldquoTheme and Rheme Analysisrdquo below)54 In the modelwe present here prime refers to ldquowho or what the clause isfocused upon realized by the first [word] group element in theclause The subsequent is defined as the development of theprime and is realized in the remaining group elements in theclauserdquo55 The prime functions to orient the reader to the messageof the clause and the subsequent provides the news about theprime that the writer wants the readers to know to experience orto remember56
Every clause has a prime element and most also have asubsequent though it is possible for a clause to consist only of aprime57 The word group element (ie subject predicatorcomplement or adjunct)58 comprising the prime may be assimple as a single word (conjunctions are excluded) or it may bea complex nominal or verbal group or even an embeddedclause59 Subsequent consists of all other word group elementsfollowing the prime For example the initial clause in Mark 21ndash12 is analyzed for prime and subsequent as follows (see theappendix for a full prime and subsequent analysis of this unit)
53 Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 37 Cf Porter andOrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 90
54 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9155 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 91 (italics theirs)56 Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2057 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 92 Dvorak
ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2058 Cf OrsquoDonnell Porter Reed Picirilli Smith and Tan ldquoClause Level
Annotation Specificationrdquo n p59 Cf Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 20
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 43
Prime SubsequentA [[P εἰσελθὼν |A πάλιν |A εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro |A δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ]] P ἠκούσθη
Markrsquos point of departure in this clause is an adjunct consistingof an embedded participial clause that realizes a temporalcontext for interpreting or understanding the subsequent whichconsists of the predicator (main verb)
The following clause from Mark 23 raises a crucial pointnamely that prime and subsequent analysis must be performedon the Greek text and not on a translation
Prime SubsequentP ἔρχονται A [[P φέροντες |A πρὸς αὐτὸν |C παραλυτικὸν [[P αἰρόmicroενον |A ὑπὸ
τεσσάρων ]] ]]
The prime of this clause is the predicator or verbal group InGreek finite verbs are monolectic which means theygrammaticalize person as part of their form through the use ofpersonal endings60 Thus it is not necessary for users of Greek tospecify explicitly a subject in a clause In fact the defaultunmarked option in biblical Greek is not to specify a subject61
However in many other languages like English for example thedefault unmarked option is to specify a subject This means ifprime and subsequent analysis is performed on an Englishtranslation it would label prime incorrectly In this particularinstance based on the English gloss ldquoThey comeare comingbringing to him a paralytic being carried by fourrdquo the primewould be ldquotheyrdquo However the actual prime is the processldquocomeare comingrdquo Thus Mark chose to begin with the material
60 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 71 Porter and OrsquoDonnell (DiscourseAnalysis 93) note that this gives the writer of Greek the flexibility to ldquo(1) notspecify a specific subject (2) specify the subject but not place it inprimary position or (3) specify the subject and place it in primary positionin the clause rdquo
61 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 93 n 148
44 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
process and to further develop it with circumstantial informationprovided by an embedded participial clause
It is often assumed that items in prime position are prominentsimply because they occupy prime position in the clause but thisis not the de facto case Determining prominence requiresconsideration of other factors including analyses of clauserealization patterns across the corpus of text written by the sameauthor (eg the Pauline epistles)62 as well as the entire NewTestament corpus and other factors such as literary genre Also tobe accounted for are features of markedness grounding andsalience63 Further research in this area is needed but it may befor example that because predicators fill prime position themajority of times across the New Testament saying that apredicator is prominent simply because it occupies primeposition in the clause would be to say too much64 That said theorder of word groups within a clause is indeed a factor indetermining prominence65
4 Theme and Rheme Analysis
Porter and OrsquoDonnell reserve the terms theme and rheme foridentifying and discussing the ldquothematic elements at the sentenceand multi-sentence levelrdquo66 This means the focus of our textualanalysis now shifts to the level above the clause When exploringtheme and rheme analysis it is important to define the terms
62 Cf Tan ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo 95ndash11063 Cf Westfall ldquoAnalysis of Prominence in Hellenistic Greekrdquo 75ndash9464 Dvorakrsquos analysis of the entire New Testament revealed that across
the entire New Testament predicators were prime 7227 times adjuncts 5767times subjects 5354 times and complements 2634 times Cf DvorakldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 25ndash26 Cf also Porter(ldquoProminencerdquo 71) who discusses patterns of order of first and second clausecomponents
65 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 67ndash6966 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 45
clearly to delineate the steps in analysis and to stress a numberof the important advantages to such an analysis
To begin one must have an understanding of the term processchain A process is any verbal action implied or inscribedwithin a clause a process chain refers to a string of verbalprocesses that form a series across a stretch of text67 This chainof processes is ascribed to a particular actor(s) who is said to bethe thematic actor Of course other participants and their actionsmay be interspersed in the same stretch of text but these do notnecessarily break the process chain associated with the thematicactor An easy example in English is as follows
Bobby went to the store There he was greeted by a clerk and thensearched for a loaf of bread When he found it however he decidedthat it was too expensive so he put it back on the shelf However anolder woman standing nearby decided she would take it Bobby thenleft the store and travelled to the Shop-For-Less down the road wherehe purchased the bread for a less expensive price
All of the verbs in this anecdote form a process chain andBobby is the primary participant Bobby went searched founddecided put left travelled and purchased Notice as well thatthe additional processes performed by the clerk and the olderwoman do not break the chain as it follows Bobby for theiractions are clearly secondary information and reactionarythroughout Bobbyrsquos story
This story provides an excellent segue to the notion of themeTheme in narrative is best seen through the transition and changeof a participant as a primary actor in a process chainmdashwhat isusually called the thematic actor68 In other words a theme is thetransition from one thematic actor to another or a change inparticipant involvement that breaks a process chain That beingsaid the thematic actor must be an explicit subject meaning thatthe actor cannot merely be implied from a verb This does notmean however that the thematic actor must be prime or evenarticulated Indeed the thematic actor can be anarthrous or
67 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9868 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
46 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
articulated prime or subsequent Provided the thematic actor isarticulated this actor can be said to be more emphatic Moreemphatic still is when the thematic actor also occupies the primeposition in the clause69 Such a theme is said to be marked andshould be noted as a potential boundary marker for a shift indiscourse topic which will be discussed more thoroughly below
Interestingly enough the thematic actor can actually bepassive which suggests that more refined language is needed infuture formulations of theme and rheme analyses The followingbrief narrative concerning a shirt demonstrates the shortcomingsof ldquoactorrdquo language
Cindyrsquos shirt was stained by an ice cream cone The shirt then had tobe tossed into the washing machine which soaked it for twentyminutes The shirt then was brought out of the wash and was placedinto the dryer for a sixty-minute tumble Finally the shirt wasremoved by Cindy and hung on the drying rack
Clearly the narrative is about the shirt It is the theme of the taleeven though it is not truly an actor in any instance Perhaps thelanguage of ldquoprimary participantrdquo could be more helpful and lessmisleading
Moving onto clausal considerations the thematic participantmust be in a primary clause or on clause level α in the OpenText model70 Any participant found in a secondary clause hasbeen rank-shifted down to level β and therefore plays asubordinate role to the circumstances of the primary clauseObviously then a subordinated participant cannot serve as theprimary participant
Lastly one must consider the concept of rhememdashtheadditional information regarding the current thematicparticipant71 which is also understood as the extensivecircumstantial information involved in a process chain Considerthe story of a young elf
69 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98-9970 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10371 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 47
Sissy was out late one night at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that shewould not be able to return to the hovel before the werewolves cameout for the night she decided to employ her cunning Acting quicklyshe pulled leaves and twigs off of a few nearby oaks and began toconstruct a glider She then climbed atop the tallest tree at her friendsrsquoden and sets sail for home landing safely at her hovel just as sheheard the first howl of the dark night She was safe safe indeed
In the preceding story all of the details concerning her activitiesthe building gliding landing and so on all serve as rhematicmaterial to fill out the picture of the text It is clear that thissection of text is about Sissy since she is the primary participantThe rheme is what allows the reader to know that the story istruly about not only Sissy but also her quick wit and her returnvoyage home
Briefly it is worth noting that following the application ofboth prime and subsequent analysis and theme and rhemeanalysis the two analyses may be cross examined for additionaland enlightening findings For example should a prime in aclause also be a theme then the theme is considered markedmeaning that the author chose to launch his clause with thetheme change72 This reflects the nature of language in that thespeaker has to make a choice regarding how to start a clauseSince language is necessarily syntagmatic and paradigmaticmdashlinear and oppositionalmdashonly one thing can be said at a timeTherefore the first chosen words that come out of the mouthmust be considered significant especially in the language ofGreek where word order is significantly more malleable than inEnglish although it is important to note that a linguistic choice isnot always conscious
To grasp how the idea of prime and theme work together hereis a small reiteration of Sissyrsquos story ldquoSissy was out late onenight at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that she would not be ableto return to the hovel before the werewolves came out for thenight she decided to employ her cunningrdquo Notice how the firstclause begins with ldquoSissyrdquo as both the prime and the thematic
72 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 100-101
48 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
participant There is no question as to whom the story pertainsHowever the prime in the following sentence is actually aparticiple adjunct material which sets the stage for the problemin the text Thus the kernel of truth from these first twosentences is that Sissy realizes she has a problem Without thecoupling of prime and theme such a realization could very wellbe missed by a casual reader or interpreter leading to amisunderstanding of character prominence73 The true beauty ofthese analyses therefore can be seen in the fact that they causethe analyst to slow down and appreciate the rhetoric within thetext itself
The importance of theme and rheme analysis cannot beunderstated for it is key in determining exactly what the authoris trying to communicate in a given pericope The thematic actorin a given process chain is the governing character in a multi-sentence portion of the text All of the information that iscircumstantial to the theme is the rheme and should be treated asadding additional information to the theme If one were toconfuse this then one would be in danger of putting words in theauthorrsquos mouth and mirror reading into the text Thereforetheme and rheme analysis is critical to providing the clearestpossible picture of a textrsquos message the bits of the text that theauthor considers most important which leads to the best possibleapplications for daily living
There are only two thematic units in Mark 21ndash12 (cf theappendix for a full theme-rheme analysis) The first thematic unitconsists of verses 1ndash5 In this unit the only explicit subject of aprocess chain that occurs in a primary clause is ποltοί (v 2)Mark has not chosen the most heavily marked theme optionsince ποltοί does not also occupy prime position in the clauseAlthough ὁ παραλυτικός occurs in the subject slot of clause 16 (v4) it occurs in a dependent clause thus it does not constitute athematic shift Ὁ Ἰησοῦς occurs in v 5 but it is part of asecondary embedded participial clause that serves as an adjunctin the primary clause and is therefore not a thematic shift The
73 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 104-105
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 49
only remaining possibility is αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι in clause 19 (v 5)however although it is subject in a primary clause it belongs toa stretch of reported speech and is thus not a thematic shift Thenext thematic unit begins at clause 20 (v 6) with τινες τῶνγραmicromicroατέων (not marked) and extends all the way through to theend of the unit (v 12) Again a number of other subjects occur inthe subsequent clauses but as in the first unit none of themqualifies as a thematic shift because either they occur as part ofreported speech or secondary clauses (embedded or standalone)
There are only a couple thematic units in Jude A few of thesewill be examined below to demonstrate what has been writtenabove The first of these examples comes from clause twelve
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸκρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειανκαὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
Here we have an example of an unmarked theme for thetheme is not prime in the clause Τινες ἄνθρωποι is the primaryparticipant of this clause The rest of the material is rhematic inthat it is giving additional information about these ldquocertainpeoplerdquo The most significant of the rhematic material here is theprocess associated with the subject on the primary clause levelThis process is παρεισέδυσαν essentially meaning that thesepeople have snuck in among them There are other processeshowever involved that are related back to the theme here whichform a process chain when taken together Some of thesepredicators are participles which associate variouscircumstantial bits with the theme provided Other verbs found inclauses 29ndash32 are also on the primary level which at leastinclude microιαίνουσιν ἀθετοῦσιν and βλασφηmicroοῦσιν Each of theseverbs is intensely negative in nature which supports theassertion that the author genuinely does not approve of theseindividuals at all
Now one might assert that these verbs should be rhematic forother subjects since there are indeed other subjects that theseverbs predicate However there is no explicit subject on theprimary clause level that signals a change in theme after τινες
50 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
ἄνθρωποι until Μιχαὴλ74 Since this is the case it cannot be saidthat any of these intermediate participants is thematic Thesecondary clauses embedded or otherwise cannot carry enoughweight to be thematic since they are additional information usedto support the primary material they follow
The second example comes from clause 40 Οὗτοι δὲ ὅσα microὲνοὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν In this example the theme is markedmeaning that the primary participant is also in the primeposition Since the author chose to present this theme as markedit likely has extra weight In this instance the marked theme isactually a reference back to the theme in clause twelve whichserves as the topic of the entire discourse Thus it is likely thatthe theme is marked as the author tries to reorient his audiencetoward himself as opposed to his adversaries
The final example comes from clause 67 καὶ τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶνλαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν In thisexample the subject is articulated and prime which makes thisan especially marked theme When the subject comes at thebeginning of the clause the subject is the leaping off point of theclause the first bit of information that flows out of the speakerOn top of all of this the author took the time to articulate thetheme which is not necessarily required in Greek All of theseelements work together to draw attention to the subject in subtleyet important ways It is possible that this theme is so marked asthe author wants to draw attention to the wicked speech thatspills forth from the mouths of τινες ἄνθρωποιmdashspeech to whichthe author clearly does not want his audience listening
5 Topic and Comment Analysis
Topic and comment analysis functions at the highest level ofdiscourse This level includes the clause complex paragraph and
74 The demonstrative pronoun οὗτοι in clause 29 does not signal a themechange because it is a reference back to the current theme τινες ἄνθρωποι Thiswould be similar to the use of a personal pronoun like ldquoherdquo He is a referentback to a governing term that has been established in most cases as is οὗτοι
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 51
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
The message of a clause consists of two parts ldquothe elementwhich serves as the point of departure of the messagerdquo and ldquotheremainder of the messagerdquo53 Although Halliday referred to theseparts as theme and rheme respectively we follow Porter andOrsquoDonnell and use the terms prime and subsequent reservingtheme and rheme for the discussion of thematic elements at thelevel of clause complex (sentence) and multi-clause complexlevel (see ldquoTheme and Rheme Analysisrdquo below)54 In the modelwe present here prime refers to ldquowho or what the clause isfocused upon realized by the first [word] group element in theclause The subsequent is defined as the development of theprime and is realized in the remaining group elements in theclauserdquo55 The prime functions to orient the reader to the messageof the clause and the subsequent provides the news about theprime that the writer wants the readers to know to experience orto remember56
Every clause has a prime element and most also have asubsequent though it is possible for a clause to consist only of aprime57 The word group element (ie subject predicatorcomplement or adjunct)58 comprising the prime may be assimple as a single word (conjunctions are excluded) or it may bea complex nominal or verbal group or even an embeddedclause59 Subsequent consists of all other word group elementsfollowing the prime For example the initial clause in Mark 21ndash12 is analyzed for prime and subsequent as follows (see theappendix for a full prime and subsequent analysis of this unit)
53 Halliday Introduction to Functional Grammar 37 Cf Porter andOrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 90
54 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9155 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 91 (italics theirs)56 Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2057 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 92 Dvorak
ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 2058 Cf OrsquoDonnell Porter Reed Picirilli Smith and Tan ldquoClause Level
Annotation Specificationrdquo n p59 Cf Dvorak ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 20
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 43
Prime SubsequentA [[P εἰσελθὼν |A πάλιν |A εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro |A δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ]] P ἠκούσθη
Markrsquos point of departure in this clause is an adjunct consistingof an embedded participial clause that realizes a temporalcontext for interpreting or understanding the subsequent whichconsists of the predicator (main verb)
The following clause from Mark 23 raises a crucial pointnamely that prime and subsequent analysis must be performedon the Greek text and not on a translation
Prime SubsequentP ἔρχονται A [[P φέροντες |A πρὸς αὐτὸν |C παραλυτικὸν [[P αἰρόmicroενον |A ὑπὸ
τεσσάρων ]] ]]
The prime of this clause is the predicator or verbal group InGreek finite verbs are monolectic which means theygrammaticalize person as part of their form through the use ofpersonal endings60 Thus it is not necessary for users of Greek tospecify explicitly a subject in a clause In fact the defaultunmarked option in biblical Greek is not to specify a subject61
However in many other languages like English for example thedefault unmarked option is to specify a subject This means ifprime and subsequent analysis is performed on an Englishtranslation it would label prime incorrectly In this particularinstance based on the English gloss ldquoThey comeare comingbringing to him a paralytic being carried by fourrdquo the primewould be ldquotheyrdquo However the actual prime is the processldquocomeare comingrdquo Thus Mark chose to begin with the material
60 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 71 Porter and OrsquoDonnell (DiscourseAnalysis 93) note that this gives the writer of Greek the flexibility to ldquo(1) notspecify a specific subject (2) specify the subject but not place it inprimary position or (3) specify the subject and place it in primary positionin the clause rdquo
61 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 93 n 148
44 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
process and to further develop it with circumstantial informationprovided by an embedded participial clause
It is often assumed that items in prime position are prominentsimply because they occupy prime position in the clause but thisis not the de facto case Determining prominence requiresconsideration of other factors including analyses of clauserealization patterns across the corpus of text written by the sameauthor (eg the Pauline epistles)62 as well as the entire NewTestament corpus and other factors such as literary genre Also tobe accounted for are features of markedness grounding andsalience63 Further research in this area is needed but it may befor example that because predicators fill prime position themajority of times across the New Testament saying that apredicator is prominent simply because it occupies primeposition in the clause would be to say too much64 That said theorder of word groups within a clause is indeed a factor indetermining prominence65
4 Theme and Rheme Analysis
Porter and OrsquoDonnell reserve the terms theme and rheme foridentifying and discussing the ldquothematic elements at the sentenceand multi-sentence levelrdquo66 This means the focus of our textualanalysis now shifts to the level above the clause When exploringtheme and rheme analysis it is important to define the terms
62 Cf Tan ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo 95ndash11063 Cf Westfall ldquoAnalysis of Prominence in Hellenistic Greekrdquo 75ndash9464 Dvorakrsquos analysis of the entire New Testament revealed that across
the entire New Testament predicators were prime 7227 times adjuncts 5767times subjects 5354 times and complements 2634 times Cf DvorakldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 25ndash26 Cf also Porter(ldquoProminencerdquo 71) who discusses patterns of order of first and second clausecomponents
65 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 67ndash6966 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 45
clearly to delineate the steps in analysis and to stress a numberof the important advantages to such an analysis
To begin one must have an understanding of the term processchain A process is any verbal action implied or inscribedwithin a clause a process chain refers to a string of verbalprocesses that form a series across a stretch of text67 This chainof processes is ascribed to a particular actor(s) who is said to bethe thematic actor Of course other participants and their actionsmay be interspersed in the same stretch of text but these do notnecessarily break the process chain associated with the thematicactor An easy example in English is as follows
Bobby went to the store There he was greeted by a clerk and thensearched for a loaf of bread When he found it however he decidedthat it was too expensive so he put it back on the shelf However anolder woman standing nearby decided she would take it Bobby thenleft the store and travelled to the Shop-For-Less down the road wherehe purchased the bread for a less expensive price
All of the verbs in this anecdote form a process chain andBobby is the primary participant Bobby went searched founddecided put left travelled and purchased Notice as well thatthe additional processes performed by the clerk and the olderwoman do not break the chain as it follows Bobby for theiractions are clearly secondary information and reactionarythroughout Bobbyrsquos story
This story provides an excellent segue to the notion of themeTheme in narrative is best seen through the transition and changeof a participant as a primary actor in a process chainmdashwhat isusually called the thematic actor68 In other words a theme is thetransition from one thematic actor to another or a change inparticipant involvement that breaks a process chain That beingsaid the thematic actor must be an explicit subject meaning thatthe actor cannot merely be implied from a verb This does notmean however that the thematic actor must be prime or evenarticulated Indeed the thematic actor can be anarthrous or
67 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9868 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
46 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
articulated prime or subsequent Provided the thematic actor isarticulated this actor can be said to be more emphatic Moreemphatic still is when the thematic actor also occupies the primeposition in the clause69 Such a theme is said to be marked andshould be noted as a potential boundary marker for a shift indiscourse topic which will be discussed more thoroughly below
Interestingly enough the thematic actor can actually bepassive which suggests that more refined language is needed infuture formulations of theme and rheme analyses The followingbrief narrative concerning a shirt demonstrates the shortcomingsof ldquoactorrdquo language
Cindyrsquos shirt was stained by an ice cream cone The shirt then had tobe tossed into the washing machine which soaked it for twentyminutes The shirt then was brought out of the wash and was placedinto the dryer for a sixty-minute tumble Finally the shirt wasremoved by Cindy and hung on the drying rack
Clearly the narrative is about the shirt It is the theme of the taleeven though it is not truly an actor in any instance Perhaps thelanguage of ldquoprimary participantrdquo could be more helpful and lessmisleading
Moving onto clausal considerations the thematic participantmust be in a primary clause or on clause level α in the OpenText model70 Any participant found in a secondary clause hasbeen rank-shifted down to level β and therefore plays asubordinate role to the circumstances of the primary clauseObviously then a subordinated participant cannot serve as theprimary participant
Lastly one must consider the concept of rhememdashtheadditional information regarding the current thematicparticipant71 which is also understood as the extensivecircumstantial information involved in a process chain Considerthe story of a young elf
69 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98-9970 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10371 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 47
Sissy was out late one night at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that shewould not be able to return to the hovel before the werewolves cameout for the night she decided to employ her cunning Acting quicklyshe pulled leaves and twigs off of a few nearby oaks and began toconstruct a glider She then climbed atop the tallest tree at her friendsrsquoden and sets sail for home landing safely at her hovel just as sheheard the first howl of the dark night She was safe safe indeed
In the preceding story all of the details concerning her activitiesthe building gliding landing and so on all serve as rhematicmaterial to fill out the picture of the text It is clear that thissection of text is about Sissy since she is the primary participantThe rheme is what allows the reader to know that the story istruly about not only Sissy but also her quick wit and her returnvoyage home
Briefly it is worth noting that following the application ofboth prime and subsequent analysis and theme and rhemeanalysis the two analyses may be cross examined for additionaland enlightening findings For example should a prime in aclause also be a theme then the theme is considered markedmeaning that the author chose to launch his clause with thetheme change72 This reflects the nature of language in that thespeaker has to make a choice regarding how to start a clauseSince language is necessarily syntagmatic and paradigmaticmdashlinear and oppositionalmdashonly one thing can be said at a timeTherefore the first chosen words that come out of the mouthmust be considered significant especially in the language ofGreek where word order is significantly more malleable than inEnglish although it is important to note that a linguistic choice isnot always conscious
To grasp how the idea of prime and theme work together hereis a small reiteration of Sissyrsquos story ldquoSissy was out late onenight at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that she would not be ableto return to the hovel before the werewolves came out for thenight she decided to employ her cunningrdquo Notice how the firstclause begins with ldquoSissyrdquo as both the prime and the thematic
72 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 100-101
48 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
participant There is no question as to whom the story pertainsHowever the prime in the following sentence is actually aparticiple adjunct material which sets the stage for the problemin the text Thus the kernel of truth from these first twosentences is that Sissy realizes she has a problem Without thecoupling of prime and theme such a realization could very wellbe missed by a casual reader or interpreter leading to amisunderstanding of character prominence73 The true beauty ofthese analyses therefore can be seen in the fact that they causethe analyst to slow down and appreciate the rhetoric within thetext itself
The importance of theme and rheme analysis cannot beunderstated for it is key in determining exactly what the authoris trying to communicate in a given pericope The thematic actorin a given process chain is the governing character in a multi-sentence portion of the text All of the information that iscircumstantial to the theme is the rheme and should be treated asadding additional information to the theme If one were toconfuse this then one would be in danger of putting words in theauthorrsquos mouth and mirror reading into the text Thereforetheme and rheme analysis is critical to providing the clearestpossible picture of a textrsquos message the bits of the text that theauthor considers most important which leads to the best possibleapplications for daily living
There are only two thematic units in Mark 21ndash12 (cf theappendix for a full theme-rheme analysis) The first thematic unitconsists of verses 1ndash5 In this unit the only explicit subject of aprocess chain that occurs in a primary clause is ποltοί (v 2)Mark has not chosen the most heavily marked theme optionsince ποltοί does not also occupy prime position in the clauseAlthough ὁ παραλυτικός occurs in the subject slot of clause 16 (v4) it occurs in a dependent clause thus it does not constitute athematic shift Ὁ Ἰησοῦς occurs in v 5 but it is part of asecondary embedded participial clause that serves as an adjunctin the primary clause and is therefore not a thematic shift The
73 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 104-105
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 49
only remaining possibility is αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι in clause 19 (v 5)however although it is subject in a primary clause it belongs toa stretch of reported speech and is thus not a thematic shift Thenext thematic unit begins at clause 20 (v 6) with τινες τῶνγραmicromicroατέων (not marked) and extends all the way through to theend of the unit (v 12) Again a number of other subjects occur inthe subsequent clauses but as in the first unit none of themqualifies as a thematic shift because either they occur as part ofreported speech or secondary clauses (embedded or standalone)
There are only a couple thematic units in Jude A few of thesewill be examined below to demonstrate what has been writtenabove The first of these examples comes from clause twelve
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸκρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειανκαὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
Here we have an example of an unmarked theme for thetheme is not prime in the clause Τινες ἄνθρωποι is the primaryparticipant of this clause The rest of the material is rhematic inthat it is giving additional information about these ldquocertainpeoplerdquo The most significant of the rhematic material here is theprocess associated with the subject on the primary clause levelThis process is παρεισέδυσαν essentially meaning that thesepeople have snuck in among them There are other processeshowever involved that are related back to the theme here whichform a process chain when taken together Some of thesepredicators are participles which associate variouscircumstantial bits with the theme provided Other verbs found inclauses 29ndash32 are also on the primary level which at leastinclude microιαίνουσιν ἀθετοῦσιν and βλασφηmicroοῦσιν Each of theseverbs is intensely negative in nature which supports theassertion that the author genuinely does not approve of theseindividuals at all
Now one might assert that these verbs should be rhematic forother subjects since there are indeed other subjects that theseverbs predicate However there is no explicit subject on theprimary clause level that signals a change in theme after τινες
50 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
ἄνθρωποι until Μιχαὴλ74 Since this is the case it cannot be saidthat any of these intermediate participants is thematic Thesecondary clauses embedded or otherwise cannot carry enoughweight to be thematic since they are additional information usedto support the primary material they follow
The second example comes from clause 40 Οὗτοι δὲ ὅσα microὲνοὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν In this example the theme is markedmeaning that the primary participant is also in the primeposition Since the author chose to present this theme as markedit likely has extra weight In this instance the marked theme isactually a reference back to the theme in clause twelve whichserves as the topic of the entire discourse Thus it is likely thatthe theme is marked as the author tries to reorient his audiencetoward himself as opposed to his adversaries
The final example comes from clause 67 καὶ τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶνλαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν In thisexample the subject is articulated and prime which makes thisan especially marked theme When the subject comes at thebeginning of the clause the subject is the leaping off point of theclause the first bit of information that flows out of the speakerOn top of all of this the author took the time to articulate thetheme which is not necessarily required in Greek All of theseelements work together to draw attention to the subject in subtleyet important ways It is possible that this theme is so marked asthe author wants to draw attention to the wicked speech thatspills forth from the mouths of τινες ἄνθρωποιmdashspeech to whichthe author clearly does not want his audience listening
5 Topic and Comment Analysis
Topic and comment analysis functions at the highest level ofdiscourse This level includes the clause complex paragraph and
74 The demonstrative pronoun οὗτοι in clause 29 does not signal a themechange because it is a reference back to the current theme τινες ἄνθρωποι Thiswould be similar to the use of a personal pronoun like ldquoherdquo He is a referentback to a governing term that has been established in most cases as is οὗτοι
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 51
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
Prime SubsequentA [[P εἰσελθὼν |A πάλιν |A εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro |A δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ]] P ἠκούσθη
Markrsquos point of departure in this clause is an adjunct consistingof an embedded participial clause that realizes a temporalcontext for interpreting or understanding the subsequent whichconsists of the predicator (main verb)
The following clause from Mark 23 raises a crucial pointnamely that prime and subsequent analysis must be performedon the Greek text and not on a translation
Prime SubsequentP ἔρχονται A [[P φέροντες |A πρὸς αὐτὸν |C παραλυτικὸν [[P αἰρόmicroενον |A ὑπὸ
τεσσάρων ]] ]]
The prime of this clause is the predicator or verbal group InGreek finite verbs are monolectic which means theygrammaticalize person as part of their form through the use ofpersonal endings60 Thus it is not necessary for users of Greek tospecify explicitly a subject in a clause In fact the defaultunmarked option in biblical Greek is not to specify a subject61
However in many other languages like English for example thedefault unmarked option is to specify a subject This means ifprime and subsequent analysis is performed on an Englishtranslation it would label prime incorrectly In this particularinstance based on the English gloss ldquoThey comeare comingbringing to him a paralytic being carried by fourrdquo the primewould be ldquotheyrdquo However the actual prime is the processldquocomeare comingrdquo Thus Mark chose to begin with the material
60 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 71 Porter and OrsquoDonnell (DiscourseAnalysis 93) note that this gives the writer of Greek the flexibility to ldquo(1) notspecify a specific subject (2) specify the subject but not place it inprimary position or (3) specify the subject and place it in primary positionin the clause rdquo
61 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 93 n 148
44 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
process and to further develop it with circumstantial informationprovided by an embedded participial clause
It is often assumed that items in prime position are prominentsimply because they occupy prime position in the clause but thisis not the de facto case Determining prominence requiresconsideration of other factors including analyses of clauserealization patterns across the corpus of text written by the sameauthor (eg the Pauline epistles)62 as well as the entire NewTestament corpus and other factors such as literary genre Also tobe accounted for are features of markedness grounding andsalience63 Further research in this area is needed but it may befor example that because predicators fill prime position themajority of times across the New Testament saying that apredicator is prominent simply because it occupies primeposition in the clause would be to say too much64 That said theorder of word groups within a clause is indeed a factor indetermining prominence65
4 Theme and Rheme Analysis
Porter and OrsquoDonnell reserve the terms theme and rheme foridentifying and discussing the ldquothematic elements at the sentenceand multi-sentence levelrdquo66 This means the focus of our textualanalysis now shifts to the level above the clause When exploringtheme and rheme analysis it is important to define the terms
62 Cf Tan ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo 95ndash11063 Cf Westfall ldquoAnalysis of Prominence in Hellenistic Greekrdquo 75ndash9464 Dvorakrsquos analysis of the entire New Testament revealed that across
the entire New Testament predicators were prime 7227 times adjuncts 5767times subjects 5354 times and complements 2634 times Cf DvorakldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 25ndash26 Cf also Porter(ldquoProminencerdquo 71) who discusses patterns of order of first and second clausecomponents
65 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 67ndash6966 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 45
clearly to delineate the steps in analysis and to stress a numberof the important advantages to such an analysis
To begin one must have an understanding of the term processchain A process is any verbal action implied or inscribedwithin a clause a process chain refers to a string of verbalprocesses that form a series across a stretch of text67 This chainof processes is ascribed to a particular actor(s) who is said to bethe thematic actor Of course other participants and their actionsmay be interspersed in the same stretch of text but these do notnecessarily break the process chain associated with the thematicactor An easy example in English is as follows
Bobby went to the store There he was greeted by a clerk and thensearched for a loaf of bread When he found it however he decidedthat it was too expensive so he put it back on the shelf However anolder woman standing nearby decided she would take it Bobby thenleft the store and travelled to the Shop-For-Less down the road wherehe purchased the bread for a less expensive price
All of the verbs in this anecdote form a process chain andBobby is the primary participant Bobby went searched founddecided put left travelled and purchased Notice as well thatthe additional processes performed by the clerk and the olderwoman do not break the chain as it follows Bobby for theiractions are clearly secondary information and reactionarythroughout Bobbyrsquos story
This story provides an excellent segue to the notion of themeTheme in narrative is best seen through the transition and changeof a participant as a primary actor in a process chainmdashwhat isusually called the thematic actor68 In other words a theme is thetransition from one thematic actor to another or a change inparticipant involvement that breaks a process chain That beingsaid the thematic actor must be an explicit subject meaning thatthe actor cannot merely be implied from a verb This does notmean however that the thematic actor must be prime or evenarticulated Indeed the thematic actor can be anarthrous or
67 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9868 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
46 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
articulated prime or subsequent Provided the thematic actor isarticulated this actor can be said to be more emphatic Moreemphatic still is when the thematic actor also occupies the primeposition in the clause69 Such a theme is said to be marked andshould be noted as a potential boundary marker for a shift indiscourse topic which will be discussed more thoroughly below
Interestingly enough the thematic actor can actually bepassive which suggests that more refined language is needed infuture formulations of theme and rheme analyses The followingbrief narrative concerning a shirt demonstrates the shortcomingsof ldquoactorrdquo language
Cindyrsquos shirt was stained by an ice cream cone The shirt then had tobe tossed into the washing machine which soaked it for twentyminutes The shirt then was brought out of the wash and was placedinto the dryer for a sixty-minute tumble Finally the shirt wasremoved by Cindy and hung on the drying rack
Clearly the narrative is about the shirt It is the theme of the taleeven though it is not truly an actor in any instance Perhaps thelanguage of ldquoprimary participantrdquo could be more helpful and lessmisleading
Moving onto clausal considerations the thematic participantmust be in a primary clause or on clause level α in the OpenText model70 Any participant found in a secondary clause hasbeen rank-shifted down to level β and therefore plays asubordinate role to the circumstances of the primary clauseObviously then a subordinated participant cannot serve as theprimary participant
Lastly one must consider the concept of rhememdashtheadditional information regarding the current thematicparticipant71 which is also understood as the extensivecircumstantial information involved in a process chain Considerthe story of a young elf
69 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98-9970 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10371 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 47
Sissy was out late one night at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that shewould not be able to return to the hovel before the werewolves cameout for the night she decided to employ her cunning Acting quicklyshe pulled leaves and twigs off of a few nearby oaks and began toconstruct a glider She then climbed atop the tallest tree at her friendsrsquoden and sets sail for home landing safely at her hovel just as sheheard the first howl of the dark night She was safe safe indeed
In the preceding story all of the details concerning her activitiesthe building gliding landing and so on all serve as rhematicmaterial to fill out the picture of the text It is clear that thissection of text is about Sissy since she is the primary participantThe rheme is what allows the reader to know that the story istruly about not only Sissy but also her quick wit and her returnvoyage home
Briefly it is worth noting that following the application ofboth prime and subsequent analysis and theme and rhemeanalysis the two analyses may be cross examined for additionaland enlightening findings For example should a prime in aclause also be a theme then the theme is considered markedmeaning that the author chose to launch his clause with thetheme change72 This reflects the nature of language in that thespeaker has to make a choice regarding how to start a clauseSince language is necessarily syntagmatic and paradigmaticmdashlinear and oppositionalmdashonly one thing can be said at a timeTherefore the first chosen words that come out of the mouthmust be considered significant especially in the language ofGreek where word order is significantly more malleable than inEnglish although it is important to note that a linguistic choice isnot always conscious
To grasp how the idea of prime and theme work together hereis a small reiteration of Sissyrsquos story ldquoSissy was out late onenight at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that she would not be ableto return to the hovel before the werewolves came out for thenight she decided to employ her cunningrdquo Notice how the firstclause begins with ldquoSissyrdquo as both the prime and the thematic
72 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 100-101
48 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
participant There is no question as to whom the story pertainsHowever the prime in the following sentence is actually aparticiple adjunct material which sets the stage for the problemin the text Thus the kernel of truth from these first twosentences is that Sissy realizes she has a problem Without thecoupling of prime and theme such a realization could very wellbe missed by a casual reader or interpreter leading to amisunderstanding of character prominence73 The true beauty ofthese analyses therefore can be seen in the fact that they causethe analyst to slow down and appreciate the rhetoric within thetext itself
The importance of theme and rheme analysis cannot beunderstated for it is key in determining exactly what the authoris trying to communicate in a given pericope The thematic actorin a given process chain is the governing character in a multi-sentence portion of the text All of the information that iscircumstantial to the theme is the rheme and should be treated asadding additional information to the theme If one were toconfuse this then one would be in danger of putting words in theauthorrsquos mouth and mirror reading into the text Thereforetheme and rheme analysis is critical to providing the clearestpossible picture of a textrsquos message the bits of the text that theauthor considers most important which leads to the best possibleapplications for daily living
There are only two thematic units in Mark 21ndash12 (cf theappendix for a full theme-rheme analysis) The first thematic unitconsists of verses 1ndash5 In this unit the only explicit subject of aprocess chain that occurs in a primary clause is ποltοί (v 2)Mark has not chosen the most heavily marked theme optionsince ποltοί does not also occupy prime position in the clauseAlthough ὁ παραλυτικός occurs in the subject slot of clause 16 (v4) it occurs in a dependent clause thus it does not constitute athematic shift Ὁ Ἰησοῦς occurs in v 5 but it is part of asecondary embedded participial clause that serves as an adjunctin the primary clause and is therefore not a thematic shift The
73 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 104-105
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 49
only remaining possibility is αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι in clause 19 (v 5)however although it is subject in a primary clause it belongs toa stretch of reported speech and is thus not a thematic shift Thenext thematic unit begins at clause 20 (v 6) with τινες τῶνγραmicromicroατέων (not marked) and extends all the way through to theend of the unit (v 12) Again a number of other subjects occur inthe subsequent clauses but as in the first unit none of themqualifies as a thematic shift because either they occur as part ofreported speech or secondary clauses (embedded or standalone)
There are only a couple thematic units in Jude A few of thesewill be examined below to demonstrate what has been writtenabove The first of these examples comes from clause twelve
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸκρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειανκαὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
Here we have an example of an unmarked theme for thetheme is not prime in the clause Τινες ἄνθρωποι is the primaryparticipant of this clause The rest of the material is rhematic inthat it is giving additional information about these ldquocertainpeoplerdquo The most significant of the rhematic material here is theprocess associated with the subject on the primary clause levelThis process is παρεισέδυσαν essentially meaning that thesepeople have snuck in among them There are other processeshowever involved that are related back to the theme here whichform a process chain when taken together Some of thesepredicators are participles which associate variouscircumstantial bits with the theme provided Other verbs found inclauses 29ndash32 are also on the primary level which at leastinclude microιαίνουσιν ἀθετοῦσιν and βλασφηmicroοῦσιν Each of theseverbs is intensely negative in nature which supports theassertion that the author genuinely does not approve of theseindividuals at all
Now one might assert that these verbs should be rhematic forother subjects since there are indeed other subjects that theseverbs predicate However there is no explicit subject on theprimary clause level that signals a change in theme after τινες
50 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
ἄνθρωποι until Μιχαὴλ74 Since this is the case it cannot be saidthat any of these intermediate participants is thematic Thesecondary clauses embedded or otherwise cannot carry enoughweight to be thematic since they are additional information usedto support the primary material they follow
The second example comes from clause 40 Οὗτοι δὲ ὅσα microὲνοὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν In this example the theme is markedmeaning that the primary participant is also in the primeposition Since the author chose to present this theme as markedit likely has extra weight In this instance the marked theme isactually a reference back to the theme in clause twelve whichserves as the topic of the entire discourse Thus it is likely thatthe theme is marked as the author tries to reorient his audiencetoward himself as opposed to his adversaries
The final example comes from clause 67 καὶ τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶνλαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν In thisexample the subject is articulated and prime which makes thisan especially marked theme When the subject comes at thebeginning of the clause the subject is the leaping off point of theclause the first bit of information that flows out of the speakerOn top of all of this the author took the time to articulate thetheme which is not necessarily required in Greek All of theseelements work together to draw attention to the subject in subtleyet important ways It is possible that this theme is so marked asthe author wants to draw attention to the wicked speech thatspills forth from the mouths of τινες ἄνθρωποιmdashspeech to whichthe author clearly does not want his audience listening
5 Topic and Comment Analysis
Topic and comment analysis functions at the highest level ofdiscourse This level includes the clause complex paragraph and
74 The demonstrative pronoun οὗτοι in clause 29 does not signal a themechange because it is a reference back to the current theme τινες ἄνθρωποι Thiswould be similar to the use of a personal pronoun like ldquoherdquo He is a referentback to a governing term that has been established in most cases as is οὗτοι
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 51
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
process and to further develop it with circumstantial informationprovided by an embedded participial clause
It is often assumed that items in prime position are prominentsimply because they occupy prime position in the clause but thisis not the de facto case Determining prominence requiresconsideration of other factors including analyses of clauserealization patterns across the corpus of text written by the sameauthor (eg the Pauline epistles)62 as well as the entire NewTestament corpus and other factors such as literary genre Also tobe accounted for are features of markedness grounding andsalience63 Further research in this area is needed but it may befor example that because predicators fill prime position themajority of times across the New Testament saying that apredicator is prominent simply because it occupies primeposition in the clause would be to say too much64 That said theorder of word groups within a clause is indeed a factor indetermining prominence65
4 Theme and Rheme Analysis
Porter and OrsquoDonnell reserve the terms theme and rheme foridentifying and discussing the ldquothematic elements at the sentenceand multi-sentence levelrdquo66 This means the focus of our textualanalysis now shifts to the level above the clause When exploringtheme and rheme analysis it is important to define the terms
62 Cf Tan ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo 95ndash11063 Cf Westfall ldquoAnalysis of Prominence in Hellenistic Greekrdquo 75ndash9464 Dvorakrsquos analysis of the entire New Testament revealed that across
the entire New Testament predicators were prime 7227 times adjuncts 5767times subjects 5354 times and complements 2634 times Cf DvorakldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo 25ndash26 Cf also Porter(ldquoProminencerdquo 71) who discusses patterns of order of first and second clausecomponents
65 Cf Porter ldquoProminencerdquo 67ndash6966 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 45
clearly to delineate the steps in analysis and to stress a numberof the important advantages to such an analysis
To begin one must have an understanding of the term processchain A process is any verbal action implied or inscribedwithin a clause a process chain refers to a string of verbalprocesses that form a series across a stretch of text67 This chainof processes is ascribed to a particular actor(s) who is said to bethe thematic actor Of course other participants and their actionsmay be interspersed in the same stretch of text but these do notnecessarily break the process chain associated with the thematicactor An easy example in English is as follows
Bobby went to the store There he was greeted by a clerk and thensearched for a loaf of bread When he found it however he decidedthat it was too expensive so he put it back on the shelf However anolder woman standing nearby decided she would take it Bobby thenleft the store and travelled to the Shop-For-Less down the road wherehe purchased the bread for a less expensive price
All of the verbs in this anecdote form a process chain andBobby is the primary participant Bobby went searched founddecided put left travelled and purchased Notice as well thatthe additional processes performed by the clerk and the olderwoman do not break the chain as it follows Bobby for theiractions are clearly secondary information and reactionarythroughout Bobbyrsquos story
This story provides an excellent segue to the notion of themeTheme in narrative is best seen through the transition and changeof a participant as a primary actor in a process chainmdashwhat isusually called the thematic actor68 In other words a theme is thetransition from one thematic actor to another or a change inparticipant involvement that breaks a process chain That beingsaid the thematic actor must be an explicit subject meaning thatthe actor cannot merely be implied from a verb This does notmean however that the thematic actor must be prime or evenarticulated Indeed the thematic actor can be anarthrous or
67 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9868 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
46 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
articulated prime or subsequent Provided the thematic actor isarticulated this actor can be said to be more emphatic Moreemphatic still is when the thematic actor also occupies the primeposition in the clause69 Such a theme is said to be marked andshould be noted as a potential boundary marker for a shift indiscourse topic which will be discussed more thoroughly below
Interestingly enough the thematic actor can actually bepassive which suggests that more refined language is needed infuture formulations of theme and rheme analyses The followingbrief narrative concerning a shirt demonstrates the shortcomingsof ldquoactorrdquo language
Cindyrsquos shirt was stained by an ice cream cone The shirt then had tobe tossed into the washing machine which soaked it for twentyminutes The shirt then was brought out of the wash and was placedinto the dryer for a sixty-minute tumble Finally the shirt wasremoved by Cindy and hung on the drying rack
Clearly the narrative is about the shirt It is the theme of the taleeven though it is not truly an actor in any instance Perhaps thelanguage of ldquoprimary participantrdquo could be more helpful and lessmisleading
Moving onto clausal considerations the thematic participantmust be in a primary clause or on clause level α in the OpenText model70 Any participant found in a secondary clause hasbeen rank-shifted down to level β and therefore plays asubordinate role to the circumstances of the primary clauseObviously then a subordinated participant cannot serve as theprimary participant
Lastly one must consider the concept of rhememdashtheadditional information regarding the current thematicparticipant71 which is also understood as the extensivecircumstantial information involved in a process chain Considerthe story of a young elf
69 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98-9970 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10371 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 47
Sissy was out late one night at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that shewould not be able to return to the hovel before the werewolves cameout for the night she decided to employ her cunning Acting quicklyshe pulled leaves and twigs off of a few nearby oaks and began toconstruct a glider She then climbed atop the tallest tree at her friendsrsquoden and sets sail for home landing safely at her hovel just as sheheard the first howl of the dark night She was safe safe indeed
In the preceding story all of the details concerning her activitiesthe building gliding landing and so on all serve as rhematicmaterial to fill out the picture of the text It is clear that thissection of text is about Sissy since she is the primary participantThe rheme is what allows the reader to know that the story istruly about not only Sissy but also her quick wit and her returnvoyage home
Briefly it is worth noting that following the application ofboth prime and subsequent analysis and theme and rhemeanalysis the two analyses may be cross examined for additionaland enlightening findings For example should a prime in aclause also be a theme then the theme is considered markedmeaning that the author chose to launch his clause with thetheme change72 This reflects the nature of language in that thespeaker has to make a choice regarding how to start a clauseSince language is necessarily syntagmatic and paradigmaticmdashlinear and oppositionalmdashonly one thing can be said at a timeTherefore the first chosen words that come out of the mouthmust be considered significant especially in the language ofGreek where word order is significantly more malleable than inEnglish although it is important to note that a linguistic choice isnot always conscious
To grasp how the idea of prime and theme work together hereis a small reiteration of Sissyrsquos story ldquoSissy was out late onenight at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that she would not be ableto return to the hovel before the werewolves came out for thenight she decided to employ her cunningrdquo Notice how the firstclause begins with ldquoSissyrdquo as both the prime and the thematic
72 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 100-101
48 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
participant There is no question as to whom the story pertainsHowever the prime in the following sentence is actually aparticiple adjunct material which sets the stage for the problemin the text Thus the kernel of truth from these first twosentences is that Sissy realizes she has a problem Without thecoupling of prime and theme such a realization could very wellbe missed by a casual reader or interpreter leading to amisunderstanding of character prominence73 The true beauty ofthese analyses therefore can be seen in the fact that they causethe analyst to slow down and appreciate the rhetoric within thetext itself
The importance of theme and rheme analysis cannot beunderstated for it is key in determining exactly what the authoris trying to communicate in a given pericope The thematic actorin a given process chain is the governing character in a multi-sentence portion of the text All of the information that iscircumstantial to the theme is the rheme and should be treated asadding additional information to the theme If one were toconfuse this then one would be in danger of putting words in theauthorrsquos mouth and mirror reading into the text Thereforetheme and rheme analysis is critical to providing the clearestpossible picture of a textrsquos message the bits of the text that theauthor considers most important which leads to the best possibleapplications for daily living
There are only two thematic units in Mark 21ndash12 (cf theappendix for a full theme-rheme analysis) The first thematic unitconsists of verses 1ndash5 In this unit the only explicit subject of aprocess chain that occurs in a primary clause is ποltοί (v 2)Mark has not chosen the most heavily marked theme optionsince ποltοί does not also occupy prime position in the clauseAlthough ὁ παραλυτικός occurs in the subject slot of clause 16 (v4) it occurs in a dependent clause thus it does not constitute athematic shift Ὁ Ἰησοῦς occurs in v 5 but it is part of asecondary embedded participial clause that serves as an adjunctin the primary clause and is therefore not a thematic shift The
73 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 104-105
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 49
only remaining possibility is αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι in clause 19 (v 5)however although it is subject in a primary clause it belongs toa stretch of reported speech and is thus not a thematic shift Thenext thematic unit begins at clause 20 (v 6) with τινες τῶνγραmicromicroατέων (not marked) and extends all the way through to theend of the unit (v 12) Again a number of other subjects occur inthe subsequent clauses but as in the first unit none of themqualifies as a thematic shift because either they occur as part ofreported speech or secondary clauses (embedded or standalone)
There are only a couple thematic units in Jude A few of thesewill be examined below to demonstrate what has been writtenabove The first of these examples comes from clause twelve
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸκρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειανκαὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
Here we have an example of an unmarked theme for thetheme is not prime in the clause Τινες ἄνθρωποι is the primaryparticipant of this clause The rest of the material is rhematic inthat it is giving additional information about these ldquocertainpeoplerdquo The most significant of the rhematic material here is theprocess associated with the subject on the primary clause levelThis process is παρεισέδυσαν essentially meaning that thesepeople have snuck in among them There are other processeshowever involved that are related back to the theme here whichform a process chain when taken together Some of thesepredicators are participles which associate variouscircumstantial bits with the theme provided Other verbs found inclauses 29ndash32 are also on the primary level which at leastinclude microιαίνουσιν ἀθετοῦσιν and βλασφηmicroοῦσιν Each of theseverbs is intensely negative in nature which supports theassertion that the author genuinely does not approve of theseindividuals at all
Now one might assert that these verbs should be rhematic forother subjects since there are indeed other subjects that theseverbs predicate However there is no explicit subject on theprimary clause level that signals a change in theme after τινες
50 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
ἄνθρωποι until Μιχαὴλ74 Since this is the case it cannot be saidthat any of these intermediate participants is thematic Thesecondary clauses embedded or otherwise cannot carry enoughweight to be thematic since they are additional information usedto support the primary material they follow
The second example comes from clause 40 Οὗτοι δὲ ὅσα microὲνοὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν In this example the theme is markedmeaning that the primary participant is also in the primeposition Since the author chose to present this theme as markedit likely has extra weight In this instance the marked theme isactually a reference back to the theme in clause twelve whichserves as the topic of the entire discourse Thus it is likely thatthe theme is marked as the author tries to reorient his audiencetoward himself as opposed to his adversaries
The final example comes from clause 67 καὶ τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶνλαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν In thisexample the subject is articulated and prime which makes thisan especially marked theme When the subject comes at thebeginning of the clause the subject is the leaping off point of theclause the first bit of information that flows out of the speakerOn top of all of this the author took the time to articulate thetheme which is not necessarily required in Greek All of theseelements work together to draw attention to the subject in subtleyet important ways It is possible that this theme is so marked asthe author wants to draw attention to the wicked speech thatspills forth from the mouths of τινες ἄνθρωποιmdashspeech to whichthe author clearly does not want his audience listening
5 Topic and Comment Analysis
Topic and comment analysis functions at the highest level ofdiscourse This level includes the clause complex paragraph and
74 The demonstrative pronoun οὗτοι in clause 29 does not signal a themechange because it is a reference back to the current theme τινες ἄνθρωποι Thiswould be similar to the use of a personal pronoun like ldquoherdquo He is a referentback to a governing term that has been established in most cases as is οὗτοι
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 51
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
clearly to delineate the steps in analysis and to stress a numberof the important advantages to such an analysis
To begin one must have an understanding of the term processchain A process is any verbal action implied or inscribedwithin a clause a process chain refers to a string of verbalprocesses that form a series across a stretch of text67 This chainof processes is ascribed to a particular actor(s) who is said to bethe thematic actor Of course other participants and their actionsmay be interspersed in the same stretch of text but these do notnecessarily break the process chain associated with the thematicactor An easy example in English is as follows
Bobby went to the store There he was greeted by a clerk and thensearched for a loaf of bread When he found it however he decidedthat it was too expensive so he put it back on the shelf However anolder woman standing nearby decided she would take it Bobby thenleft the store and travelled to the Shop-For-Less down the road wherehe purchased the bread for a less expensive price
All of the verbs in this anecdote form a process chain andBobby is the primary participant Bobby went searched founddecided put left travelled and purchased Notice as well thatthe additional processes performed by the clerk and the olderwoman do not break the chain as it follows Bobby for theiractions are clearly secondary information and reactionarythroughout Bobbyrsquos story
This story provides an excellent segue to the notion of themeTheme in narrative is best seen through the transition and changeof a participant as a primary actor in a process chainmdashwhat isusually called the thematic actor68 In other words a theme is thetransition from one thematic actor to another or a change inparticipant involvement that breaks a process chain That beingsaid the thematic actor must be an explicit subject meaning thatthe actor cannot merely be implied from a verb This does notmean however that the thematic actor must be prime or evenarticulated Indeed the thematic actor can be anarthrous or
67 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 9868 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
46 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
articulated prime or subsequent Provided the thematic actor isarticulated this actor can be said to be more emphatic Moreemphatic still is when the thematic actor also occupies the primeposition in the clause69 Such a theme is said to be marked andshould be noted as a potential boundary marker for a shift indiscourse topic which will be discussed more thoroughly below
Interestingly enough the thematic actor can actually bepassive which suggests that more refined language is needed infuture formulations of theme and rheme analyses The followingbrief narrative concerning a shirt demonstrates the shortcomingsof ldquoactorrdquo language
Cindyrsquos shirt was stained by an ice cream cone The shirt then had tobe tossed into the washing machine which soaked it for twentyminutes The shirt then was brought out of the wash and was placedinto the dryer for a sixty-minute tumble Finally the shirt wasremoved by Cindy and hung on the drying rack
Clearly the narrative is about the shirt It is the theme of the taleeven though it is not truly an actor in any instance Perhaps thelanguage of ldquoprimary participantrdquo could be more helpful and lessmisleading
Moving onto clausal considerations the thematic participantmust be in a primary clause or on clause level α in the OpenText model70 Any participant found in a secondary clause hasbeen rank-shifted down to level β and therefore plays asubordinate role to the circumstances of the primary clauseObviously then a subordinated participant cannot serve as theprimary participant
Lastly one must consider the concept of rhememdashtheadditional information regarding the current thematicparticipant71 which is also understood as the extensivecircumstantial information involved in a process chain Considerthe story of a young elf
69 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98-9970 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10371 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 47
Sissy was out late one night at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that shewould not be able to return to the hovel before the werewolves cameout for the night she decided to employ her cunning Acting quicklyshe pulled leaves and twigs off of a few nearby oaks and began toconstruct a glider She then climbed atop the tallest tree at her friendsrsquoden and sets sail for home landing safely at her hovel just as sheheard the first howl of the dark night She was safe safe indeed
In the preceding story all of the details concerning her activitiesthe building gliding landing and so on all serve as rhematicmaterial to fill out the picture of the text It is clear that thissection of text is about Sissy since she is the primary participantThe rheme is what allows the reader to know that the story istruly about not only Sissy but also her quick wit and her returnvoyage home
Briefly it is worth noting that following the application ofboth prime and subsequent analysis and theme and rhemeanalysis the two analyses may be cross examined for additionaland enlightening findings For example should a prime in aclause also be a theme then the theme is considered markedmeaning that the author chose to launch his clause with thetheme change72 This reflects the nature of language in that thespeaker has to make a choice regarding how to start a clauseSince language is necessarily syntagmatic and paradigmaticmdashlinear and oppositionalmdashonly one thing can be said at a timeTherefore the first chosen words that come out of the mouthmust be considered significant especially in the language ofGreek where word order is significantly more malleable than inEnglish although it is important to note that a linguistic choice isnot always conscious
To grasp how the idea of prime and theme work together hereis a small reiteration of Sissyrsquos story ldquoSissy was out late onenight at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that she would not be ableto return to the hovel before the werewolves came out for thenight she decided to employ her cunningrdquo Notice how the firstclause begins with ldquoSissyrdquo as both the prime and the thematic
72 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 100-101
48 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
participant There is no question as to whom the story pertainsHowever the prime in the following sentence is actually aparticiple adjunct material which sets the stage for the problemin the text Thus the kernel of truth from these first twosentences is that Sissy realizes she has a problem Without thecoupling of prime and theme such a realization could very wellbe missed by a casual reader or interpreter leading to amisunderstanding of character prominence73 The true beauty ofthese analyses therefore can be seen in the fact that they causethe analyst to slow down and appreciate the rhetoric within thetext itself
The importance of theme and rheme analysis cannot beunderstated for it is key in determining exactly what the authoris trying to communicate in a given pericope The thematic actorin a given process chain is the governing character in a multi-sentence portion of the text All of the information that iscircumstantial to the theme is the rheme and should be treated asadding additional information to the theme If one were toconfuse this then one would be in danger of putting words in theauthorrsquos mouth and mirror reading into the text Thereforetheme and rheme analysis is critical to providing the clearestpossible picture of a textrsquos message the bits of the text that theauthor considers most important which leads to the best possibleapplications for daily living
There are only two thematic units in Mark 21ndash12 (cf theappendix for a full theme-rheme analysis) The first thematic unitconsists of verses 1ndash5 In this unit the only explicit subject of aprocess chain that occurs in a primary clause is ποltοί (v 2)Mark has not chosen the most heavily marked theme optionsince ποltοί does not also occupy prime position in the clauseAlthough ὁ παραλυτικός occurs in the subject slot of clause 16 (v4) it occurs in a dependent clause thus it does not constitute athematic shift Ὁ Ἰησοῦς occurs in v 5 but it is part of asecondary embedded participial clause that serves as an adjunctin the primary clause and is therefore not a thematic shift The
73 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 104-105
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 49
only remaining possibility is αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι in clause 19 (v 5)however although it is subject in a primary clause it belongs toa stretch of reported speech and is thus not a thematic shift Thenext thematic unit begins at clause 20 (v 6) with τινες τῶνγραmicromicroατέων (not marked) and extends all the way through to theend of the unit (v 12) Again a number of other subjects occur inthe subsequent clauses but as in the first unit none of themqualifies as a thematic shift because either they occur as part ofreported speech or secondary clauses (embedded or standalone)
There are only a couple thematic units in Jude A few of thesewill be examined below to demonstrate what has been writtenabove The first of these examples comes from clause twelve
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸκρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειανκαὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
Here we have an example of an unmarked theme for thetheme is not prime in the clause Τινες ἄνθρωποι is the primaryparticipant of this clause The rest of the material is rhematic inthat it is giving additional information about these ldquocertainpeoplerdquo The most significant of the rhematic material here is theprocess associated with the subject on the primary clause levelThis process is παρεισέδυσαν essentially meaning that thesepeople have snuck in among them There are other processeshowever involved that are related back to the theme here whichform a process chain when taken together Some of thesepredicators are participles which associate variouscircumstantial bits with the theme provided Other verbs found inclauses 29ndash32 are also on the primary level which at leastinclude microιαίνουσιν ἀθετοῦσιν and βλασφηmicroοῦσιν Each of theseverbs is intensely negative in nature which supports theassertion that the author genuinely does not approve of theseindividuals at all
Now one might assert that these verbs should be rhematic forother subjects since there are indeed other subjects that theseverbs predicate However there is no explicit subject on theprimary clause level that signals a change in theme after τινες
50 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
ἄνθρωποι until Μιχαὴλ74 Since this is the case it cannot be saidthat any of these intermediate participants is thematic Thesecondary clauses embedded or otherwise cannot carry enoughweight to be thematic since they are additional information usedto support the primary material they follow
The second example comes from clause 40 Οὗτοι δὲ ὅσα microὲνοὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν In this example the theme is markedmeaning that the primary participant is also in the primeposition Since the author chose to present this theme as markedit likely has extra weight In this instance the marked theme isactually a reference back to the theme in clause twelve whichserves as the topic of the entire discourse Thus it is likely thatthe theme is marked as the author tries to reorient his audiencetoward himself as opposed to his adversaries
The final example comes from clause 67 καὶ τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶνλαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν In thisexample the subject is articulated and prime which makes thisan especially marked theme When the subject comes at thebeginning of the clause the subject is the leaping off point of theclause the first bit of information that flows out of the speakerOn top of all of this the author took the time to articulate thetheme which is not necessarily required in Greek All of theseelements work together to draw attention to the subject in subtleyet important ways It is possible that this theme is so marked asthe author wants to draw attention to the wicked speech thatspills forth from the mouths of τινες ἄνθρωποιmdashspeech to whichthe author clearly does not want his audience listening
5 Topic and Comment Analysis
Topic and comment analysis functions at the highest level ofdiscourse This level includes the clause complex paragraph and
74 The demonstrative pronoun οὗτοι in clause 29 does not signal a themechange because it is a reference back to the current theme τινες ἄνθρωποι Thiswould be similar to the use of a personal pronoun like ldquoherdquo He is a referentback to a governing term that has been established in most cases as is οὗτοι
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 51
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
articulated prime or subsequent Provided the thematic actor isarticulated this actor can be said to be more emphatic Moreemphatic still is when the thematic actor also occupies the primeposition in the clause69 Such a theme is said to be marked andshould be noted as a potential boundary marker for a shift indiscourse topic which will be discussed more thoroughly below
Interestingly enough the thematic actor can actually bepassive which suggests that more refined language is needed infuture formulations of theme and rheme analyses The followingbrief narrative concerning a shirt demonstrates the shortcomingsof ldquoactorrdquo language
Cindyrsquos shirt was stained by an ice cream cone The shirt then had tobe tossed into the washing machine which soaked it for twentyminutes The shirt then was brought out of the wash and was placedinto the dryer for a sixty-minute tumble Finally the shirt wasremoved by Cindy and hung on the drying rack
Clearly the narrative is about the shirt It is the theme of the taleeven though it is not truly an actor in any instance Perhaps thelanguage of ldquoprimary participantrdquo could be more helpful and lessmisleading
Moving onto clausal considerations the thematic participantmust be in a primary clause or on clause level α in the OpenText model70 Any participant found in a secondary clause hasbeen rank-shifted down to level β and therefore plays asubordinate role to the circumstances of the primary clauseObviously then a subordinated participant cannot serve as theprimary participant
Lastly one must consider the concept of rhememdashtheadditional information regarding the current thematicparticipant71 which is also understood as the extensivecircumstantial information involved in a process chain Considerthe story of a young elf
69 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98-9970 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10371 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 98
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 47
Sissy was out late one night at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that shewould not be able to return to the hovel before the werewolves cameout for the night she decided to employ her cunning Acting quicklyshe pulled leaves and twigs off of a few nearby oaks and began toconstruct a glider She then climbed atop the tallest tree at her friendsrsquoden and sets sail for home landing safely at her hovel just as sheheard the first howl of the dark night She was safe safe indeed
In the preceding story all of the details concerning her activitiesthe building gliding landing and so on all serve as rhematicmaterial to fill out the picture of the text It is clear that thissection of text is about Sissy since she is the primary participantThe rheme is what allows the reader to know that the story istruly about not only Sissy but also her quick wit and her returnvoyage home
Briefly it is worth noting that following the application ofboth prime and subsequent analysis and theme and rhemeanalysis the two analyses may be cross examined for additionaland enlightening findings For example should a prime in aclause also be a theme then the theme is considered markedmeaning that the author chose to launch his clause with thetheme change72 This reflects the nature of language in that thespeaker has to make a choice regarding how to start a clauseSince language is necessarily syntagmatic and paradigmaticmdashlinear and oppositionalmdashonly one thing can be said at a timeTherefore the first chosen words that come out of the mouthmust be considered significant especially in the language ofGreek where word order is significantly more malleable than inEnglish although it is important to note that a linguistic choice isnot always conscious
To grasp how the idea of prime and theme work together hereis a small reiteration of Sissyrsquos story ldquoSissy was out late onenight at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that she would not be ableto return to the hovel before the werewolves came out for thenight she decided to employ her cunningrdquo Notice how the firstclause begins with ldquoSissyrdquo as both the prime and the thematic
72 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 100-101
48 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
participant There is no question as to whom the story pertainsHowever the prime in the following sentence is actually aparticiple adjunct material which sets the stage for the problemin the text Thus the kernel of truth from these first twosentences is that Sissy realizes she has a problem Without thecoupling of prime and theme such a realization could very wellbe missed by a casual reader or interpreter leading to amisunderstanding of character prominence73 The true beauty ofthese analyses therefore can be seen in the fact that they causethe analyst to slow down and appreciate the rhetoric within thetext itself
The importance of theme and rheme analysis cannot beunderstated for it is key in determining exactly what the authoris trying to communicate in a given pericope The thematic actorin a given process chain is the governing character in a multi-sentence portion of the text All of the information that iscircumstantial to the theme is the rheme and should be treated asadding additional information to the theme If one were toconfuse this then one would be in danger of putting words in theauthorrsquos mouth and mirror reading into the text Thereforetheme and rheme analysis is critical to providing the clearestpossible picture of a textrsquos message the bits of the text that theauthor considers most important which leads to the best possibleapplications for daily living
There are only two thematic units in Mark 21ndash12 (cf theappendix for a full theme-rheme analysis) The first thematic unitconsists of verses 1ndash5 In this unit the only explicit subject of aprocess chain that occurs in a primary clause is ποltοί (v 2)Mark has not chosen the most heavily marked theme optionsince ποltοί does not also occupy prime position in the clauseAlthough ὁ παραλυτικός occurs in the subject slot of clause 16 (v4) it occurs in a dependent clause thus it does not constitute athematic shift Ὁ Ἰησοῦς occurs in v 5 but it is part of asecondary embedded participial clause that serves as an adjunctin the primary clause and is therefore not a thematic shift The
73 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 104-105
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 49
only remaining possibility is αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι in clause 19 (v 5)however although it is subject in a primary clause it belongs toa stretch of reported speech and is thus not a thematic shift Thenext thematic unit begins at clause 20 (v 6) with τινες τῶνγραmicromicroατέων (not marked) and extends all the way through to theend of the unit (v 12) Again a number of other subjects occur inthe subsequent clauses but as in the first unit none of themqualifies as a thematic shift because either they occur as part ofreported speech or secondary clauses (embedded or standalone)
There are only a couple thematic units in Jude A few of thesewill be examined below to demonstrate what has been writtenabove The first of these examples comes from clause twelve
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸκρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειανκαὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
Here we have an example of an unmarked theme for thetheme is not prime in the clause Τινες ἄνθρωποι is the primaryparticipant of this clause The rest of the material is rhematic inthat it is giving additional information about these ldquocertainpeoplerdquo The most significant of the rhematic material here is theprocess associated with the subject on the primary clause levelThis process is παρεισέδυσαν essentially meaning that thesepeople have snuck in among them There are other processeshowever involved that are related back to the theme here whichform a process chain when taken together Some of thesepredicators are participles which associate variouscircumstantial bits with the theme provided Other verbs found inclauses 29ndash32 are also on the primary level which at leastinclude microιαίνουσιν ἀθετοῦσιν and βλασφηmicroοῦσιν Each of theseverbs is intensely negative in nature which supports theassertion that the author genuinely does not approve of theseindividuals at all
Now one might assert that these verbs should be rhematic forother subjects since there are indeed other subjects that theseverbs predicate However there is no explicit subject on theprimary clause level that signals a change in theme after τινες
50 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
ἄνθρωποι until Μιχαὴλ74 Since this is the case it cannot be saidthat any of these intermediate participants is thematic Thesecondary clauses embedded or otherwise cannot carry enoughweight to be thematic since they are additional information usedto support the primary material they follow
The second example comes from clause 40 Οὗτοι δὲ ὅσα microὲνοὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν In this example the theme is markedmeaning that the primary participant is also in the primeposition Since the author chose to present this theme as markedit likely has extra weight In this instance the marked theme isactually a reference back to the theme in clause twelve whichserves as the topic of the entire discourse Thus it is likely thatthe theme is marked as the author tries to reorient his audiencetoward himself as opposed to his adversaries
The final example comes from clause 67 καὶ τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶνλαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν In thisexample the subject is articulated and prime which makes thisan especially marked theme When the subject comes at thebeginning of the clause the subject is the leaping off point of theclause the first bit of information that flows out of the speakerOn top of all of this the author took the time to articulate thetheme which is not necessarily required in Greek All of theseelements work together to draw attention to the subject in subtleyet important ways It is possible that this theme is so marked asthe author wants to draw attention to the wicked speech thatspills forth from the mouths of τινες ἄνθρωποιmdashspeech to whichthe author clearly does not want his audience listening
5 Topic and Comment Analysis
Topic and comment analysis functions at the highest level ofdiscourse This level includes the clause complex paragraph and
74 The demonstrative pronoun οὗτοι in clause 29 does not signal a themechange because it is a reference back to the current theme τινες ἄνθρωποι Thiswould be similar to the use of a personal pronoun like ldquoherdquo He is a referentback to a governing term that has been established in most cases as is οὗτοι
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 51
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
Sissy was out late one night at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that shewould not be able to return to the hovel before the werewolves cameout for the night she decided to employ her cunning Acting quicklyshe pulled leaves and twigs off of a few nearby oaks and began toconstruct a glider She then climbed atop the tallest tree at her friendsrsquoden and sets sail for home landing safely at her hovel just as sheheard the first howl of the dark night She was safe safe indeed
In the preceding story all of the details concerning her activitiesthe building gliding landing and so on all serve as rhematicmaterial to fill out the picture of the text It is clear that thissection of text is about Sissy since she is the primary participantThe rheme is what allows the reader to know that the story istruly about not only Sissy but also her quick wit and her returnvoyage home
Briefly it is worth noting that following the application ofboth prime and subsequent analysis and theme and rhemeanalysis the two analyses may be cross examined for additionaland enlightening findings For example should a prime in aclause also be a theme then the theme is considered markedmeaning that the author chose to launch his clause with thetheme change72 This reflects the nature of language in that thespeaker has to make a choice regarding how to start a clauseSince language is necessarily syntagmatic and paradigmaticmdashlinear and oppositionalmdashonly one thing can be said at a timeTherefore the first chosen words that come out of the mouthmust be considered significant especially in the language ofGreek where word order is significantly more malleable than inEnglish although it is important to note that a linguistic choice isnot always conscious
To grasp how the idea of prime and theme work together hereis a small reiteration of Sissyrsquos story ldquoSissy was out late onenight at her friendsrsquo home Realizing that she would not be ableto return to the hovel before the werewolves came out for thenight she decided to employ her cunningrdquo Notice how the firstclause begins with ldquoSissyrdquo as both the prime and the thematic
72 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 100-101
48 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
participant There is no question as to whom the story pertainsHowever the prime in the following sentence is actually aparticiple adjunct material which sets the stage for the problemin the text Thus the kernel of truth from these first twosentences is that Sissy realizes she has a problem Without thecoupling of prime and theme such a realization could very wellbe missed by a casual reader or interpreter leading to amisunderstanding of character prominence73 The true beauty ofthese analyses therefore can be seen in the fact that they causethe analyst to slow down and appreciate the rhetoric within thetext itself
The importance of theme and rheme analysis cannot beunderstated for it is key in determining exactly what the authoris trying to communicate in a given pericope The thematic actorin a given process chain is the governing character in a multi-sentence portion of the text All of the information that iscircumstantial to the theme is the rheme and should be treated asadding additional information to the theme If one were toconfuse this then one would be in danger of putting words in theauthorrsquos mouth and mirror reading into the text Thereforetheme and rheme analysis is critical to providing the clearestpossible picture of a textrsquos message the bits of the text that theauthor considers most important which leads to the best possibleapplications for daily living
There are only two thematic units in Mark 21ndash12 (cf theappendix for a full theme-rheme analysis) The first thematic unitconsists of verses 1ndash5 In this unit the only explicit subject of aprocess chain that occurs in a primary clause is ποltοί (v 2)Mark has not chosen the most heavily marked theme optionsince ποltοί does not also occupy prime position in the clauseAlthough ὁ παραλυτικός occurs in the subject slot of clause 16 (v4) it occurs in a dependent clause thus it does not constitute athematic shift Ὁ Ἰησοῦς occurs in v 5 but it is part of asecondary embedded participial clause that serves as an adjunctin the primary clause and is therefore not a thematic shift The
73 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 104-105
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 49
only remaining possibility is αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι in clause 19 (v 5)however although it is subject in a primary clause it belongs toa stretch of reported speech and is thus not a thematic shift Thenext thematic unit begins at clause 20 (v 6) with τινες τῶνγραmicromicroατέων (not marked) and extends all the way through to theend of the unit (v 12) Again a number of other subjects occur inthe subsequent clauses but as in the first unit none of themqualifies as a thematic shift because either they occur as part ofreported speech or secondary clauses (embedded or standalone)
There are only a couple thematic units in Jude A few of thesewill be examined below to demonstrate what has been writtenabove The first of these examples comes from clause twelve
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸκρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειανκαὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
Here we have an example of an unmarked theme for thetheme is not prime in the clause Τινες ἄνθρωποι is the primaryparticipant of this clause The rest of the material is rhematic inthat it is giving additional information about these ldquocertainpeoplerdquo The most significant of the rhematic material here is theprocess associated with the subject on the primary clause levelThis process is παρεισέδυσαν essentially meaning that thesepeople have snuck in among them There are other processeshowever involved that are related back to the theme here whichform a process chain when taken together Some of thesepredicators are participles which associate variouscircumstantial bits with the theme provided Other verbs found inclauses 29ndash32 are also on the primary level which at leastinclude microιαίνουσιν ἀθετοῦσιν and βλασφηmicroοῦσιν Each of theseverbs is intensely negative in nature which supports theassertion that the author genuinely does not approve of theseindividuals at all
Now one might assert that these verbs should be rhematic forother subjects since there are indeed other subjects that theseverbs predicate However there is no explicit subject on theprimary clause level that signals a change in theme after τινες
50 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
ἄνθρωποι until Μιχαὴλ74 Since this is the case it cannot be saidthat any of these intermediate participants is thematic Thesecondary clauses embedded or otherwise cannot carry enoughweight to be thematic since they are additional information usedto support the primary material they follow
The second example comes from clause 40 Οὗτοι δὲ ὅσα microὲνοὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν In this example the theme is markedmeaning that the primary participant is also in the primeposition Since the author chose to present this theme as markedit likely has extra weight In this instance the marked theme isactually a reference back to the theme in clause twelve whichserves as the topic of the entire discourse Thus it is likely thatthe theme is marked as the author tries to reorient his audiencetoward himself as opposed to his adversaries
The final example comes from clause 67 καὶ τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶνλαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν In thisexample the subject is articulated and prime which makes thisan especially marked theme When the subject comes at thebeginning of the clause the subject is the leaping off point of theclause the first bit of information that flows out of the speakerOn top of all of this the author took the time to articulate thetheme which is not necessarily required in Greek All of theseelements work together to draw attention to the subject in subtleyet important ways It is possible that this theme is so marked asthe author wants to draw attention to the wicked speech thatspills forth from the mouths of τινες ἄνθρωποιmdashspeech to whichthe author clearly does not want his audience listening
5 Topic and Comment Analysis
Topic and comment analysis functions at the highest level ofdiscourse This level includes the clause complex paragraph and
74 The demonstrative pronoun οὗτοι in clause 29 does not signal a themechange because it is a reference back to the current theme τινες ἄνθρωποι Thiswould be similar to the use of a personal pronoun like ldquoherdquo He is a referentback to a governing term that has been established in most cases as is οὗτοι
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 51
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
participant There is no question as to whom the story pertainsHowever the prime in the following sentence is actually aparticiple adjunct material which sets the stage for the problemin the text Thus the kernel of truth from these first twosentences is that Sissy realizes she has a problem Without thecoupling of prime and theme such a realization could very wellbe missed by a casual reader or interpreter leading to amisunderstanding of character prominence73 The true beauty ofthese analyses therefore can be seen in the fact that they causethe analyst to slow down and appreciate the rhetoric within thetext itself
The importance of theme and rheme analysis cannot beunderstated for it is key in determining exactly what the authoris trying to communicate in a given pericope The thematic actorin a given process chain is the governing character in a multi-sentence portion of the text All of the information that iscircumstantial to the theme is the rheme and should be treated asadding additional information to the theme If one were toconfuse this then one would be in danger of putting words in theauthorrsquos mouth and mirror reading into the text Thereforetheme and rheme analysis is critical to providing the clearestpossible picture of a textrsquos message the bits of the text that theauthor considers most important which leads to the best possibleapplications for daily living
There are only two thematic units in Mark 21ndash12 (cf theappendix for a full theme-rheme analysis) The first thematic unitconsists of verses 1ndash5 In this unit the only explicit subject of aprocess chain that occurs in a primary clause is ποltοί (v 2)Mark has not chosen the most heavily marked theme optionsince ποltοί does not also occupy prime position in the clauseAlthough ὁ παραλυτικός occurs in the subject slot of clause 16 (v4) it occurs in a dependent clause thus it does not constitute athematic shift Ὁ Ἰησοῦς occurs in v 5 but it is part of asecondary embedded participial clause that serves as an adjunctin the primary clause and is therefore not a thematic shift The
73 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 104-105
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 49
only remaining possibility is αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι in clause 19 (v 5)however although it is subject in a primary clause it belongs toa stretch of reported speech and is thus not a thematic shift Thenext thematic unit begins at clause 20 (v 6) with τινες τῶνγραmicromicroατέων (not marked) and extends all the way through to theend of the unit (v 12) Again a number of other subjects occur inthe subsequent clauses but as in the first unit none of themqualifies as a thematic shift because either they occur as part ofreported speech or secondary clauses (embedded or standalone)
There are only a couple thematic units in Jude A few of thesewill be examined below to demonstrate what has been writtenabove The first of these examples comes from clause twelve
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸκρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειανκαὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
Here we have an example of an unmarked theme for thetheme is not prime in the clause Τινες ἄνθρωποι is the primaryparticipant of this clause The rest of the material is rhematic inthat it is giving additional information about these ldquocertainpeoplerdquo The most significant of the rhematic material here is theprocess associated with the subject on the primary clause levelThis process is παρεισέδυσαν essentially meaning that thesepeople have snuck in among them There are other processeshowever involved that are related back to the theme here whichform a process chain when taken together Some of thesepredicators are participles which associate variouscircumstantial bits with the theme provided Other verbs found inclauses 29ndash32 are also on the primary level which at leastinclude microιαίνουσιν ἀθετοῦσιν and βλασφηmicroοῦσιν Each of theseverbs is intensely negative in nature which supports theassertion that the author genuinely does not approve of theseindividuals at all
Now one might assert that these verbs should be rhematic forother subjects since there are indeed other subjects that theseverbs predicate However there is no explicit subject on theprimary clause level that signals a change in theme after τινες
50 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
ἄνθρωποι until Μιχαὴλ74 Since this is the case it cannot be saidthat any of these intermediate participants is thematic Thesecondary clauses embedded or otherwise cannot carry enoughweight to be thematic since they are additional information usedto support the primary material they follow
The second example comes from clause 40 Οὗτοι δὲ ὅσα microὲνοὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν In this example the theme is markedmeaning that the primary participant is also in the primeposition Since the author chose to present this theme as markedit likely has extra weight In this instance the marked theme isactually a reference back to the theme in clause twelve whichserves as the topic of the entire discourse Thus it is likely thatthe theme is marked as the author tries to reorient his audiencetoward himself as opposed to his adversaries
The final example comes from clause 67 καὶ τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶνλαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν In thisexample the subject is articulated and prime which makes thisan especially marked theme When the subject comes at thebeginning of the clause the subject is the leaping off point of theclause the first bit of information that flows out of the speakerOn top of all of this the author took the time to articulate thetheme which is not necessarily required in Greek All of theseelements work together to draw attention to the subject in subtleyet important ways It is possible that this theme is so marked asthe author wants to draw attention to the wicked speech thatspills forth from the mouths of τινες ἄνθρωποιmdashspeech to whichthe author clearly does not want his audience listening
5 Topic and Comment Analysis
Topic and comment analysis functions at the highest level ofdiscourse This level includes the clause complex paragraph and
74 The demonstrative pronoun οὗτοι in clause 29 does not signal a themechange because it is a reference back to the current theme τινες ἄνθρωποι Thiswould be similar to the use of a personal pronoun like ldquoherdquo He is a referentback to a governing term that has been established in most cases as is οὗτοι
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 51
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
only remaining possibility is αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι in clause 19 (v 5)however although it is subject in a primary clause it belongs toa stretch of reported speech and is thus not a thematic shift Thenext thematic unit begins at clause 20 (v 6) with τινες τῶνγραmicromicroατέων (not marked) and extends all the way through to theend of the unit (v 12) Again a number of other subjects occur inthe subsequent clauses but as in the first unit none of themqualifies as a thematic shift because either they occur as part ofreported speech or secondary clauses (embedded or standalone)
There are only a couple thematic units in Jude A few of thesewill be examined below to demonstrate what has been writtenabove The first of these examples comes from clause twelve
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸκρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειανκαὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
Here we have an example of an unmarked theme for thetheme is not prime in the clause Τινες ἄνθρωποι is the primaryparticipant of this clause The rest of the material is rhematic inthat it is giving additional information about these ldquocertainpeoplerdquo The most significant of the rhematic material here is theprocess associated with the subject on the primary clause levelThis process is παρεισέδυσαν essentially meaning that thesepeople have snuck in among them There are other processeshowever involved that are related back to the theme here whichform a process chain when taken together Some of thesepredicators are participles which associate variouscircumstantial bits with the theme provided Other verbs found inclauses 29ndash32 are also on the primary level which at leastinclude microιαίνουσιν ἀθετοῦσιν and βλασφηmicroοῦσιν Each of theseverbs is intensely negative in nature which supports theassertion that the author genuinely does not approve of theseindividuals at all
Now one might assert that these verbs should be rhematic forother subjects since there are indeed other subjects that theseverbs predicate However there is no explicit subject on theprimary clause level that signals a change in theme after τινες
50 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
ἄνθρωποι until Μιχαὴλ74 Since this is the case it cannot be saidthat any of these intermediate participants is thematic Thesecondary clauses embedded or otherwise cannot carry enoughweight to be thematic since they are additional information usedto support the primary material they follow
The second example comes from clause 40 Οὗτοι δὲ ὅσα microὲνοὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν In this example the theme is markedmeaning that the primary participant is also in the primeposition Since the author chose to present this theme as markedit likely has extra weight In this instance the marked theme isactually a reference back to the theme in clause twelve whichserves as the topic of the entire discourse Thus it is likely thatthe theme is marked as the author tries to reorient his audiencetoward himself as opposed to his adversaries
The final example comes from clause 67 καὶ τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶνλαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν In thisexample the subject is articulated and prime which makes thisan especially marked theme When the subject comes at thebeginning of the clause the subject is the leaping off point of theclause the first bit of information that flows out of the speakerOn top of all of this the author took the time to articulate thetheme which is not necessarily required in Greek All of theseelements work together to draw attention to the subject in subtleyet important ways It is possible that this theme is so marked asthe author wants to draw attention to the wicked speech thatspills forth from the mouths of τινες ἄνθρωποιmdashspeech to whichthe author clearly does not want his audience listening
5 Topic and Comment Analysis
Topic and comment analysis functions at the highest level ofdiscourse This level includes the clause complex paragraph and
74 The demonstrative pronoun οὗτοι in clause 29 does not signal a themechange because it is a reference back to the current theme τινες ἄνθρωποι Thiswould be similar to the use of a personal pronoun like ldquoherdquo He is a referentback to a governing term that has been established in most cases as is οὗτοι
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 51
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
ἄνθρωποι until Μιχαὴλ74 Since this is the case it cannot be saidthat any of these intermediate participants is thematic Thesecondary clauses embedded or otherwise cannot carry enoughweight to be thematic since they are additional information usedto support the primary material they follow
The second example comes from clause 40 Οὗτοι δὲ ὅσα microὲνοὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν In this example the theme is markedmeaning that the primary participant is also in the primeposition Since the author chose to present this theme as markedit likely has extra weight In this instance the marked theme isactually a reference back to the theme in clause twelve whichserves as the topic of the entire discourse Thus it is likely thatthe theme is marked as the author tries to reorient his audiencetoward himself as opposed to his adversaries
The final example comes from clause 67 καὶ τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶνλαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν In thisexample the subject is articulated and prime which makes thisan especially marked theme When the subject comes at thebeginning of the clause the subject is the leaping off point of theclause the first bit of information that flows out of the speakerOn top of all of this the author took the time to articulate thetheme which is not necessarily required in Greek All of theseelements work together to draw attention to the subject in subtleyet important ways It is possible that this theme is so marked asthe author wants to draw attention to the wicked speech thatspills forth from the mouths of τινες ἄνθρωποιmdashspeech to whichthe author clearly does not want his audience listening
5 Topic and Comment Analysis
Topic and comment analysis functions at the highest level ofdiscourse This level includes the clause complex paragraph and
74 The demonstrative pronoun οὗτοι in clause 29 does not signal a themechange because it is a reference back to the current theme τινες ἄνθρωποι Thiswould be similar to the use of a personal pronoun like ldquoherdquo He is a referentback to a governing term that has been established in most cases as is οὗτοι
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 51
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
the entirety of a discourse75 First attention goes to topicAnother name commonly used for topic is global theme Thisterm is helpful because it helps one to visualize the scope of thetopic of a unit of text Global theme can be understood as the keyparticipant over the course of multiple clause complexesmdashgroups of clauses with clear syntactic relationshipsmdashofinformation76 Typically the topic is the participant about whichall of the primes and themes are speaking A contemporary wayto envision this idea is to consider a chapter in a book onspirituality or education The author typically names the chapterafter the topic of discourse found on its pages Everything asidefrom the topic found within those pages should be understood asproviding additional information about the particular topicwhich leads to the discussion of comment
Following the pattern of subsequent to prime and rheme totheme comment is the supporting information relative to thepresent topic of discourse77 Thus the comment is all of thecircumstantial evidence related to the present topic of discourseIt is indeed as the name suggests Comment is nothing morethan what is being said about a particular topic As an exampleconsider an essay about school uniforms The student penningsaid essay is in favor of school uniforms as a way to create aneven playing field between students of different socio-economiclevels Her thesis is as follows If students all had to wearuniforms then there would be fewer cliques based on fashionsense In this example the topic of the essay is school uniformsand the thesis serves as the comment The sub-points of thestudentrsquos essay will be made up of themes and primes that relateback to the topic as well as subsequents rhemes and commentsthat directly tie back to her thesis When she is finished she hasa coherent and cohesive paper
The realization of topics and comments comes through shiftsin semantic boundaries which are defined as the clear shift
75 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10676 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 11077 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 106
52 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
between one semantic environmentmdasha clearly cohesive andcoherent portion of a textmdashand another78 This means the placein which one topic ends and another begins There are severalsigns that a semantic boundary may exist between points Theseinclude a lack of semantic cohesion the end of a lexical chaindiscourse markers summarizing statements genitive absolutestemporal participles or infinitival word groups changes ofsetting within the text and other circumstantial indicators79 Toprovide examples of each of these is beyond the scope of thepresent discussion but a simple example of a semantic boundaryis to reimagine chapters in a book once more Suppose thechapters were actually short stories featuring the aforementionedBobby Cindy and Sissy within an episodic tome of fantastic andmundane tomes The ending of Sissyrsquos story came as she arrivedat her hovel There is a clear summarizing statement and thestated goal of the short story had been met The readership isnow primed for the next story and when a new thematic actor isintroduced Bobby in a modern and less fantastic setting itbecomes clear that a new discourse topic has emerged
Unfortunately determining topics and comments can be avery subjective exercise in a text that does not have obvious oruniversally agreed upon divisions This is primarily due to itshigh level of operation within the text meaning that topic andcomment function well above the domain of grammar andlexical bits This means that there is more semiotic space forinterpretation in choosing what the true topic and comment of apericope is Understanding this leads one to ask how suchsubjectivity might be reduced The best answer at present is thecombination of all three level of analyses prime and subsequenttheme and rheme and topic and comment Indeed constructingthe topic from the bottom up provides the most lucid andobjective end result Provided that the primes seem to point toparticular themes that themselves point to a topic that can beexplicitly identified then one can reduce the subjectivity by
78 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 10679 Porter and OrsquoDonnell Discourse Analysis 109
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 53
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
employing the model described here Further if the subsequentsand rhemes point to a clear comment then the topic andcomment have a solid foundation which inhibits subjectivity asmuch as possible
Searching for the topic and comment in a given text istherefore significant for exegetes both lay and professionalbecause it aids in uncovering the inner workings of the text as atext Too often interpretation has been founded on mirror readingcoupled with individualism which has devalued the communalaspects of the text and caused the Bible and Christian religion atlarge to be suspect by pragmatists who have shunned faith Thismodel is useful in so far as it allows the exegete to capture theidea of syntagmatic relationships across various levels ofdiscourse and also the intention of an author in writing his letterIt aids the interpreter by allowing the reader some guidelineswith which to make sense out of the holy stories which canprevent an abuse of the text that could lead to an abuse of humanlife psychologically physically and spiritually
Mark 21 consists of a major semantic boundary marked byboth spatial and temporal deictics (ie entering again intoCapernaum after some days it was heard that he is in the house)Mark 213 contains another major semantic shift by means ofspatial deictic the scene changes from being in the house tobeing beside the sea Thus the outer boundaries of the pericopeare established Within the pericope the semantic boundariesalign with the thematic actors and their associated processchains Verses 1ndash5 are concerned primarily with the interactionof Jesus and the paralytic that is brought to him from theperspective of the ldquomanyrdquo (ποltοί)mdashmainly with overcoming thedifficulty of getting the paralytic to Jesus because the ldquomanyrdquowere blocking the way to him The unnamed four who broughtthe paralytic to Jesus battle the crowd and even the house ()until they eventually are able to place the paralytic at Jesusrsquo feetSomewhat anticlimatically Jesus does not heal the paralytic butpronounces his sins forgiven This is somewhat ironic perhapseven shocking given that in Mark 1 wherever Jesus speaks
54 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
publicly he also heals and casts out demons He is speaking80 inthis pericope too but he does not immediately heal
Things change at 26 Perspective narrows to some scribeswho were there (presumably part of the many) and theirjudgment of Jesus for pronouncing forgiveness of sins of theparalytic The semantic chains formed by language related to thecrowd the house and the paralytic are broken and a newchainmdasha new topicmdashbegins with the ldquozooming inrdquo on thescribes and the disagreement they have with Jesus ldquoin theirheartsrdquo (ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν) The remainder of the pericopefocuses on the interaction between Jesus and these scribes theparalytic is reintroduced into the narrative only so Jesus can healhim and prove that he does indeed have the authority to forgivesins Given that this healing is in response to the scribesrsquo charge(by means of a rhetorical question) that only God has this kind ofauthority the comment of this portion of the pericope appears tobe that Jesus is Godrsquos divine agent
One might summarize the two topics in Mark 21ndash12 asfollows (a) Jesus responds favorably to those who act diligentlyand tenaciously on behalf of those who cannot act for themselves(21ndash5) (b) Jesus demonstrates that he is indeed Godrsquos agent torestore wholenessholiness to the land (26ndash12)
For all intents and purposes Jude has only one topic and onecomment related to it The topic itself is found in clause twelveThe exact locution unveiling the topic is τινες ἄνθρωποι meaningsomething akin to ldquocertain peoplerdquo Throughout the rest of theletter Jude expounds upon these certain people ultimatelynegatively evaluating them The final statement of topic andcomment a single sentence that grasps the entirety of the pointof the letter is as follows ldquoThese certain people that snuck in arebad therefore do not be like them and keep yourselves fromthemrdquo
80 However Mark has changed the verb he uses In this pericope this isthe first time in Mark that λαλέω is used to refer to Jesusrsquo action of teaching(ἐλάλει τὸν λόγον [v 2]) Prior to this he tended to use forms of κηρύσσω
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 55
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
Though τινες ἄνθρωποι is not prime in its clause it is clearlythe thematic actor These people have snuck into the assembly towhich the author is writing One might assert that τινες ἄνθρωποιcannot serve as the topic of the letter since the theme is notmarked but it is significant that the author begins the body of hisletter with these individuals as the thematic actors It is after allonly logical that a letter so brief would get immediately to thepoint To further support τινες ἄνθρωποι as the topic of the letterthere are clear referential pronouns guiding the readers andlisteners back to said phrase Three of the instancesmdashclauses 4065 and 74mdashuse oὗτοι ldquotheserdquo and a fourth demonstratespossession and personification τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν meaning ldquotheirmouth(s)rdquo Significantly these same instances are also prime intheir clauses Thus the textual referents back to τινες ἄνθρωποιare marked themes which soundly buttresses the suggestion thatτινες ἄνθρωποι is the topic
Further evidence supporting the chosen topic can be found bystudying the other thematic actors that do not seem to bereferring to τινες ἄνθρωποι In truth it can be argued that the vastmajority of these thematic actors actually serve as illustrationswhich are ideationally related back to the topic For instanceΜιχαὴλ the archangel Michael is the thematic actor of clause33 He is used as an intertextual thematic formation to ascribethe qualities of the devil to oὗτοι in clause 40 Thus the thematicactor here is nothing more than an allusion to support theauthorrsquos accusation toward τινες ἄνθρωποι and the same can besaid of Ἑνὼχ in clause 57 These references then cannot serveas topic material since they actually function interpersonally tooffer negative appraisal of the true topic which happens to makethem very substantial comment material
Before moving onto the more in-depth discussion of thecomment material one more potential objection must be culledOne might assert that ὑmicroεῖς which is found in clauses 69 and 77should be understood as a second topic in the letter Howeverthis need not be the case if the topic is considered correctly It isimportant to remember that a theme is not a topic just because itis a theme Here the author refers to his readers and listeners asmarked themes since ὑmicroεῖς is in the prime position This is
56 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
significant and it should be noted that he is likely emphasizingthat he is talking directly to his audience rather thanphilosophizing Still the authorrsquos volitionary statements are anattempt to position his readers through the co-textualcommands the earlier ideational illustrations and the ever-present negative appraisals to react to τινες ἄνθρωποι in theappropriate manner Thus since ὑmicroεῖς is a reactionary primaryparticipant it should not be mistaken for the global theme of itsunit of text The reactors in this case are not to be considered thetopics
Moving on in Jude the comment ought to be understood in adistinctly interpersonal way The entirety of the authorrsquos messagecan be summarized as a negative appraisal of τινες ἄνθρωποι asis most readily apparent through observing the authorrsquos extensiveuse of social name calling The first such example is found inclause twelvemdashthe same clause where the topic is explicitlyreferenced In said clause the author attributes τινες ἄνθρωποιwith godlessness (ἀσεβεῖς) A second and particularlyinteresting example lies in verses 12ndash13 Here those that snuckin are actually called stains (σπιλάδες) in a relational clauseThese are just two such examples of what could be discussed adnauseum in Jude This should be sufficient to demonstrate thatthe author believes these individuals are bad and σπιλάδεςprovides the perfect segue into discussing the rest of thecomment
The completion of the comment requires a response in thiscase There is a definite topic in τινες ἄνθρωποι and thegratuitous amounts of social name-calling and relational clauseswith negative verbal processes substantiate the readersrsquointerpretation that these individuals are bad Recalling theauthorrsquos use of ὑmicroεῖς one can easily see that there is a distinctresponse that the author has in mind as he turns his attentiondirectly to his recipients and makes them thematic participants inthe letter in clauses 69 and 77 Thus it is apparent that hisreadership must be part of the comment All that remains isidentifying the verbal processes the readers are to carry out Sucha task must revisit the ideational relationships brought about bythe authorrsquos use of intertextuality Michael and Enoch being the
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 57
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
thematic examples above In both of those allusions the point isto paint τινες ἄνθρωποι in a negative light by associating themwith an act that the readershiprsquos heteroglossic backgroundmdashtheirown social language and habits that are continually formativeand comprehendiblemdashallows them to easily understand Whenthe author reinforces these images with references to Sodom andGomorrah and Cain it is clear that the audience is to avoid anyimitation of the godless people (vv 7 11) Instead they are tokeep themselves away from them and their staining qualities(microιαίνουσιν) No one indeed wants to be spoiled throughassociation with corrupting taint
In summary taking the sum of all of the substantiated partsone arises at the topiccomment statement which is as followsldquoThese certain people that snuck in are bad therefore do not belike them and keep yourselves from themrdquo This sentenceappropriately encapsulates the entirety of Jude in one shot Themood here shifts from indicative to imperative the topic of bothis the certain people They are interpersonally labeled as bad andthe audience knows they should not imitate or associate withthem Thus topic and comment analysis when building upon thethematic analysis foundation that ought to undergird it leads to alucid and supportable statement concerning the overall messageof the letter
6 Conclusion
We have attempted to demonstrate in this paper that exegesisrequires more in-depth analysis of a text in its original languagethan simply doing lexical analysis Determining ldquowhat a text isaboutrdquo requires the exegete to consider ideational interpersonaland textual meaning Focusing on textual meaning alone canglean a much richer understanding of a given text We haveintroduced a model of textual analysis that begins at clause leveland identifies the message of each clause We also modeledtextual analysis that moves beyond the clause to identify themesat the level of clause complex (sentence and multi-sentence) aswell as topic at the sub-unit unit and discourse level It is ourhope that other biblical scholars will put these models to work
58 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
and by doing so will help sharpen them resulting in a greaterunderstanding of the biblical text
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 59
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
Appendix 1 Mark
Prime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c2_1[A]
εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
ἠκούσθη
c2_3[A]
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
c2_4[P]
συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
c2_5[A]
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν
c2_6[P]
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον
c2_7[P]
ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων
c2_10[A]
microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν
c2_14[A]
ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
c2_16[A]
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
c2_17[A]
ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικω
c2_19[add]
τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_20[P]
ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖκαθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
c2_23[A]
τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ
60 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
c2_24[P]
βλασφηmicroεῖ
c2_25[S]
τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας
c2_27[A]
microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
c2_28[A]
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷπνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
λέγει αὐτοῖς
c2_31[A]
τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
c2_32[S]
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον
c2_33[P]
εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_34[P]
ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
c2_35[P]
εἰπεῖν
c2_36[P]
ἔγειρε
c2_37[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_38[P]
περιπάτει
c2_39[P]
εἰδῆτε
c2_40[C]
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
c2_42[P]
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ
c2_43[C]
Σοὶ λέγω
c2_44[P]
ἔγειρε
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 61
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
c2_45[P]
ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
c2_46[P]
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου
c2_47[P]
ἠγέρθη
c2_48[A]
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
c2_50[P]
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας
c2_51[P]
δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
c2_53[A]
οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Rheme1
Thematic Unit1 εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1 Theme1
ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν συνήχθησαν ποltοὶ
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Subsequentc
Rheme1
microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν ἐλάλει
Primed Subsequentd Primee
Rheme1
αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν
Subsequente Primef Subsequentf
62 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
Rheme1
παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων microὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
(Subsequentf) Primeg
Rheme1
ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme1
ὅπου ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν
Primei Subsequenti Primej
Rheme1
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Subsequentj Primek Subsequentk
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 ἦσαν τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme2
Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς
Primeb Subsequentb Primec Primed
Rheme2
δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας (hellip) microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
Subsequentd Primee Subsequente
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 63
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
Rheme2
λέγει αὐτοῖς τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme2
τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ
Primeh Subsequenth Primei Subsequenti
Rheme2
Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρε ἆρον
Primej Subsequentj Primek Primel Primem
Rheme2
τὸν κράβαττόν σου περιπάτει εἰδῆτε
Subsequentm Primen Primeo
Rheme2
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς
Primep Subsequentp
Rheme2
λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Σοὶ λέγω
Primeq Subsequentq Primer Subsequentr
Rheme2
ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου
Primes Primet Subsequentt
Rheme2
ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου ἠγέρθη
Primeu Subsequentu Primev
64 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
Rheme2
εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθεν ἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων
Primew Subsequentw
Rheme2
ἐξίστασθαι πάντας δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας
Primex Subsequentx Primey Subsequenty
Rheme2
Οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Primez Subsequentz
Topic (Global Theme) and CommentUnit Boundaries Temporal and Spatial Deictics
V (Cls ) Indicator Textv1 (c2_2) Spatial deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς
Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v 1 (c2_2) Temporal deictic εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν
v1 (c2_3) Spatial deictic ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν
v 13 (c2_54) Spatial deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
v 13 (c2_54) Temporal deictic Καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are three major person reference chains that interact with each other inthis text the paralytic Jesus and ldquosome of the scribesrdquo Both the paralytic andscribes chains break after v 12 this in conjunction with the spatial andtemporal deictic markers (above) signals the end of the unit
Paralytic1 παραλυτικὸν (v 3)2 person reference (v 3 αἰρόmicroενον)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 65
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
3 παραλυτικός (v 4)4 person reference (v 4 κατέκειτο)5 παραλυτικῷ (v 5)6 τέκνον (v 5)7 of you (v 5 persPRO σου)8 παραλυτικῷ (v 9)9 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)10 person reference (v 9 ἔγειρε)11 person reference (v 9 ἆρον)12 pronominal reference (v 9 σου)13 person reference (v 9 περιπάτει)14 παραλυτικῷ (v 10)15 pronominal reference (v 11 σοὶ)16 person reference (v 11 ἔγειρε)17 person reference (v 11 ἆρον)18 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)19 person reference (v 11 ὕπαγε)20 pronominal reference (v 11 σου)21 person reference (v 12 ἠγέρθη)22 person reference (v 12 ἄρας)23 person reference (v 12 ἐξῆλθεν)
Jesus (most recent previous full reference in 125)1 ldquoherdquo (v 1 verbal person ἐστίν)2 ldquoherdquo (v 2 verbal person ἐλάλει)3 ldquohimrdquo (v 3 intnPRO αὐτὸν)4 ldquoto himrdquo (v 4 intnPRO αὐτῷ)5 ldquoherdquo (v 4 person reference ἦν)6 ldquoseeingrdquo (v 5 person reference ἰδῶν)7 Ἰησοῦς (v 5)8 person reference (v 5 λέγει)9 pronominal ref (v 7 demPRO οὗτος)10 person ref (v 7 λαλεῖ)11 person ref (v 7 βλασφηmicroεῖ)12 person ref (v 8 ἐπιγνοὺς )13 Ἰησοῦς (v 8)14 ldquohisrdquo (v 8 intnPRO αὐτοῦ)15 person ref (v 8 λέγει)16 person reference (v 10 ἔχει)
66 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
17 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 18 person reference (v 10 λέγει)19 person reference (v 11 λέγω)
Some scribes1 person reference (v 6 ἦσαν)2 pronominal reference (v 6 indfPRO τινες)3 τῶν γραmicromicroατέων (v 6)4 person ref (v 6 καθήmicroενοι)5 person ref (v 6 διαλογιζοmicroαι)6 pronominal ref (v 6 intnPRO αὐτῶν) 7 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζονται)8 pronominal reference (v 8 rflxPRO ἑαυτοῖς)9 pronominal reference (v 8 αὐτοῖς)10 person reference (v 8 διαλογίζεσθε)11 pronominal reference (v 8 persPRO ὑmicroῶν)12 person reference (v 10 εἰδῆτε)
Generic AnalysisOrientation1 Καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺmicro δι᾽ ἡmicroερῶν ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 2 καὶσυνήχθησαν ποltοὶ ὥστε microηκέτι χωρεῖν microηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν καὶ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖςτὸν λόγον
Complication1
3 καὶ ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν αἰρόmicroενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 4 καὶmicroὴ δυνάmicroενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον
Evaluationἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι τὸν κράβαττον ὅπου ὁπαραλυτικὸς κατέκειτο
Resolution (temporary)5 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ Τέκνον ἀφίενταί σουαἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι
Complication2
6 ἦσαν δέ τινες τῶν γραmicromicroατέων ἐκεῖ καθήmicroενοι καὶ διαλογιζόmicroενοι ἐν ταῖςκαρδίαις αὐτῶν 7 Τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ βλασφηmicroεῖ τίς δύναται ἀφιέναιἁmicroαρτίας εἰ microὴ εἷς ὁ θεός
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 67
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
Evaluation8 καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύmicroατι αὐτοῦ ὅτι οὕτως διαλογίζονται ἐνἑαυτοῖς λέγει αὐτοῖς Τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑmicroῶν 9 τί ἐστινεὐκοπώτερον εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ Ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁmicroαρτίαι ἢ εἰπεῖν Ἔγειρεκαὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει
Resolution (final)10 ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀφιέναι ἁmicroαρτίας ἐπὶ τῆςγῆς mdashλέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ 11 Σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 12 καὶ ἠγέρθη καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον ἐξῆλθενἔmicroπροσθεν πάντων ὥστε ἐξίστασθαι πάντας καὶ δοξάζειν τὸν θεὸν λέγοντας ὅτιΟὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδοmicroεν
Appendix 2 JudePrime and Subsequent Analysis (based on OpenText Annotation)Clause Component Abbreviations S = Subject P = Predicator C =Complement A = Adjunct
Cls[component in prime]
Prime Subsequent
c1_1[S]
Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖς
c1_4[S]
ἔλεος hellip καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν hellip ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
c1_5[add]
Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
68 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
c1_12[P]
παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰςτοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριταmicroετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
c1_16[C]
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι
c1_18[P]
εἰδότας ὑmicroᾶς πάντα
c1_19[S]
Ἰησοῦς ἅπαξ λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
c1_22[C]
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltὰ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
c1_25[S]
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
ὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸςἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroαπυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
c1_29[A]
ὁmicroοίως οὗτοι ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲν microιαίνουσιν
c1_31[C]
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
c1_32[C]
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_33[S]
῾Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
c1_34[A]
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 69
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
c1_36[A]
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας
c1_38[P]
εἶπεν
c1_39[P]
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
c1_40[S]
Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
c1_42[C]
ὅσα φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
c1_44[A]
ἐν τούτοις φθείρονται
c1_45[S]
οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
c1_46[A]
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν
c1_47[A]
τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν
c1_48[A]
τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
c1_49[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
c1_57[P]
Προεφήτευσεν καὶ τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
70 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
c1_59[P]
ἰδοὺ
c1_60[P]
ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
c1_65[S]
Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
c1_67[S]
τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
c1_69[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
c1_71[P]
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν
c1_72[A]
επ᾽ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
c1_74[S]
Οὗτοί ἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 71
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
c1_77[S]
ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστειἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
c1_81[C]
οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους
c1_83[C]
οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
c1_85[C]
οὓς λεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
c1_88[C]
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳθεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰςπάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Theme and Rheme Analysis
Theme1 Rheme1 Thematic Unit1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου
τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ ἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme1
ἔλεος καὶ εἰρήνη καὶ ἀγάπη
ὑmicroῖν πληθυνθείη Ἀγαπητοί
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
72 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
Rheme1
πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶν σωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει
Subsequentc
Rheme2 Theme2
Thematic Unit2 παρεισέδυσαν τινες ἄνθρωποι
Primea Subsequenta
(Theme2)
οἱ πάλαι προγεγραmicromicroένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίmicroα ἀσεβεῖς τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡmicroῶν χάριτα microετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν καὶ τὸν microόνον δεσπότην καὶ κύριον ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀρνούmicroενοι
(Subsequenta)
Rheme2
Ὑποmicroνῆσαι hellip ὑmicroᾶς βούλοmicroαι εἰδότας
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme2
ὑmicroᾶς ἅπαξ [NA28] πάντα Ἰησοῦς [NA28] λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας τὸ δεύτερον τοὺς microὴ πιστεύσαντας ἀπώλεσεν
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme2
ἀCcedilέλους τε τοὺς microὴ τηρήσαντας τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν ἀltʼ ἀπολιπόντας τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον
εἰς κρίσιν microεγάλης ἡmicroέραςδεσmicroοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν
Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις
Primee Subsequente Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 73
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
Rheme2
τὸν ὅmicroοιον τρόπον τούτοις ἐκπορνεύσασαι καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας πρόκεινται δεῖγmicroα πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι
οὗτοι
Subsequentf Primeg
Rheme2
ἐνυπνιαζόmicroενοι σάρκα microὲνmicroιαίνουσιν
κυριότητα ἀθετοῦσιν
Subsequentg Primeh Subsequenth
Rheme2
δόξας βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primei Subsequenti
Theme3 Rheme3
Thematic Unit3 Ὁ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἀρχάCcedilελος
τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόmicroενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώmicroατος
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme3
οὐκ ἐτόλmicroησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφηmicroίας εἶπεν
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme3
ἐπιτιmicroήσαι σοι κύριος
Primed Subsequentd
Theme4 Rheme4
Thematic Unit4 Οὗτοι ὅσα microὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν βλασφηmicroοῦσιν
Primea Subsequenta
74 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
Rheme4
ὅσα (hellip) φυσικῶς ὡς τὰ ἄλογα ζῷα ἐπίστανται
ἐν τούτοις
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme4
φθείρονται οὐαὶ αὐτοῖς
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme4
τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν τῇ πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰmicro
Primee Subsequente Primef
Rheme4
microισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν τῇ ἀντιλογίᾳ τοῦ Κόρε ἀπώλοντο
Subsequentf Primeg Subsequenth
Rheme4
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑmicroῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούmicroενοι ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιmicroαίνοντες νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέmicroων παραφερόmicroεναι δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα δὶς ἀποθανόντα
Primei Subsequenti
Rheme4
ἐκριζωθέντα κύmicroατα ἄγρια θαλάσσης ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας ἀστέρες πλανῆται οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται
(Subsequenti)
Rheme5 Theme5
Thematic Unit5 Προεφήτευσεν τούτοις ἕβδοmicroος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰmicro Ἑνὼχ λέγων
Primea Subsequenta
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 75
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
Rheme5
ἰδοὺ ἦλθεν κύριος ἐν ἁγίαις microυριάσιν αὐτοῦ ποιῆσαι κρίσιν κατὰ πάντων καὶ ἐλέγξαι πᾶσαν ψυχὴν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἔργων ἀσεβείας αὐτῶν ὧν ἠσέβησαν καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν σκληρῶν ὧν ἐλάλησαν κατʼ αὐτοῦ ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ ἀσεβεῖς
Primeb Primec Subsequentc
Theme6 Rheme6
Thematic Unit6 Οὗτοί εἰσιν γοCcedilυσταὶ microεmicroψίmicroοιροι κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας ἑαυτῶν πορευόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequenta
Theme7 Rheme7
Thematic Unit7 τὸ στόmicroα αὐτῶν
λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαυmicroάζοντες πρόσωπα ὠφελείας χάριν
Primea Subsequenta
Theme8 Rheme8 Thematic Unit8 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί microνήσθητε τῶν ῥηmicroάτων τῶν
προειρηmicroένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ
Primea Subsequenta
Rheme8
ἔλεγον ὑmicroῖν ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου χρόνου
Primeb Subsequentb Primec
Rheme8
ἔσονται ἐmicroπαῖκται κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυmicroίας πορευόmicroενοι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν
Subsequentc
76 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
Theme9 Rheme9
Thematic Unit9 Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ψυχικοί πνεῦmicroα microὴ ἔχοντες
Primea Subsequenta
Theme10 Rheme10
Thematic Unit10 Ὑmicroεῖς ἀγαπητοί ἐποικοδοmicroοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑmicroῶν πίστει ἐν πνεύmicroατι ἁγίῳ προσευχόmicroενοι
Primea Subsequentb
Rheme10
ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ τηρήσατε προσδεχόmicroενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον
οὓς (hellip) [hellip] διακρινοmicroένους
(Subsequentb) Primec
Rheme10
[ἐλεᾶτε] οὓς σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες
Subsequentc Primed Subsequentd
Rheme10
οὓς ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Primee Subsequente
Rheme10
Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν
δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία
Primef
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 77
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
Rheme10
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦν καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Subsequentf
Topic (Global Theme) and Comment AnalysisUnit Boundaries Letter Convention
Section MarkerLetter Opening (vv 1ndash2) Begins with identification of sender and
recipient ends with wish for peace
Letter Body (vv 3ndash23) Begins with address formula (ἀγαπητοί) endswith dramatic shift in person (3rd person plural to 2nd person plural (ὑmicroεῖς δέ [v 17 2])spike in directive attitude (imperative mood)
Letter Closing (vv 24ndash25) Begins with person shift (2nd plural to 3rd singular) consists of doxology
Generic AnalysisThe basic merit of this analysis for the letter is that it allows us to chop off themore formal parts of the letter meaning we can focus on the body where thebulk of the meaning is made
Greeting (1-2)1 Ἰούδας Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος ἀδελφὸς δὲ Ἰακώβου τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶἠγαπηmicroένοις καὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ τετηρηmicroένοις κλητοῖςmiddot 2 ἔλεος ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη καὶἀγάπη πληθυνθείη
Body (3-23)3 Ἀγαπητοί πᾶσαν σπουδὴν ποιούmicroενος γράφειν ὑmicroῖν περὶ τῆς κοινῆς ἡmicroῶνσωτηρίας ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι ὑmicroῖν παρακαλῶν ἐπαγωνίζεσθαι τῇ ἅπαξπαραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει 22 Καὶ οὓς microὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινοmicroένους 23 οὓςδὲ σῴζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες οὓς δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ microισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆςσαρκὸς ἐσπιλωmicroένον χιτῶνα
Closing (24-25)24 Τῷ δὲ δυναmicroένῳ φυλάξαι ὑmicroᾶς ἀπταίστους καὶ στῆσαι κατενώπιον τῆς δόξηςαὐτοῦ ἀmicroώmicroους ἐν ἀγαltιάσει 25 microόνῳ θεῷ σωτῆρι ἡmicroῶν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ
78 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
κυρίου ἡmicroῶν δόξα microεγαλωσύνη κράτος καὶ ἐξουσία πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ νῦνκαὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας ἀmicroήν
Unit Boundaries Person Reference ChainsThere are several participants that are referred in Jude Below we haveincluded the primary participants of each personmdashfirst second and thirdAdditionally we have included references to some of the more interestingallusions and prominent personalities Below participles and attributive nounsare only included if they serve as explicit metaphors for their particularreferentsmdashas in relative clauses or in the case of substantive participles glossedas relative clauses All in all the number of references to ldquocertain peoplerdquo andldquoyou allrdquo makes it readily apparent that these are the two most importantparticipants in the letter The ldquocertain peoplerdquo are clearly the most referred toand after Jude has made all of his points concerning them he admonishes hisaudience ldquoyou allrdquo to respond in a way that honors their commitment to theLord Jesus Christ
Jude1 Ἰούδας (v 1)2 person reference (v 3 ἕσχον)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 person reference (v 5 βούλοmicroαι)7 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)8 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)9 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)10 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
ldquoCertain Peoplerdquo1 person reference (v 4 παρεισέδυσαν)2 τινες ἄνθρωποι [ἀσεβεῖς] (v 4)3 οἱ προγεγραmicromicroένοι (v 4)4 microετατιθέντες (v 4)5 pronominal reference (v 8 demPro-οὗτοι)6 person reference (v 8 microιαίνουσιν)7 person reference (v 8 ἀθετοῦσιν)8 person reference (v 8 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)9 pronominal reference (v 10 demPro-οὗτοι)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 79
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
10 person reference (v 10 οἴδασιν)11 person reference (v 10 βλασφηmicroοῦσιν)12 person reference (v 10 ἐπίστανται)13 person reference (v10 φθείρονται)14 pronominal reference (v 11 demPRO-αὐτοῖς)15 person reference (v 11 ἐπορεύθησαν)16 person reference (v 11 ἐξεχύθησαν)17 person reference (v 11 ἀπώλοντο)18 pronominal reference (v 12 demPro-οὗτοι)19 person reference (v 12 εἰσιν)20 σπιλάδες (v 12)21 συνευωχούmicroενοι (v 12)22 pronominal reference (v 12 rflx-PRO ἑαυτοὺς)23 ποιmicroαίνοντες (v 12)24 νεφέλαι (v 12)25 δένδρα (v 12)26 κύmicroατα (v 13)27 pronominal reference (v 13 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)28 ἀστέρες (v 13) 29 pronominal reference (v 13 relPRO-οἷς)30 pronominal reference (v 14 demPRO-τούτοις)31 ψυχὴν (v 15)32 pronominal reference (v 15 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)33 person reference (v 15 ἠσέβησαν)34 person reference (v 15 ἐλάλησαν)35 ἁmicroαρτωλοὶ (v 15)36 pronominal reference (v 16 demPro-οὗτοι)37 person reference (v 16 εἰσιν)38 γοCcedilυσταὶ (v 16)39 microεmicroψίmicroοιροι (v 16)40 pronominal reference (v 16 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)41 pronominal reference (v 16 intnPRO-αὐτῶν)42 ἐmicroπαῖκται (v 18)43 pronominal reference (v 18 reflxPRO-ἑαυτῶν)44 pronominal reference (v 19 demPro-οὗτοι)45 person reference (v 19 εἰσιν)46 ἀποδιορίζοντες (v 19)
80 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
YouYou All1 pronominal reference (v 2 ὑmicroῖν)2 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)3 pronominal reference (v 3 ἡmicroῶν)4 pronominal reference (v 3 ὑmicroῖν)5 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)6 pronominal reference (v 4 ἡmicroῶν)7 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)8 pronominal reference (v 5 ὑmicroᾶς)9 pronominal reference (v 12 ὑmicroων)10 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 17 persPRO)11 person reference (v 17 microνήσθητε)12 pronominal reference (v 17 ἡmicroῶν)13 pronominal reference (v 18 ὑmicroῖν)14 Ὑmicroεῖς (v 20 persPRO)15 pronominal reference (v 20 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)16 pronominal reference (v 20 ὑmicroων)17 pronominal reference (v 21 rflxPRO-ἑαυτοὺς)18 person reference (v 21 τηρήσατε)19 pronominal reference (v 21 ἡmicroῶν)20 person reference (v 22 ἐλεᾶτε)21 person reference (v 23 σῴζετε)22 person reference (v 23 ἐλεᾶτε)23 pronominal reference (v 24 ὑmicroᾶς)24 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)25 pronominal reference (v 25 ἡmicroῶν)
Jesus1 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)2 Χριστοῦ (v 1)3 Ἰησοῦ (v 1)4 Χριστῷ (v 1)5 δεσπότην (v 4)6 κύριον (v 4)7 Ἰησοῦν (v 4)8 Χριστὸν (v 4)9 κύριος (v 5)10 σώσας (v 5)11 person reference (v 5 ἀπώλεσεν)
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 81
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
12 person reference (v 6 τετήρηκεν)13 κύριος (v 9)14 person reference (v 9 ἐπιτιmicroήσαι)15 κύριος (v 14)16 κυρίου (v 17)17 Ἰησοῦ (v 17)18 Χριστοῦ (v 17)19 κυρίου (v 21)20 Ἰησοῦ (v 21)21 Χριστοῦ (v 21)22 Ἰησοῦ (v 25)23 Χριστοῦ (v 25)24 κυρίου (v 25)
Angels1 ἀCcedilέλους (v 6)2 τηρήσαντας (v 6)3 pronominal reference (v 6 ἑαυτῶν)4 ἀπολιπόντας (v 6)
Sodom and Gomorrah1 Σόδοmicroα καὶ Γόmicroορρα (v 7)2 ἐκπορνεύσασαι (v 7)3 ἀπελθοῦσαι (v 7)4 person reference (v 7 πρόκεινται)
Michael1 Μιχαὴλ (v 9)2 person reference (v 9 διελέγετο)3 person reference (v 9 ἐτόλmicroησεν)4 person reference (v 9 εἶπεν)
Enoch1 person reference (v 14 Προεφήτευσεν)2 Ἑνὼχ (v 14)
82 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
Bibliography
Aune David E The New Testament in Its Literary Environment Libraryof Early Christianity 8 Louisville Westminster John Knox 1987
Bakhtin Mikhail ldquoThe Problem of Speech Genresrdquo In Speech Genres ampOther Late Essays edited by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist60ndash102 Austin University of Texas Press 1986
Berger Peter L and Thomas Luckmann The Social Construction ofReality A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge Garden City NewYork Doubleday 1966 Reprint NY Anchor 1967
Brown Gillian and George Yule Discourse Analysis CambridgeTextbooks in Linguistics Cambridge Cambridge University Press1983
deSilva David A An Introduction to the New Testament ContextsMethods amp Ministry Formation Downers Grove IVP 2004
Dvorak James D ldquoThe Interpersonal Metaphor in 1 Cor 1ndash4rdquoUnpublished PhD diss McMaster Divinity College 2012
________ ldquoThematization Topic and Information Flowrdquo Journal of theLinguistics Institute for Ancient and Biblical Greek 1 (2008) 17ndash37
Eggins Suzanne An Introduction to Systemic Functional Linguistics 2nded London Continuum 2004
Eggins Suzanne and J R Martin ldquoGenres and Registers of DiscourserdquoIn Discourse as Structure and Process edited by Teun A van Dijk230ndash56 London Sage 1997
Gabriel Andrew K ldquoLettersrdquo In Dictionary of Biblical Criticism andInterpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 193ndash95 New YorkRoutledge 2007
Halliday M A K Introduction to Functional Grammar 2nd ed LondonArnold 1994
________ ldquoLanguage and Social Manrdquo In The Collected Works of M AK Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan JWebster 65ndash130 London Continuum 2007
________ Language as Social Semiotic Baltimore University ParkPress 1978
________ ldquoLanguage in a Social Perspectiverdquo In The Collected Works ofM A K Halliday Vol 10 Language and Society edited by Jonathan
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 83
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
J Webster 43ndash64 Edited by Jonathan J Webster LondonContinuum 2007
________ ldquoLanguage Structure and Language Functionrdquo In TheCollected Works of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited byJonathan J Webster 173ndash95 London Continuum 2002
________ ldquoLinguistic Function and Literary Stylerdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Text andDiscourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 88ndash125 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText as Semantic Choice in Social Contextsrdquo In TheCollected Works of MAK Halliday Vol 2 Linguistic Studies of Textand Discourse edited by Jonathan J Webster 23ndash81 LondonContinuum 2002
________ ldquoText Semantics and Clause Grammarrdquo In The CollectedWorks of M A K Halliday Vol 1 On Grammar edited by JonathanJ Webster 219ndash60 London Continuum 2002
Halliday M A K and C M I M Matthiessen An Introduction toFunctional Grammar 3rd ed London Arnold 2004
Holquist Michael Dialogism 2nd ed New York Routledge 1990
Lemke J Textual Politics Abingdon Taylor and Francis 1995
Martin J R English Text System and Structure Philadelphia JohnBenjamins 1992
________ ldquoMourning How We Get Alignedrdquo Discourse and Society 15(2004) 323
Martin J R and David Rose Working with Discourse Meaning Beyondthe Clause 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
________ Genre Relations Mapping Culture London Equinox 2008
Martin J R and Peter RR Martin The Language of Evaluation NewYork Palgrave 2005
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook ldquoOpenTextorg Annotation Modelrdquo Nopages Cited 13 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgmodelintroductionhtml
OrsquoDonnell Matthew Brook Stanley E Porter Jeffrey T Reed RobertPicirilli Catherine J Smith and Randall K Tan ldquoClause LevelAnnotation Specificationrdquo No pages Cited 14 March 2014 Onlinehttpwwwopentextorgmodelguidelinesclause0-2html
84 Biblical and Ancient Greek Linguistics 3
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85
Porter Stanley E ldquoLinguistic Criticismrdquo In Dictionary of BiblicalCriticism and Interpretation edited by Stanley E Porter 199ndash202New York Continuum 2007
________ ldquoPericope Markers and the Paragraphrdquo In The Impact of UnitDelimitation on Exegesis edited by Raymond de Hoop Marjo C AKorpel and S E Porter 175ndash95 Leiden Brill 2009
________ ldquoProminence An Overviewrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogueedited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 45ndash74Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoThe Greek Language of the New Testamentrdquo In A Handbookto the Exegesis of the New Testament edited by Stanley E Porter 99ndash130 Leiden Brill 1997
Porter Stanley E and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell Discourse AnalysisForthcoming
________ eds The Linguist as Pedagogue Trends in the Teaching andLinguistic Analysis of the Greek New Testament New TestamentMonographs 11 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix Press 2009
Stanton Graham N A Gospel for a New People Studies in MatthewLouisville Westminster John Knox 1992
Tan Randall ldquoProminence in the Pauline Epistlesrdquo In The Linguist asPedagogue edited by Stanley E Porter and Matthew BrookOrsquoDonnell 95ndash110 Sheffield Sheffield Phoenix 2009
________ ldquoTransitivityrdquo No pages Cited 12 March 2014 Online httpwwwopentextorgresourcesarticlesa6html
Tate W Randolph ldquoGenrerdquo In Interpreting the Bible A Handbook ofTerms and Methods 149 Peabody Hendrickson 2006
Westfall Cynthia Long ldquoA Method for the Analysis of Prominence inHellenistic Greekrdquo In The Linguist as Pedagogue edited by StanleyE Porter and Matthew Brook OrsquoDonnell 75ndash94 Sheffield SheffieldPhoenix 2009
Yallop Colin ldquoWords and Meaningrdquo In Lexicology edited by MAKHalliday and Colin Yallop 23ndash93 2nd ed London Continuum 2007
DVORAK and WALTON Clause as Message 85